The Cabinet
Notice of Meeting
Monday 13 January 2014
2.00 p.m.
The Council Chamber Elizabeth House Church Street Stratford-upon-Avon
Members of The Cabinet are requested to attend
Leader Councillor Christopher Saint
Deputy Leader Councillor Stephen Thirlwell (Partnerships Portfolio)
Councillor Mike Brain Customer Access Portfolio Councillor Jennie Ellard Finance and Business Administration Portfolio Councillor Maurice Howse Enterprise, Housing and Revenues Portfolio Councillor Lynda Organ Technical Services Portfolio Councillor Gillian Roache Community Safety, Health and Wellbeing Portfolio Councillor Jonathan Spence Environment & Planning Portfolio
Observers:
Councillor Christopher Mills Chairman of the Council Councillor Stephen Gray Chairman of the OSC Councillor Richard Cheney Leader Liberal Democrat Group Councillor Roger Wright Leader Independent Group Councillor Juliet Short Leader Stratford First Independent Group
Paul Lankester Chief Executive
Elizabeth House, Church Street Stratford-upon-Avon CV37 6HX
For further information about this agenda Telephone 01789 267575 Contact: Caroline Nash Facsimile 01789 260007 Telephone: 01789 260245 Minicom 01789 260747 DX700737 STRATFORD-ON-AVON 2 e-mail: [email protected] website www.stratford.gov.uk
THE CABINET
PROCEDURE FOR PUBLIC PARTICIPATION AT MEETINGS
Members of the public are permitted to address The Cabinet if notice has been given in writing or by electronic mail to the Chief Executive no later than midday two clear days before the day of the meeting. Each notice must give the name and address of the speaker.
At any one meeting speakers may only address The Cabinet on matters contained within the Agenda.
The speaker will be invited to address the meeting at the time the item they wish to make representations on is to be discussed in accordance with the following procedure:
• a time allowance of three minutes for each member of the public to address The Cabinet be implemented; and
• if more than one person wishes to address the meeting on one particular subject, a maximum of 5 minutes would be allowed in total. Members of the public will be encouraged to nominate a spokesperson if they consider that they would not have sufficient time to adequately express their points.
Scope of statement
The Chief Executive may reject a statement if it:-
• is not about a matter for which the Council has a responsibility or which affects the District;
• is defamatory, frivolous or offensive;
• is substantially the same statement which has been put at a meeting of The Cabinet in the past six months; or
• requires the disclosure of confidential or exempt information.
No audio recording, filming, video recording or photography etc of any part of this meeting is permitted without express consent
Notice of Webcasting of Meeting
Please note that this meeting may be filmed for live or subsequent broadcast via the Council's internet site - at the start of the meeting the Chairman will confirm if all or part of the meeting is being filmed.
You should be aware that the Council is a Data Controller under the Data Protection Act. Data collected during this webcast will be retained in accordance with the Council’s published policy.
Therefore by entering the Council Chamber and using the public seating area, you are consenting to being filmed and to the possible use of those images and sound recordings for web casting and/or training purposes.
If members of the public do not wish to have their image captured they should contact Members Services on 01789 260245 who will make alternative seating arrangements.
THE CABINET
13 January 2014
AGENDA
1. Apologies for Absence
2. Disclosure of Interests Members are reminded that, unless they have been granted a dispensation, if they have a Disclosable Pecuniary Interest in any matter as defined by Regulations made by the Secretary of State where the interest is theirs, their spouse’s or civil partner’s, or is an interest of somebody with whom they are living as a husband or wife or as if they were civil partners, they may not participate in any discussion of or vote on the matter and must also leave the room for the duration of the matter. They must also disclose the interest if it has not yet been entered on the Authority’s register unless it is a sensitive interest.
3. Minutes (Pages 1 - 10) To confirm and sign the minutes of the meeting held on 2 December 2013.
Part A - Matters to be referred to Council
Leader: Leadership and Governance
4. Core Strategy and Local Development Scheme Update (Pages 11 - 26) To consider an update on work associated with the preparation of the Core Strategy and changes to the current Local Development Scheme and to consider the latest evidence concerning the District housing requirement.
NB: Recommendations 1 and 2 are to be referred to Council and therefore not subject to Call-in.
5. Notice of Motion - Neighbourhood Plans (Pages 27 - 28) To consider the following Notice of Motion in the names of Councillors Cheney and J Fradgley that the Council at its meeting on 16 December 2013 referred to The Cabinet for consideration and report:
In view of the likely further delays in the adoption of the Core Strategy, the Council reiterates its support for those teams working on Neighbourhood Plans and urges them to continue to aim to complete their Plans in a timely fashion.
It further requests, the Chief Executive to write to the relevant ministers and local MPs, to request that appropriate changes should be introduced to allow the planning process to give significant weight to completed Neighbourhood Plans, provided that the relevant Core Strategies are at least at deposit draft stage and those Neighbourhood Plans are not in conflict with that emerging Core Strategy.
Part B - Matters for Decision by The Cabinet
Leader: Leadership and Governance
6. Revenue and Capital Budget To receive the draft revenue and capital budgets for 2014/15 to 2018/19 for consultation with the public, business ratepayers and the Overview and Scrutiny Committee prior to formal recommendations being formulated at the meeting of The Cabinet on 17 February 2014.
NB This item is not subject to Call-in as the final recommendations are to be submitted to the Council meeting on 24 February 2014.
The budget papers are to be circulated under separate cover for ease of future reference.
7. Warwickshire, Coventry & Solihull Green Infrastructure (Pages 29 - 34) Strategy To receive the Green Infrastructure Strategy for the Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull area as evidence for the preparation of plans and policies at a sub-regional and local level setting out how green infrastructure can be delivered with the involvement of a range of partners, including landowners and developers.
8. Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Area Application (Pages 35 - 42) To receive a report on th e consultation exercise undertaken in respect of the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Area Designation.
9. Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan Area Application (Pages 43 - 50) To receive a report on the consultation exercise undertaken in respect of the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan Area Designation.
10. Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Area Designation (Pages 51 - 58) To receive a report on the consultation exercise undertaken in respect of the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Area Designation.
11. Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012 (Pages 59 - 98) To consider the assessment of the Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012.
12. Wellesbourne Village Design Statement (Pages 99 - 162) To consider the summary of the assessment of the Wellesbourne Village Design Statement.
Enterprise, Housing & Revenues Portfolio
13. Stratford District Community Transport Scheme - Call (Pages 163 - 168) Centre Contract To consider the proposed tender evaluation criteria for a Call Centre to manage the booking and journey scheduling for Stratford District Community Transport Scheme.
Finance and Business Administration
14. Capital Budget Monitoring 2013/14 - Periods 1 - 8 (Pages 169 - 184) To consider the Capital Budget Monitoring for the Period 1 – 8 (April 2013 – 30 November 2013).
15. Revenue Budget Monitoring - Period 8 Budget Variance & (Pages 185 - 194) Estimated Outturn Position for 2013/14 To receive an update on the overall financial position of the Authority in relation to the revenue account. This report provides Members with an analysis of net expenditure against the Period 8 budget for 2013/14 and presents an estimated revenue outturn position for each service.
16. People Strategy (Pages 195 - 202) To consider a revised People Strategy.
Technical Services Portfolio
17. Enforcement of Off-Street Parking - Residents' Parking in (Pages 203 - 214) Telegraph Street Car Park To consider the results of a consultation exercise relating to the use of the Telegraph Street car park in Shipston-on-Stour for residents’ parking.
18. Enforcement of On-Street Parking - Provision of Parking (Pages 215 - 218) Services To consider whether the Council wishes to bid for the Enforcement of On-Street Parking Contract and whether to include off-street parking enforcement within the invitations to tender.
Part C - Issues arising from Overview and Scrutiny Committees
None.
Part D - En-bloc Items
NOTE: For the items in this section, the reports and recommendations will be approved en-bloc unless a request is made to the Leader at the start of the meeting for the item to be discussed.
Leader: Leadership and Governance
19. The Cabinet Work Programme To note The Cabinet Work Programme for 10 February 2014.
To be published 10 January 2014.
20. Leader's Advisory Group (Pages 219 - 222) To receive the notes of the meetings of the Group held on the following dates:
7 October and 2 December 2013.
Enterprise, Housing & Revenues Portfolio
21. Enterprise Planning and Housing Policy Advisory Panel (Pages 223 - 228) To receive the Minutes of the meeting of the Panel held on 3 December 2013.
Part E - Other Matters
22. Urgent Business To consider any business which, in the opinion of the Chairman, is urgent in accordance with the provisions of Section 100B (4) of the Local Government Act 1972.
CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Please note : The next meeting of The Cabinet is scheduled to take place on Monday 10 February 2014
Item 3
THE CABINET
2 December 2013
MINUTES
Held at Council Chamber, Elizabeth House, Stratford-upon-Avon Meeting commenced: 2.00 p.m. Meeting ended: 3.30 p.m.
Present: Councillor C Saint, Leadership and Governance (Leader) Councillor M C Brain, Customer Access Portfolio Councillor J Ellard, Finance and Business Administration Portfolio Councillor M Howse, Enterprise, Housing and Revenues Portfolio Councillor L Organ, Technical Services Portfolio Councillor G Roache, Community Safety, Health and Wellbeing Portfolio Councillor J Spence, Environment & Planning Portfolio Councillor S Thirlwell, Partnerships Portfolio (Deputy Leader)
Also in Councillor C Mills (Chairman of the Council) Attendance: Councillor S Gray (Chairman of the OSC) Councillor R Cheney (Leader Liberal Democrat Group) Councillor R Wright (Leader Independent Group), Councillors Adams, G Matheou, P Moorse, P Oakley, E Payne and R Vaudry
531. Disclosure of Interests
There were no disclosures made.
532. Minutes
The Minutes of the meetings held on 21 October and 4 November 2013 were confirmed and signed.
533. Coventry and Warwickshire City Deal
Councillor Chris Saint – Leader of the Council
Consideration was given to the progress in relation to the development of the City Deal for the Coventry and Warwickshire area that provided an opportunity for Local Government to engage with Government to assist in business growth within the area of the Local Enterprise Partnership.
The options open to The Cabinet were to either:
1. support the City Deal proposals as detailed within the report; or
2. not to remain engaged with the City Deal proposals or agree to any financial support of the Clearing House.
In considering the options The Cabinet acknowledged:
• the financial contribution requested from the Council was modest in relation to the potential benefits to the District and the Local Enterprise Area;
Page 1
• the flagship proposal to tackle these issues was the provision of a business friendly Clearing House to act as a Growth Hub for the Advanced Manufacturing and Engineering (AME) sector through which companies could access the bespoke elements of support they currently lacked and allowed them to grow faster and further than would otherwise be the case;
• this was complemented by a secondary proposal that offered a series of specific ‘offers’ and ‘asks’ around simplifying the planning process for AME companies and developing a pipeline of major sites to accommodate the growth anticipated within the sector;
• overall the City Deal aimed to deliver a net growth of £745M in GVA (a measure of economic productivity) and the creation of over 15,000 new jobs across the Coventry and Warwickshire (CW) City Deal area by 2025, both in the AME sector and the wider economy;
• having submitted the Negotiating Document a CW City Deal ‘pitch team’ had met with ministers and officials from the Cabinet Office and the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills (BIS) on 24 October to seek agreement for the proposals;
• the City, County and District/Borough Councils within Warwickshire (although not Hinckley and Bosworth) already had an arrangement in place for the pooling of business rate growth;
• a high level five year business plan has been developed for the Clearing House;
• the Council’s contribution under the proposed cost sharing arrangement would be within the range of £18,027 to £45,442 per annum. It was proposed that this would be funded from the Council’s general fund reserves in the first instance and then included within the base budget for future years;
• the Government had currently proposed to top-slice local authority New Homes Bonus allocations from 2015/16 onwards and allocated the top- sliced funds to Local Enterprise Partnerships. Assuming these proposals were implemented it would be recommended that the CWLEP was formally notified that this Council would cease to fund the Clearing House from that point in time with responsibility for that funding transferring to the CWLEP; and,
• the Coventry and Warwickshire City Deal proposal included the provision of free pre-planning advice for the AME Sector.
The Chief Executive advised the meeting that the City Deal was due to be signed on 12 December 2013 and it was expected that the Prime Minister would be in attendance at this event.
Councillors Matheou and Oakley spoke at the invitation of the Chairman and asked questions and gave their views on the proposal.
Having regard to the above, it was
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 2
RESOLVED:
(1) That the content of the Coventry & Warwickshire (CW) City Deal Negotiation Document, as set out in the Appendix to the report, be noted;
(2) That following the presentation of the proposals to Government by the Coventry and Warwickshire (CW) City Deal’s ‘pitch team’ it be noted that it was the Government’s intention to conclude negotiations on the detail within the proposals as quickly as possible to enable the City Deal to be signed;
(3) That the cost sharing proposals to provide funding for the flagship Clearing House proposal, as recommended by the Section 151 officers of the local authorities who would participate in the CW City Deal and that under these proposals the Council’s estimated financial contribution in the range of £18,027 to £45,442 per annum be approved;
(4) That the Council’s proposed share of the local authority funding for the Clearing House be funded from general fund reserves in 2014/15;
(5) That the Coventry & Warwickshire Local Enterprise Partnership (CWLEP) be informed that, should the proposed future top-slicing and transfer of an element of New Homes Bonus (NHB) to the CWLEP be implemented, it would require future funding of Stratford-on-Avon District Council’s cost share contribution to the funding of the Clearing House to become the responsibility of CWLEP, financed from the income it received from the top-sliced NHB;
(6) That the CWLEP be informed of the intention to propose that, should the proposed future NHB top-slicing proposals be implemented, the CWLEP be formally requested to utilise all the funding it receives from this source to support the CW City Deal, with any excess remaining after this source of funding to be used to cover the total funding contribution to the Clearing House, previously provided by the local authority sector, being used to create a local Business Investment Fund;
(7) That should the NHB top-slicing proposals not proceed the Council continue to fund its cost share allocation from NHB beyond 2014/15;
(8) That a business case for the Council making a financial contribution to a local Business Investment Fund, be explored regardless of the outcome of the NHB top-slice proposals; and,
(9) That any charges in relation to pre-application advice provided to the Advance Manufacturing Engineering sector be waived.
NOTE: This item is subject to call-in to the OSC .
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 3
534. Strategic Flood Risk Assessment
Councillor Chris Saint – Leader of the Council
Consideration was given to a Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (Level 1) update to the Level 1 SFRA covering the District produced by Halcrow in January 2008 which formed part of the evidence base for the Local Development Framework that had been commissioned following advice from the Environment Agency.
The Cabinet was informed that the update:
• included significant additional technical information and data and reflected recent legislative changes;
• provided more refined information on flooding from all potential sources; and,
• included information on applying the Sequential Test, which formed the basis for decision-making at the planning application stage and in the preparation of development plan documents when allocating sites away from areas at risk of flooding.
The Options open to The Cabinet were to:
1. receive the contents of the Strategic Flood Risk Assessment Update 2013 as evidence to inform the Core Strategy and other related documents;
2. identify further issues which need to be addressed in relation to the Strategic Flood Assessment Update; or,
3. discount the Strategic Flood Risk Assessment Update as evidence.
In considering the report The Cabinet acknowledged that the:
• findings did not represent District Council policy as this would only become the case once they were applied to the planning policies in the Local Plan, initially the Core Strategy. However, since it was a public document, the update should be treated as a material consideration for the purposes of assessing and determining planning applications;
• SFRA report identified the variation in flood risk across the District. It included the Flood Zone Maps that delineate the flood zones outlined in the NPPF as Flood Zone One – Low Probability, Flood Zone 2 - Medium Probability and Flood Zone 3a – High Probability. Flood Zone 3b – the functional flood plain - has also been mapped. It also provided guidance on the application of the Sequential Approach, in order to enable the Council to guide development to areas of lower probability of flood risk. The Flooding Zones remain the starting point for the sequential approach. The report also incorporated further guidance on SFRA Level 2 and site specific Flood Risk Assessments requirements;
• updated information and guidance had been provided for emergency planning and flood risk management, in line with the Environment Agency and Defra advice. The update also contained further guidance on the use of Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems, detailing information on the appropriate locations, types and techniques within the District. As
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 4
regards the plan-making function, the update made recommendations relating to flood risk, surface water flooding, sewer and groundwater flooding and flooding from artificial sources that should be built into policy; and,
• findings highlighted a number of potential future flood alleviation schemes in the District. These were schemes that had been identified by the Environment Agency as potentially benefiting local communities. These comprised the following locations:-
o Gaydon; o Bell Brook, Snitterfield; o Lot Brook, Southam; o Cherington;and, o Fenny Compton.
In considering the above, it was
RESOLVED:
That the Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (Level 1) Update be received as evidence to inform the preparation of the Core Strategy and the Site Allocations Development Plan Documents and also as a source of evidence to inform decision making at planning application stage.
NOTE: This item is subject to call-in to the OSC
535. Dorsington Neighbourhood Plan Area Application
Councillor Chris Saint – Leader of the Council
In accordance with the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012, The Cabinet was invited to agree the designation of the Dorsington Neighbourhood Plan Area.
The options open to The Cabinet were to either:
1. approve the Dorsington Neighbourhood Plan area so that it would be designated as such, and enable the further development of the Dorsington Neighbourhood Plan; or
2. refuse the Dorsington Neighbourhood Plan area designation and to publish a notice of its refusal on the Council’s website in line with the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012.
In accordance with the Government advice note on ‘defining the neighbourhood’ The Cabinet did not take the view that the Dorsington Neighbourhood Plan Area met the criteria.
RESOLVED:
That the Dorsington Neighbourhood Plan Area not be designated in accordance with the Map submitted as Appendix 1 to the report.
NOTE: This item is subject to call-in to the OSC.
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 5
536. Transformation Challenge Award
The Cabinet was informed that the three Council’s (Stratford, Cherwell and South Northants) had been successful in their bid and had been awarded £366,932 under the Transformation Challenge fund and was presented with a paper that requested approval of:
• the offer of Government funding under the Transformation Challenge Award;
• the accountable body arrangements;
• the authority to enable draw down and utilisation of the funding; and,
• the establishment of a joint working group of elected Members.
The options open to The Cabinet were to:
• approve the recommendations, or
• not approve the recommendations.
In considering the report, The Cabinet noted that:
• in order to receive the funding it was necessary that all three Councils formally accepted the bid and agreed to the terms and conditions which would be determined by the Department for Communities and Local Government;
• Cherwell District Council would be the accountable body and for this to take place, the Chief Executive would designate the Chief Executive (Cherwell District and South Northamptonshire Councils) as an officer of Stratford-on-Avon District Council for the purposes of all matters relating to the Transformation Challenge Award and authorise her authority to release the monies for relevant purposes in compliance with the grant offer and its terms and conditions; and
• in order to establish the transformation team, a number of secondments would take place, expected to be four in total across the three Councils which would be subject to a subsequent report if a Section 13 agreement was required.
RESOLVED:
(1) That the Chief Executive in consultation with the Leader be authorised to accept the offer of funding as set out in Appendix 2 and 3 of the report, subject to the consideration of the detailed Terms and Conditions of Grant;
(2) That subject to the agreement of Cherwell District Council (decision due 2 December 2013) and following the agreement of South Northamptonshire Council (given on 14 October 2013) agreement be given to Cherwell District Council to act as accountable body for the Transformation Challenge Award funding;
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 6
(3) That the Chief Executive (Stratford-on-Avon District Council) be authorised in consultation with the Chief Executive (Cherwell District and South Northamptonshire Councils) the Assistant Chief Executive (Stratford-on-Avon District Council) and the Director of Resources (Cherwell District and South Northamptonshire Councils) to:
(i) secure the formal draw down of the grant funding from Department of Communities and Local Government, and (ii) allocate the funding for appropriate purposes in pursuance of the submitted bid (Appendix 1) and consistent with the offer letter as set out Appendix 2 to this report;
(4) That Councillors Brain and Thirlwell be appointed to the Transformation Joint Working Group with substitutes, if required, being drawn from The Cabinet; and,
(5) That the Terms of Reference of the Transformation Joint Working Group be considered at its first meeting and brought back for approval.
This item is subject to call in to the OSC.
537. Council Tax Base 2014/15
Councillor Maurice Howse – Enterprise, Housing & Revenues Portfolio
Details had been reported of the suggested Council Tax Base for 2014/15. In receiving the report The Cabinet acknowledged that the increase in Tax Base between 2013/14 and 2014/15 was significant. Whereas, in previous years this related to increases in the number of properties within the area, this was now directly affected by the caseload for individuals receiving assistance through the Council Tax Reduction Scheme. During the last year the amount of such cases had reduced by around 200 and this had contributed to the overall increase in Tax Base.
In receiving the report, The Cabinet acknowledged that the figures had been calculated in accordance with the prescribed guidelines and had been based on the best available information. Accordingly, it was
RESOLVED:
That the Council Tax Base of 48,796.71 for 2014/15 be confirmed.
NOTE: This item is subject to call-in to the OSC.
538. Future Provision for Stratford Leisure and Visitor Centre
Councillor Lynda Organ – Technical Services Portfolio
Consideration was given to the progress being made with the proposed refurbishment project at Stratford Leisure and Visitor Centre and the report requested authorisation to proceed to the detailed design and tendering/construction phases of the project.
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 7
The Options open to The Cabinet were to:
• endorse the concept design and procurement strategy; to release the design for user engagement, issue a contract notice and request the production of employer’s requirements suitable for applying for planning permission and inviting tenders, subject to the cost plan showing that the developing scheme was deliverable within the agreed budget of £5 million;
• request amendments to the concept design;
• decide not to proceed with the project at this time; and,
• suggest an alternative course of action.
Councillors Adams and Oakley spoke at the invitation of the Chairman and asked questions and gave their views on the proposal.
In acknowledging the above, it was
RESOLVED:
(1) That the proposed concept design for the refurbishment of the Stratford Leisure and Visitor Centre be endorsed and authorisation be given to progress with the development of the design to allow production of employers requirements suitable for issue as part of a design and build tender (IBA Stage E); (2) That a user engagement exercise be carried out to gain feedback from users on the proposed concept design; (3) That authorisation be given to issue a Contract Notice on the basis of the endorsed Concept Design;
(4) That authorisation be given to carry out a Pre-Qualification Questionnaires (PQQ) exercise in accordance with the evaluation criteria attached as Appendix A, to the report, to identify suitable contractors who may be invited to tender for the project.
This item is subject to call in to the OSC.
539. Active Communities Strategy 2013 - 2018
Councillor Lynda Organ – Technical Services Portfolio
Consideration was given to the Active Communities Strategy for 2013-2018 that sought to improve the health of the residents of the District by increasing participation in sport and physical activity to be achieved by working to priorities shared with partners and by improving services to residents.
The options open to The Cabinet were:
• to adopt the strategy as presented;
• to suggest revisions to the proposed strategy; or,
• to choose not to adopt the strategy.
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 8
Accordingly, it was
RESOLVED :
That the Active Community Strategy be adopted.
This item is subject to call in to the OSC.
540. Corporate Strategy Monitoring Mid Year Report 2013/14
Councillor Jennie Ellard – Finance and Business Administration Portfolio
The Cabinet was presented with the mid-year performance report for the Corporate Strategy Strategic Indicators for 2013/14.
In receiving the report, The Cabinet noted that:
• there were 17 Strategic Indicators, of which 12 were on target and two were off target. Two indicators were in their baseline year and therefore no target had been set. One indictator had action due in during quarter four.
Having regard to the information provided, The Cabinet accepted that performance against the Strategic Indicators for 2013/14 was on track for year- end achievement and
RESOLVED:
That the Performance Management mid-year report, as presented, be noted.
NOTE: This item is not subject to call-in to the OSC
541. Urgent Business
Prior to considering Minute 543 below, it was reported that it had not been possible to give 28 days clear notice required under the provisions of the Local Authorities (Executive Arrangements) (Meetings and Access to Information) (England) Regulations 2012 to consider the item in private session and in view of the time limited nature of the subject matter to be determined it was not practicable to defer the decision to a later date.
Councillor S Gray (Chairman of the Overview and Scrutiny Committee) had been consulted and had given his consent to the
• determination of the matter, in Private, with less than the required 28 days Notice; and
542. Exclusion of the Public
The Cabinet was informed that the following items contained exempt information as defined in paragraphs 1 and 3 of Part 1, Schedule 12A of Local Government Act 1972 and no representations had been received from the public requesting that they be considered in public.
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 9
RESOLVED:
That, pursuant to Section 100A (4) of the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended), the public be excluded from the remaining business of the meeting in view of the fact that the nature of the proceedings will be such that, if the public were present, there would likely be disclosure to them of exempt information under Paragraphs 3 and 5 of Part I of Schedule 12A to the said Act (as amended).
543. Contract Dispute - Update and Future Strategy
Councillor Saint – Leader of the Council
The Cabinet was informed of the current position in relation to a contract dispute.
Having regard to the views contained in the report, it was
RESOLVED:
(1) That all decisions and actions taken to date be noted; (2) That the principles in the future strategy as outlined in the report be approved, subject to any external advice.
NOTE: This item is subject to call-in to the OSC .
544. Windsor Street Car Park
Councillor Lynda Organ – Technical Services Portfolio
Consideration was given to a report for the future use of Windsor Street Car Park.
Following consideration, it was
RESOLVED:
(1) That the Windsor Street Car Park be included within the proposal described in the report.
(2) That the Head of Technical Services, in consultation with S151 Officer and the Portfolio Holders for Technical Services and Business & Finance, be authorised to conclude the detailed negotiations necessary to implement this agreement.
NOTE: This item is not subject to call-in to the OSC .
LEADER
The Cabinet 2 December 2013 Page 10 Item 4
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Core Strategy and Local Development Scheme Update Lead Officer: Dave Nash Contact on 01789 260399 Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor C Saint
Summary
The report provides an update on work associated with the preparation of the Core Strategy and identifies the changes to the current Local Development Scheme that are required to reflect reasonable expectations about the timescales within which the various Development Plan Documents can now be prepared and adopted. More specifically, it sets out the latest evidence concerning the District housing requirement and seeks a resolution from The Cabinet to consult on a new housing provision figure and associated matters.
Recommendation
That it is recommended to Council
(1) That the timetable for the preparation of the Development Plan Documents as outlined in this report be approved and that the Stratford-on-Avon District Local Development Scheme be revised accordingly.
(2) That the revised Local Development Scheme be brought into effect in accordance with Regulation 11 of the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) (England) Regulations 2004 (as amended).
That it is resolved (3) That the preparation of the Core Strategy continues on the basis of a plan period running from 2011-2031. (4) That the preparation of the Core Strategy continues on the basis of a District housing requirement figure to be determined by The Cabinet. (5) That a further period of focused consultation be initiated to seek views from interested parties as regards the revised plan period, the proposed housing requirement figure and the strategic development options under consideration.
Page 11 1 Background Information 1.1 The Local Development Scheme (LDS) is a three year project plan that has to be maintained by a local planning authority. It provides the starting point for interested parties to identify how and when current planning policies for the area will be reviewed and new policies developed. The current Stratford-on-Avon District LDS was brought into effect earlier this year following a resolution of the Council in May (minute 967 (2012/13) refers). 1.2 The current LDS indicates that the Council’s Core Strategy will be submitted to the Secretary of State in January 2014, with a predicted adoption date of November 2014. The need to undertake additional consultation on new proposals, incorporated into the Strategy with overwhelming support from the Council at its July meeting, combined with the need to address key issues arising from that consultation as reported to The Cabinet in October 2013, means that the adopted timetable is no longer achievable. Furthermore, the need to focus on the adoption of a Core Strategy has a knock-on impact on other planning policy documents due to be prepared by the Council. 1.3 Advice on the preparation of development plans such as the Core Strategy is that the plan should look forward over a period of at least 15 years beyond the date of its intended adoption. Based on the most recently projected adoption date of November 2014, the proposed end date of March 2028 means that the plan would cover less than 14 years post adoption. The need to further revise the expected adoption date has brought more firmly into focus the need to reconsider the proposed end date of the plan period. The period spanning 2008-2028 made sense when plan preparation work started in 2007, but this is no longer the case. Given that the latest Office of National Statistics (ONS) and Communities and Local Government (CLG) projections reflect information available from the recent Census and thus relate to 2011 onwards, it is considered that the plan should now be prepared for the period 2011-2031. The rolling forward of the plan period will lead to a change in the overall quantum of development to be accommodated and will require that the evidence base is reviewed and where necessary updated. The Enterprise, Planning and Housing Policy Advisory Panel considered this matter at its meeting on 3 December and has endorsed the outline briefs required to progress the work. 1.4 The reports presented to The Cabinet and Council earlier this year emphasised the importance of the Core Strategy being based on adequate, up-to-date and relevant evidence. As previously advised, the evidence around housing provision is central to the prospects of a plan being assessed as sound via the independent examination process. In recent months a number of examinations have been halted as a result of the Inspector concluding that there was insufficient evidence to show that the proposed level of housing provision represents the objectively assessed needs for market and affordable housing in the housing market area. The South Worcestershire area (Malvern Hills, Worcester and Wychavon Councils) is a recent example of this. Inspectors are increasingly finding plans to be unsound where authorities have relied upon an assessment which assumes that their individual district comprises a single housing market area. Housing markets are more typically assumed to cover sub regional areas, although they continue to be defined as an area of ‘best fit’ to coincide with administrative boundaries. This is on the practical grounds
Page 12 that most relevant statistical information is available at a district-wide level. Advice has moved on even in the short period of time since the Council agreed to plan on the basis of providing 9500 homes over the period 2008- 28. New guidance on the preparation of a Strategic Housing Market Assessment (SHMA) has been published by the Government and fresh population projections are available. Whilst not commissioned by this Council, a new SHMA for the Coventry and Warwickshire Sub Region that takes into account the latest advice and projections has been published. The Council needs to consider this fresh evidence and to determine its response. If the evidence supports a further uplift in annual housing provision, then the Council will need to consider whether a revised plan prepared to ensure the delivery of that level of housing would need to be subject to further consultation prior to its submission for examination. 1.5 Work is proceeding on the assessment of various strategic development options presented to the Council in line with the resolution agreed by The Cabinet in October. This includes the ‘Southam North’ and Stoneythorpe proposals referred to in that resolution, but also involves other sites that must be properly considered as reasonable alternatives. This process will help to indentify the most sustainable options, and thus will inform the choices that need to be made about allocating land for future development in the Core Strategy. 1.6 The programme for the remaining stages of the Core Strategy process as set out in Appendix 1 has been prepared on the basis that the Council will have agreed a level of proposed housing provision for the plan period that is consistent with the latest evidence base. It reflects the likely need to consult further due to an up lift in the level of development proposed over the new plan period. If the plan is prepared in this way then there will be less risk of delays to the programme as a result of challenges that will arise during the examination process. It is highly likely that time invested in the short term will pay dividends in the longer term. Nevertheless, the programme is considered a best case scenario and will be achievable only if the appointed Inspector considers the Core Strategy to be both sound and legally compliant. 1.7 Members will be aware that the Council’s LDS refers to the preparation of a further three documents. These are the Community Infrastructure Levy Charging Schedule, the Gypsy and Traveller Site Allocations DPD and the Site Allocations DPD for housing and employment delivery. The Council has recently consulted on its Preliminary Draft Charging Schedule, but CIL cannot be implemented before the Core Strategy is adopted. The timetable has been revised to reflect this. Work on the Gypsy and Traveller Site Allocations DPD (now proposed to be known as the Gypsy and Traveller Local Plan) is continuing as it is important to ensure that appropriate sites are identified if the development of other potentially less suitable sites is to be avoided. Furthermore, it is evident that independent Inspectors are taking a harder line during the examination process where there is insufficient evidence to suggest that a council is taking seriously the requirement to identify sites for travellers. If the DPD does not progress, there is a high risk that an Inspector would consider unsound a Core Strategy such as ours that identifies the need to provide sites but goes on only to identify broad locations of search. The programme for the work on the Site Allocations DPD for housing and employment has been updated to
Page 13 reflect the need to sequence its various stages in line with the programme for the Core Strategy. 1.8 The anticipated timetable for each of the LDS documents is set out in Appendix 1 . Subject to Council approval, the revised LDS can be brought into effect. Review of the latest evidence concerning objectively assessed housing need 1.9 The Coventry and Warwickshire Joint SHMA (CWSHMA) was published in November 2013. It was commissioned in response to comments made by the independent Inspector who was examining the Coventry City Council Core Strategy (March 2013). These called on the City Council to prepare a joint SHMA with other local authorities in the ‘Coventry Housing Market Area’. The Inspector identified the ‘market area’ as including the districts of Nuneaton and Bedworth, Rugby and Warwick. Notwithstanding this, the commissioned report covers the whole of the Coventry and Warwickshire area, including the districts of North Warwickshire and Stratford-on-Avon. 1.10 The question of how the sub regional housing market area can best be identified is addressed in detail in the report. For this district, it correctly identifies that the widespread geography means that the area is subject to different housing market influences. At its most simple, the analysis shows that the more northern and western parts of the District look to the Birmingham and Solihull market area (which includes Redditch), the more northern and eastern parts of the District look to Warwick, Rugby and Coventry, and the more southern parts of the District look to areas within Oxfordshire/Gloucestershire and to the Evesham area. However, the conclusion drawn by the consultants is that the strong functional links in migration and commuting terms between Coventry and all five districts in Warwickshire makes it appropriate to conclude that the housing market includes the main settlements in each of the districts. The CWSHMA has been prepared on the basis that the whole of Coventry and Warwickshire should be defined as the relevant housing market area for strategic planning purposes. 1.11 The Cabinet will be conscious that it is as recent as April 2013 that it last considered the district housing requirement figure, a process that led to an agreement to plan for 9500 houses over the period 2008-2028. However, there have been some key changes since that date that have an influence on the conclusions reached. The most significant are the release of DCLG’s 2011-based household projections and the publication by the Government of its new draft National Planning Policy Guidance (NPPG). This includes fresh advice on the identification of housing need, with a clear message that the starting point must be the latest housing projections. 1.12 The key messages emerging from the CWSHMA are twofold. Firstly, as is outlined above, that the housing market area having the ‘best fit’ to the administrative boundary of this District is the Coventry and Warwickshire HMA. Secondly, that the objectively assessed housing need for the District over the period 2011-2031 should lie between 540 to 600 dwellings per annum, with the recommended figure being 570 per annum (11400 over a 20 year period). The lower end of the range is said to take into account the likelihood of there being a slow return to a higher rate of household formation, reflecting some suppression of demand during the last five years. The higher end of the range is said to reflect advice in the NPPG about the
Page 14 desirability of boosting the supply of affordable housing and increasing provision to bolster the supply of labour (and thus to support the local economy). 1.13 In reaching its decisions on the housing requirement in April/May 2013 the Council was informed by a report from Environmental Resource Management (ERM) that reviewed all the evidence then available. ERM has been commissioned to produce an updated review that takes fully into account the most recent evidence as outlined above. Their update is published as a Background Paper to this report and its conclusions are attached (Appendix 2 ) for ease of reference. ERM maintain their advice that the housing requirement should be broadly based on a realistic assessment of future migration using the recent 10 year average, whilst also aiming to support the Council’s economic aspirations as set out in its Business and Enterprise Strategy. This means providing for a modest increase in the resident labour force in the district, but ERM advise that the extent to which the housing requirement should be increased to secure a larger resident workforce is necessarily a matter of judgement. 1.14 ERM endorse a significant part of the content of the CWSHMA, including its assumptions about a gradual return to higher rates of household formation. However, it is also ERM’s advice that very recent evidence (which therefore is not included in the CWSHMA) concerning the population change arising from in-migration suggests that a 10 year average of 1025 persons per annum (rather than 1056 persons per annum) should be used. Additionally, it is suggested that the uplifted figure (to 570 dwellings per annum rather than 540) proposed by the CWSHMA is not warranted by the evidence it presents. ERM say that the objectively assessed housing need for the District over the period 2011-2031 should lie between 525 to 540 dwellings per annum (10500 to 10800 over 20 years), depending on the position the Council wishes to adopt concerning boosting resident labour supply and affordable housing provision. Strategic housing options currently being proposed and tested 1.15 Following the report to Cabinet on 21 October 2013 on the outcome from the New Proposals Consultation, further discussions about the proposals for development at Gaydon/Lighthorne Heath (GLH) have progressed with the relevant parties. These discussions have culminated in a revised development proposal coming forward that would enable Jaguar Land Rover (JLR) to expand its current Gaydon site onto land to the east of the B4100 that was previously proposed for a mix of housing and employment related development. The capacity of the site to accommodate new housing is as a result significantly reduced. The new housing would now be restricted to that part of the site lying to the north of Gaydon Coppice and the anticipated capacity is up to approximately 3000 dwellings. It is no longer proposed that new employment land would be included other than that potentially to be developed by JLR. Overall, this is a markedly different proposal from that previously consulted on. It is recommended that further consultation should now be carried out on the revised proposal ( Appendix 3). The Cabinet should note that the idea of identifying land to the south of the B4451 as an alternative location for employment related development, as reported in October, does not now form part of the proposal. 1.16 The other strategic housing sites currently being evaluated, along with the latest information on these sites, are as follows:
Page 15 • South East Stratford – an urban extension to the south and east of Stratford-upon-Avon, lying generally between Banbury Road and Tiddington Road. The development would provide between 2500 and 3000 dwellings, approximately 8ha of employment land and associated infrastructure. This would include primary and secondary schooling. The development would require the construction of an eastern relief road to the town linking the A422 Banbury Road to the A439 Warwick Road and crossing the River Avon between Tiddington and Alveston. • Long Marston Airfield – a new settlement on a site of approximately 224 ha lying to the west of the B4632 Campden Road some 4 miles to the south west of Stratford-upon-Avon. The development would provide approximately 3000 dwellings and 14ha of employment land. The promoters are investigating an option to provide a south western relief road to Stratford-upon-Avon to mitigate the potential impact of additional traffic on the town and the current bridge crossings, following a route that would link the B4632 to the B439 Evesham Road. • Southam North – a development straddling the A423 between Southam and Long Itchington, including disused land forming part of the Southam Cement Works. The identified site extends to around 110ha. The development would provide an estimated 2350 dwellings, a new local centre and schools. • Lower Farm, Stoneythorpe – a proposal for a new freestanding village on land adjacent to the Codemasters premises lying on the south side of the A425 approximately 1 mile to the west of Southam. The development is promoted on the basis that it could provide up to a maximum of 1000 dwellings supported by small scale retail/commercial facilities. Each of these sites present both opportunities and problems. It is confirmed that additional work on the viability and deliverability of all five options has been commissioned and will be available to the Council to inform final decisions on which option(s) to take forward in the Submission Draft plan. In parallel with this work, it is recommended that consultation on each of these sites should be progressed alongside that relating to the revised proposal for GLH. 2 Options available to The Cabinet 2.1 The Cabinet has a number of options in relation to three key aspects of this report, namely the review of the LDS, the new information concerning the plan period and the related housing requirement, and the ongoing assessment of strategic housing options. 2.2 On the LDS, it can recommend either that the Council approves the proposed changes in accordance with the timetables set out in Appendix 1 , or that revisions to those timetables be presented. 2.3 On the plan period, it can determine either that the Council should proceed on the basis of a revised period of 2011-2031 for the Core Strategy, or that it should proceed on the basis of some other plan period having an end date of at least 15 years beyond the expected adoption date in 2015. Proceeding on the basis of any lesser period would be inadvisable and would risk the strategy being found unsound at Examination stage. 2.4 On the housing requirement, assuming the plan period is rolled forward to 2031 then the requirement for this revised period based on the agreed
Page 16 figure of 9500 for the period 2008-2028 would increase to 9875. [The current figure is based on 375 dwellings per annum 2008-2012 and 500 dwellings per annum thereafter.] The more recent evidence indicates that an objective assessment of housing need for the period 2011-2031 would place the requirement within the range 10500 to 10800 (ERM) or at 11400 (CWSHMA). The Cabinet should agree the level of housing provision that the Council will plan for and should consider whether or not this new figure should be subject to consultation prior to final decisions being made in relation to the Submission Draft Plan. 2.5 On the assessment of strategic housing options, it is recommended that further consultation be carried out on the proposals at five locations across the District. The Cabinet can accept this recommendation, can reject it or can decide to eliminate one or more sites from further consideration. The Cabinet’s decision needs to reflect the fact that at Examination stage the Council will need to be able to show that it has considered reasonable alternatives as regards the distribution of housing provision. 3 Member comments 3.1 The Leader of the Council’s comments have been incorporated into this report. 4 Implications of the Proposal 4.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 4.1.1 Preparation of the LDS is a statutory requirement of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004. The LDS should be reviewed and submitted to the Secretary of State on at least an annual basis. 4.1.2 The Council’s Statement of Community Involvement establishes its approach to consulting during the preparation of its local planning documents. Whilst there is no legal requirement to consult at this stage of plan preparation, it is evident that there are strategic options under consideration that have not to date been subject to specific consultation with interested parties. 4.2 Financial 4.2.1 The Council has agreed a budget that is expected to cover all the costs associated with the production of these DPDs. 4.2.2 The Government has confirmed its proposal pushing back to April 2015 the deadline from which the use of Section 106 planning obligation agreements will be scaled back. This significantly reduces the risk that the revised target for adoption of the Core Strategy and CIL Charging Schedule will have a negative impact on the receipt of contributions required to mitigate the impact of development. 4.3 Environmental 4.3.1 All documents prepared as part of the LDS will be subject to either a Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) and/or a Sustainability Appraisal (SA). This will ensure that the implications of all policies and proposals are assessed against a range of environmental, economic and social criteria. An updated SA will be available to inform the proposed consultation. 4.4 Corporate Strategy 4.4.1 All documents prepared as part of the LDS will reflect the Council’s
Page 17 corporate priorities and will be linked as necessary to the Sustainable Community Strategy. The LDF particularly relates to Aims 1, 2 and 4 of the Corporate Strategy. 4.5 Equality Impact Assessment 4.5.1 No specific equality impact issues have been identified in association with the preparation of the Local Development Scheme. The Core Strategy will be subject to a full assessment to inform the Submission Draft stage. 4.6 Risk Assessment 4.6.1 There are two principal risks if the LDS is not prepared or if it is deficient. The first risk is the failure to comply with statutory duties as set out above. The second risk is that the spatial planning policies of the District Council are not sufficiently up to date or robust and that key corporate and environmental objectives are not met. It is considered that approval of the appended document will mitigate these risks. 4.6.2 Any further slippage in the Core Strategy timetable would exacerbate the reputational risk to the Council. It is thus imperative that the timetable is realistic, taking a balanced view about the prospects of the plan progressing without delay through the examination process. 4.6.3 The identification of a housing requirement that properly reflects objectively assessed housing need is critical to the prospects of a submitted Core Strategy being considered sound. This report sets out information suggesting that objectively assessed need lies within the range of 525 to 570 dwellings per annum, or 10500 to 11400 over the plan period. Experience elsewhere suggests that the development industry is highly likely to argue that housing need is well in excess of this range. Whilst there is felt to be no objective evidence to support this, it will be evident to members that the risks of a plan being deemed unsound are likely to increase if the Council adopts a figure at the bottom of the range. 4.6.4 The risk of the Council’s plan preparation process being challenged at the Examination stage would be reduced if a further period of consultation is carried out now. In view of the timetable for further work necessary to update the Council’s evidence base and to inform the final decisions that need to be made prior to submission, a further consultation can be undertaken without risking the further delay of the plan. 5 Conclusion 5.1 The revised LDS takes into account the latest available information and sets out a project plan for the preparation of Local Development Documents for the period up to 2016. It reflects the Council’s commitment to completing the Core Strategy as quickly as is reasonably possible, but also demonstrates a commitment to progress the preparation of the CIL Charging Schedule and two Development Plan Documents which themselves will form part of the Local Development Framework and will enable the allocation of sites for future development in the District. 5.2 It is recommended that Council be requested to bring the revised Local Development Scheme into effect in accordance with Regulation 11 of the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) (England) Regulations 2004. 5.3 It is no longer prudent to proceed on the basis of a plan period running to 2028. To meet the guidance established in the NPPF, an end date of 2031
Page 18 is considered appropriate. The recommended plan period is 2011-2031. 5.4 Fresh evidence concerning the objectively assessed housing need for the District has become available. This evidence has taken into account the latest guidance from the Government on the preparation of housing market assessments and the identification of housing need. An update to the review conducted by ERM early in 2013 indicates that there are sound reasons to increase the housing requirement based on the latest evidence. However, ERM suggest that a different figure to that identified by the CWSHMA is appropriate having regard to very recent information concerning migration rates and discounting the adjustment made in the CWSHMA to the objectively assessed midpoint headship figure for the District. The Cabinet should identify the new housing need figure that in its view is the most appropriate taking into account both the Council’s adopted Business and Enterprise Strategy, which identifies a wish to boost the local economy, and the need to deliver affordable housing. It is recommended that the newly adopted figure be subject to consultation prior to the Council proceeding to submission stage. 5.5 Having regard to the latest information concerning the available strategic housing options, it is also recommended that a further period of consultation be instigated to seek feedback from interested parties on these proposals.
Paul Lankester CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Background Papers
Stratford-on-Avon District Local Development Scheme 2013 Coventry and Warwickshire Joint SHMA November 2013 (GL Hearn Ltd) Update to Review of Housing Requirements for Stratford-on-Avon DC December 2013 (Environmental Resource Management)
Page 19 This page has been left intentionally blank Summary Table - Local Development Scheme
Ref. Objective/Outcome Task Target 1 Production and adoption of Preparation of updated housing options 2011-2031 November 2013 to January 2014 the Core Strategy DPD Consultation on updated housing options 2011-2031 January/February 2014 Council approval of draft submission version May 2014 Test of Soundness representation period June/July 2014 Processing of representations August 2014 Council consideration of representations September 2014 Submission to the Secretary of State September 2014 Examination of plan, including hearings October 2014 to January 2015 Receipt of Inspector’s report March/April 2015 Adoption April 2015 2 Production and adoption of Approval of Preliminary Draft Charging Schedule October 2013 Page 21 Page Community Infrastructure Public consultation November/December 2013 Levy Charging Schedule Approval of Draft Charging Schedule July 2014 Public consultation August/September 2014 Approval of Submission to the Secretary of State October 2014 Submission to Secretary of State November 2014 Examination of plan, including hearings December 2014/January 2015 Receipt of Inspector’s report March 2015 Adoption April 2015 3 Gypsy and Traveller Local Initial consultation and call for sites November 2013-March 2014 Plan Prepare Preferred Options April/May 2014 Consultation on Preferred Options June/July 2014 Prepare Submission draft August-October 2014 Publication of Submission draft November 2014 Test of Soundness representation period November/December 2014 Submission to the Secretary of State January 2015 Examination of plan, including hearings February-April 2015 Receipt of Inspector’s report May 2015 Adoption June 2015 Item 4 Appendix 1 Ref. Objective/Outcome Task Target 4 Site Allocations DPD (Housing Initial consultation, scoping and call for sites April-June 2014 and Employment Delivery) Prepare Preferred Options July-September 2014 Consultation on Preferred Options October/November 2014 Prepare Submission draft December 2014/January 2015 Publication of Submission draft February 2015 Test of Soundness representation period February/March 2015 Submission to the Secretary of State June 2015 Examination of plan, including hearings July-October 2015 Receipt of Inspector’s report January 2016 Adoption February 2016
Page 22 Page Item 4 Appendix 2
Extract from Update to Review of Housing Requirements for Stratford-on-Avon District Council 18 December 2013 www.erm.com
1.6 CONCLUSIONS
1.6.1 Given the significant new evidence available on demographic factors since the preparation of the Review, we consider that the housing provision figures for SoAD recommended there should be amended. However, there is no clear evidence to suggest that the original reasoning in the Review has been invalidated by the new data and analysis contained in the CWSHMA or in the new draft Guidance.
1.6.2 In our view, the projections in the CWSHMA should replace those in the HPOSU and provide an appropriate and up to date tool for assessing the impact of natural population change and different levels of net in-migration on future housing requirements. However, we do not concur with the CWSHMA’s conclusions on the ‘assessed need’ for net additional dwellings in SoAD. In particular, we do not consider there is a justification for adding any uplift to the dwellings required to meet the ‘Midpoint’ projections to support economic growth as proposed by the CWSHMA. Having concluded that “ 3,750 homes p.a. would represent a reasonable level of provision across the HMA”, based directly on the ‘Midpoint’ projection for the whole HMA, the CWSHMA nevertheless raises this figure to 3,800 dwellings p.a., principally by the addition of over 30 dwellings p.a. to SoAD’s ‘Midpoint’ figure of 540 dwellings p.a. In our view, this uplift is in addition to the ‘objectively assessed need’ of the HMA and therefore of SoAD, which is treated by the CWSHMA as forming a part of the HMA.
1.6.3 We re-iterate our position, taken in the Review, that the selection of a housing requirement should be broadly based on a realistic assessment of future migration using the recent ten year average, while aiming to support the Council’s economic aspirations as set out in its Business and Enterprise Strategy by providing for a modest increase in the resident labour force in the district. The amount of such increase is necessarily a matter of judgement. This judgement needs to take account of the likely success or otherwise of setting a higher housing requirement in achieving an increase in local labour supply in the light of the possible unintended consequences.
1.6.4 In line with the new draft Guidance, we follow GL Hearn in considering that projections based on the ‘Midpoint’ household formation rates are likely to be the most realistic in allowing for a gradual release of suppressed demand arising from the economic downturn. Based on the demographic relationships derived directly from the CWSHMA projections, we estimate that the housing requirement to accommodate a ten year migration trend of 1,025 p.a. is 10,500, while the housing figure to maintain a constant resident labour force is 9,800. The CWSHMA’s ‘Midpoint’ projection for SoAD, which incorporates a higher net migration of 1,056 p.a. embodied in the latest 2011 ONS SNPP, is 10,800. A provision level of 10,500 to 10,800 dwellings over the plan period would therefore allow for 700 to 1,000 households to potentially contribute towards increased employment levels. We, therefore, propose that the housing provision figure in the Review be revised from a range of 9,500 to 10,000 to a range of 10,500 to 10,800 dwellings.
1.6.5 It should be noted that only around 1,700 of these dwellings would be generated by natural change in the existing population. The remaining 8,800 to 9,100 would accommodate net in-migrants. While the projections assume that these would include sufficient people of working age to make up for the reduction in labour force due to the ageing of the existing population, this cannot be ensured. There may indeed be a boost to local employment levels, which would support economic growth in the area, but there
Page 23 may equally be a disproportionate number of new out-commuters and of elderly in- migrants who would contribute to further unbalancing the age structure of the population. Because of these risks we would not recommend further increasing the level of housing provision beyond 10,800, the level at which a modest increase in the number of employed persons is considered plausible.
Page 24 Item 4
Draft Policy Wording for Proposal GLH Appendix 3
Where it is to be delivered?
Land largely bounded by the M40, B4451 and B4100 and to north and east of Lighthorne Heath.
Approximately 290 Ha Gross
What is to be delivered?
• Housing – up to approximately 3,000 dwellings (up to 2,500 dwellings by 2031)
• Land comprising approximately 100 hectares to enable the future expansion of Jaguar Land Rover (JLR) for uses that can include:
o Research, design, testing and development of motor vehicles and ancillary related activities.
o Other advanced engineering technologies and products.
o Low volume manufacturing and assembly operations.
o Development of associated publicly accessible event, hospitality, display, leisure and conference facilities and marketing infrastructure.
o Automotive education and training including limited ancillary residential accommodation.
• One main village centre, appropriately located to serve both the overall development and the existing resident and workforce communities, comprising a range of shops and services to support these existing and new communities.
• One local centre.
• Community, health & leisure facilities.
• One three form entry primary school.
• A contribution to support off-site provision for secondary schooling.
• Network of open spaces and community woodlands.
• Structural landscaping, including alongside M40.
• Managed ecological reserve at Lighthorne Quarry.
• Ecological networks within and adjacent to the development.
• Strategic open and landscaped buffers to maintain the separate identity and integrity of the existing villages of Lighthorne and Gaydon.
• Highway improvements in the vicinity of the site and to the wider network.
• Walking and cycling links within the site and to integrate with the surrounding countryside.
• Frequent, express bus services to Warwick/Leamington and Banbury, including railway stations.
When is it to be delivered?
Phases 2-4 (2016/17 to 2030/31) and post 2031
E:\moderngov\Data\AgendaItemDocs\6\5\6\AI00022656\$1fdapr3y.doc Page 1 Page 25
How is it to be delivered?
Private sector, public sector, infrastructure and service agencies
Specific Requirements
Production of a Masterplan Supplementary Planning Document (SPD) to determine the key principles of land uses, layout, design, phasing, infrastructure and mitigation. The SPD will need to accord with the following specific requirements:
• All elements of the proposal, including both the new housing and related facilities and the future expansion of the Jaguar Land Rover facility, will be considered comprehensively such that they will not comprise ‘stand-alone’ land uses.
• The proposed new housing and future expansion of the Jaguar Land Rover facility will properly integrate with, complement and where appropriate deliver related enhancements to the existing employment land at the Gaydon Site and the existing urban fabric at Lighthorne Heath.
• The expansion of the Jaguar Land Rover facility will be considered within the context of a wider long term masterplan for the existing Jaguar Land Rover operations on the Gaydon Site.
• The first phase of residential development will be defined to include the initial phased delivery of the new primary school, community facilities and village centre.
The Masterplan SPD will identify:
• Mix, type and tenure of dwellings including the opportunity for specialist accommodation to include extra care for the elderly, private sector rental and self-build opportunity.
• Range and scale of community services and facilities to be provided.
• Provision and phased implementation of all necessary infrastructure.
• Clear guidance on how land uses within the site and beyond are integrated both physically through the provision of public routes and visually through urban design principles.
• Integrated open space, ecological mitigation, and biodiversity strategy for the site as a whole and how this relates to a wider countryside accessibility strategy.
• Protection and integration of Ancient Woodlands and Local Nature Reserves within and adjacent to the site.
• Role and treatment of the B4100 and its relationship to the proposed and existing development.
• Public access to open space within and beyond the development.
• Use of on-site resources during construction.
• Incorporation of alternative energy sources
• Measures for reducing reliance on the private car.
The Masterplan SPD will also incorporate key design parameters that will inform a detailed design code for respective phases of development. In addition it will include a delivery strategy.
E:\moderngov\Data\AgendaItemDocs\6\5\6\AI00022656\$1fdapr3y.doc Page 2 Page 26 Item 5
THE CABINET
13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Notice of Motion – Neighbourhood Plans
Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor Chris Saint Leadership and Governance
Summary
The Cabinet has been asked by the Council to consider a Motion in the names of Councillors Cheney and J Fradgley in respect of Neighbourhood Plans, as presented to the Council meeting on 16 December 2013.
Recommendation
To consider the Motion and submit an appropriate recommendation(s) to the Council
1 Background/Information In accordance with Council Procedure Rules the Council, at its meeting on 16 December 2013, referred to The Cabinet the following motion:
1.1 Shared Resources The following motion was proposed by Councillor Cheney and seconded by Councillor J Fradgley:
In view of the likely further delays in the adoption of the Core Strategy, the Council reiterates its support for those teams working on Neighbourhood Plans and urges them to continue to aim to complete their Plans in a timely fashion.
It further requests the Chief Executive to write to the relevant ministers and local MPs to request that appropriate changes should be introduced to allow the planning process to give significant weight to completed Neighbourhood Plans, provided that the relevant Core Strategies are at least at deposit draft stage and those Neighbourhood Plans are not in conflict with that emerging Core Strategy.
2 Options open to The Cabinet Having had the Motion referred to it, the following options are open to The Cabinet:-
a) To consider the content of the Motion at the meeting without the benefit of a report from the officers on the implications to the Council of accepting or rejecting the Motion;
Page 27 b) To defer consideration of the Motion to await reports from the officers to the next available meeting of The Cabinet; or c) To refer the Motion to the Overview and Scrutiny Committee for consideration and report back to The Cabinet.
PAUL LANKESTER Chief Executive
Page 28 Item 6
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Revenue and Capital Budget 2014/15 to 2018/19 Lead Officer: David Buckland Contact on 01789 260425 Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor C Saint/Councillor J Ellard
Summary The purpose of this report is to present the draft revenue and capital budgets for 2014/15 to 2018/19. Following consideration by The Cabinet the draft budgets will be used to consult the public and the Overview and Scrutiny Committee before final recommendations are made to Council at the meeting of The Cabinet on 17 February 2014.
It is recommended that the following be endorsed and recommended for scrutiny:-
1) The Council’s Medium Term Financial Plan 2014/15 to 2018/19;
2) Proposed Budget Amendments – taking into account the impact on the Council’s Revenue Budgets for 2014-19 (Appendix 3);
3) The potential level of net expenditure and resultant Council Tax for 2014-19 as per paragraph 6.1;
4) The fees and charges as shown in Appendix 4.
1 Background/Information 1.1 This report presents the Council’s proposed spending plans for the next five years. Attached at Appendix 1 is the forecast Base Budget position for the period 2014/15 to 2018/19. 1.2 The Base Budget includes the financial implications of all of the previously approved Council initiatives and known changes which are not of a policy nature. The Cabinet proposals which are recommending changes to the Base Budget are considered within this report at Section 6 and Appendix 3. 1.3 As with the previous three years the Council has seen significant reductions in resources from Central Government Grant. This budget has been prepared in line with the Provisional Local Government Finance Settlement 2014/15 to 2018/19. 1.4 Estimates of future Central Government funding have been included for the years 2016/17 to 2018/19. The Spending Round 2013 announced
Page 29
reductions in resources of 10% for local government in 2015/16; it is assumed that there will be further reductions beyond this point. 1.5 This Financial Strategy includes a reduction of Government grant of 11.6% in 2014/15 and a further 15.2% in 2015/16; these reductions are on top of previous reductions in support. 1.6 The Base Budget position has been prepared on the basis that the Council will be accepting the Government’s offer of grant in return for a Council Tax Freeze in 2014/15 and 2015/16. The offer from Government is grant equivalent to 1% of the level of Council Tax income in both years. For 2016/17 and beyond the assumption for the Medium Term Financial Plan is that the Council Tax will increase by 2% per annum. 1.7 In preparing the Base Budget, efficiency measures and savings have been identified by all services to mitigate as far as possible the impact of these reductions in grant. Attached at Appendix 2 are all changes to the budget from the original budget approved in February 2013. 1.8 There are no significant changes to fees and charges incorporated into the Base Budget for 2014/15. All fees and charges have been reviewed however and are attached for consideration at Appendix 4. 2. The Base Budget 2014-19 2.1 The Council’s Summary Budget and individual Service summaries are enclosed as Appendix 1. 2.2 The format of the 2014-19 Base Budget reflects the current Service structure; this sees the removal of the Head of Customer Support, with the replacement of the Head of Legal and Democratic Services. A number of the budget responsibilities previously under the Head of Corporate Support have been allocated to other Heads of Service under interim arrangement. A copy of the detailed Budget 2014-19 can be forwarded to Members electronically on request. 2.3 Inflation has been included in the Base Budget for 2014/15 onwards as follows: Table 1 – Inflation Assumptions 2014/15 to 2018/19 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 % % % % % Pay 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Business rates and other 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 contractual commitments Other 0 0 0 0 0
2.4 The Base Budget takes account of the current position in relation to the forecast level of interest that the Council can expect to receive. It is expected that the current base rate of 0.5% will remain in place for around a further 18 months. This issue is being monitored by the Cash Management Working Group. The current assumptions that have been used within the Base Budget are as follows for expected returns:
Page 30
• 2014/15 - 1.25% • 2015/16 - 1.75% • 2016/17 - 2.00% • 2017/18 - 3.00% • 2018/19 - 3.50% 2.5 Attached at Appendix 2 is a schedule which details the changes between the original estimate for 2013/14 and the Base Budget for 2014/15. There is an increase £0.5m which is made up of several specific issues. The most significant items can be summarised as follows: • Contract inflation and pay inflation – £222,108. • Removal of one-off budget for Core Strategy – (£200,000). • Reduction in income from Public Conveniences – £143,000. • Reduction in Government grant towards processing Benefits - £56,979. • Potential Borrowing Costs for Capital Programme - £200,000. • Election Budgets reinstated (no SDC elections in 2013/14) - £101,780. 2.6 It should be noted that only totally unavoidable growth has been allowed within Base Budget which may relate either to contracts, statutory requirements or to previous commitments. 2.7 In terms of external Prudential Borrowing, the Council has no current plans to enter into external borrowing in 2014/15. However, following the meeting of The Cabinet on 3 December 2012 where support was made in principal to investigate further the principle of refurbishing the Stratford Leisure and Visitor Centre and on-going contractual dispute; provision to borrow for this project, should it be required, has been allowed within the Base Budget. 2.8 A major cost to the Council remains the Local Government Pension Scheme. Following consultation a new scheme related to career related earnings rather than final salary is to be implemented in April 2014. The actuaries appointed by Warwickshire County Council have conducted their three yearly review during the last year. The result of the review is that the overall contributions expected from Stratford-on-Avon District Council will increase by 0.75% per annum over the duration of the Medium Term Financial Plan (MTFP). These revised contribution rates have been applied to the MTFP. 2.9 Assumptions have been made that the on-street parking function will transfer to the direct management of Warwickshire County Council as from 1 November 2014. This move has a negative financial consequence to the District Council. This impact has been mitigated as far as is reasonably possible; however still results in a budget pressure of around £20,000. This is an estimated figure for budgeting purposes, however, the final position is subject to the item on this agenda separately. 3. Local Authority Revenue Finance Settlement for 2014/15 3.1 On 18 December 2013, the Council received the Provisional Local Government Settlement for 2014/15 and 2015/16. This follows on from the announcement from the Chancellor of the Exchequer within the Spending Round 2013, which indicated that the support to Local Government would reduce by 10% in 2015/16.
Page 31
3.2 It should be noted that it is difficult to make year on year comparisons in funding from Government due to methodology changes in respect of the new arrangements to provide support towards Council tax payments. The table below identifies the current position in relation to the Government formula grant. Table 2 : Government Grant 2013/14 to 2018/19
Year Value of Government Decrease Support (*) £ £ % 2013/14 5,402,063 2014/15 (provisional) 4,774,920 627,143 11.6 2015/16 (illustrative) 4,050,913 724,007 15.2 2016/17 (est) 3,586,342 464,571 11.5 2017/18 (est) 3,404,541 181,801 5.0 2018/19 (est) 3,231,751 172,790 5.0 (*) – excluding New Homes Bonus 3.3 At this stage the level of the reduction in Government grant for 2016/17 is assumed to be around 11.5%. This takes account of the expected removal of the Council Tax Freeze Grant relating to 2011/12 and the Homelessness Prevention Grant. For 2017/18 and 2018/19 the reduction is estimated to be 5% pa. 3.4 The final figures in relation to the Local Government Finance Settlement (LGFS) for 2014/15 are expected to be announced by Government at the end of January 2014. 3.5 On 16 December 2013 the Council received the provisional notification of the New Homes Bonus Allocation for 2014/15 which amounted to a total of £1,604,207. This is the fourth year of the operation of the New Homes Bonus and the table below demonstrates that the new allocation for 2014/15 was £522,365, which is on top of the £1,081,842 in respect of 2011/12 to 2013/14. For information when New Homes Bonus is allocated for a particular year this is then repeated for the following five years thereafter. Table 3 : New Homes Bonus from 2011/12 to 2017/18 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 2016-17 2017-18
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 Year 1 218 218 218 218 218 218 Year 2 379 379 379 379 379 379 Year 3 485 485 485 485 485 Year 4 522 522 522 522 Year 5 TBC TBC TBC Year 6 TBC TBC Year 7 TBC Total 218 597 1,082 1,604 1,604 + 1,604 + 1,386 +
Page 32
3.6 As agreed as part of the budget process last year the full allocation of New Homes Bonus is being used to support the Council’s overall financial position. 3.7 Earlier this year there was a consultation exercise which proposed “top- slicing” £400m from the New Homes Bonus to part fund the Single Local Growth Fund. This proposal was universally opposed by Local Government and it was confirmed within the Autumn Statement that this proposal would not be pursued. However, Government has indicated that it will be seeking reform in the allocation of New Homes Bonus, in particular citing a further review, “carrying out an evaluation of the New Homes Bonus, which will complete at Easter 2014. The Government will consult on measures to further improve the incentive provided by the New Homes Bonus, in particular through mechanisms to withhold payments where planning approvals are made on appeal”. 3.8 For the purposes of the creation of the Medium Term Financial Plan it is assumed that the level of additional New Homes Bonus will increase by £300,000 for the years 2015/16 through to 2016/17. That would mean an assumed allocation increasing up to £1,904,207. The impact of the consultation exercise will need to be assessed before the final budget position is considered by The Cabinet/Council next month. 4. Council Tax Base and Collection Fund 4.1 The calculation of the Council Tax Base has been undertaken for 2014/15. It is made by means of equating the bands of all properties shown in the valuation list for the Billing Authority Area into Band ‘D’ equivalents. An allowance must then be made for changes in the Valuation List, successful appeals against banding levels, new properties, further exemptions, further single person discounts, further disablement relief, variation in numbers of void properties and provision for bad debts. The new Tax Base is now also affected by the level of individuals receiving support through the Council Tax Reduction Scheme. During the last year there has been a reduction in caseload which has the implication of increasing the Tax Base. 4.2 The Tax Base for Stratford-on-Avon District Council for 2014/15 after allowing for the above items is 48,796.71, which is a significant increase on the figure for 2013/14. An explanation for this increase was included within the Taxbase report considered by The Cabinet on 2 December 2013. 4.3 The Cabinet report also highlighted the issue of the Council Tax Reduction Scheme grant of £230,000. This amount is not specifically identified within the LGFS, however, the full amount of the estimated position is being passed on to the Town and Parish Councils. It should be highlighted however that the value of the grant for 2015/16 should be assumed to be reduced in line with reductions in the overall level of Government support. 4.4 A Collection Fund Surplus of £36,292 in relation to the current is provided during 2014/15. The surplus relates to the collection of Council Tax Arrears outstanding at 31 March 2013 and collected during 2012/13. The improving economic conditions have had an impact by reducing the number of individuals receiving support through the Council Tax Reduction Scheme.
Page 33
5. Business Rates Retention 5.1 Following a review undertaken earlier this year the Council has reaffirmed membership of the pooling arrangements and therefore continues to be a member of the Coventry and Warwickshire Business Rates Pool into 2014/15. During 2013/14 it is forecast there will be an increase in the level of business rates collected within the District. Under the new arrangements, the Council will directly benefit from this increase. There remains a level of uncertainty about the potential value and these benefits cannot be crystallised until the final accounts process due to the impact of issues such as outstanding appeals. However, it is likely to be at least £200,000. 5.2 An on-going budget assumption allowance of additional funding equating to £200,000 has been incorporated into the Medium Term Financial Plan. This forecast is a prudent amount based upon historical performance of business rates within the District. 6. Proposed Budget Amendments 6.1 The Proposed Budget Amendments are limited to areas of essential growth and additional saving targets and are attached in Appendix 3. The following table demonstrates the forecast position for the Council if all of The Cabinet proposals are incorporated into the Base Budget: Table 6 – Revenue Budget Projections incorporating new Cabinet Proposals
2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 £ £ £ £ £ Net Expenditure on Services 12,095,819 12,308,508 12,446,539 12,699,409 13,018,349 (per Appendix 1) Plus Proposed Amendments Appendix 3 360,827 50,642 5,642 (44,358) (94,358)
Net Expenditure 12,456,646 12,359,150 12,452,181 12,655,051 12,923,991
Contribution to Earmarked Reserve 400,000 0 0 0 0
Contribution to/(from) Reserves 68,433 105,630 (388,245) (645,448) (957,161)
Net Budget Requirement 12,925,079 12,464,780 12,063,936 12,009,603 11,966,830
Less 4,774,920 4,050,913 3,586,342 3,404,541 3,231,751 Government Support Business Rates Retention 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 New Homes Bonus 1,604,207 1,904,207 1,904,207 1,904,207 1,904,207 Council Tax Freeze Grant (*) 61,241 61,241 0 0 0 Collection Fund (Deficit)/Surplus 36,292 0 0 0 0 Council Tax Income 6,248,419 6,248,419 6,373,387 6,500,855 6,630,872
SDC Council Tax @ 2% increase £128.05 £128.05 £130.61 £133.22 £135.88 from 2016/17 onwards (*) – The Council Tax Freeze Grant relates to 2014/15 and 2015/16
Page 34
6.2 The Cabinet proposals for amendments to the Base Budget are identified in summary and detail at Appendix 3. As stated within the Base Budget section these are in addition to the savings identified within all previous budgets. These proposals identify either new areas of proposed growth or areas where there would be a reduction in the level of funding/service provided. The Council has, as estimated, identified General Fund Reserves of £3.923m as at 1 April 2014. 6.3 The Government has announced plans to provide additional further resources in 2014/15 and 2015/16 to enable Local Authorities to freeze Council Tax. This initiative will involve the Government providing a grant equivalent to 1% of the total income from Council Tax in both 2014/15 and 2015/16. 6.4 The Cabinet’s proposals have been prepared on the basis that the support for a Council Tax freeze in 2014/15 & 2015/16 is accepted. As a result the Council would receive a grant of around £61,000. This would mean that the Council Tax would remain at £128.05 for 2014/15 and provisionally for 2015/16. For 2016/17 and beyond the assumed level of increase in Council Tax is 2% per annum. 6.5 Proposals for changes to the Council’s Fees and Charges are contained in Appendix 4. This schedule does not include at this stage the proposals surrounding Telegraph Street, Shipston which is subject to a separate report on the agenda. 7. Working Balances, Reserves and Provisions 7.1 The Council has adopted the general principles of the CIPFA guidance on Local Authority Reserves and Balances. The set level of General Fund Reserve judged to be appropriate for the Council in the opinion of the s151 officer is £2m. This level of reserve represents around 15% of the net budget, during the coming year this level of reserve will be reassessed to ensure that it remains relevant. 7.2 The following Reserves are available to assist the Council in meeting General Fund Expenditure 2014-19 as part of the Three Year Financial Strategy: Table 7 – Draft Reserves Statement 2014/15 to 2018/19
Reserves Statement 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Reserves as at 1 April 3,923 3,991 4,097 3,709 3,063 Contribution from Reserves 68 106 (388) (646) (957) Reserves as at 31 March 3,991 4,097 3,709 3,063 2,106 7.3 In addition the Council holds earmarked reserves of £665,668 (as at 12 December 2013). However, it should be noted that the Council has commitments against such earmarked reserves. 7.4 The budget proposes the creation of an additional £400,000 to be held in relation to any legal costs relating to Planning appeals. This contingency would be available in 2014/15 and beyond if required and would be monitored alongside the regular revenue budget monitoring arrangements.
Page 35
8. Capital Programme 8.1 The proposed Capital Programme for the period 2014/15 to 2018/19 is attached at Appendix 5. The proposed amendments to the Capital Programme are included within Appendix 3 and mainly relate to the replacement of the Financial Information System and other required ICT updates. 8.2 The current proposed Capital Programme shows the level of Capital Receipts available to fund capital schemes reducing to around £0.2m by the end of 2018/19. 8.3 A further review will be undertaken during the next twelve months to identify new sources of financing to support the Council’s Capital Programme. This would involve identifying potential grant funding, consideration of revenue financing of the capital programme along with issues such as asset disposal. The results of the review and recommendations will be incorporated into the budget considerations next year. 9 Finance Strategy 9.1 The Council has approved a Medium Term Finance Strategy aimed at maintaining a sound financial structure for the future. 9.2 The Key Objectives are proposed as follows: • To reduce expenditure to a sustainable level; • A balanced budget within resources available identified into the medium term; • To manage the Council’s assets in order to achieve maximum efficiency; • To manage the Council’s investments efficiently and effectively to maximise interest generation, whilst protecting principal; • To make realistic provisions for inflation, pensions, committed growth, legislative requirements whilst securing the Council’s financial position; • To set aside any available balances initially to be used primarily for “one-offs” (e.g. investment, service or corporate growth) and/or depending on the amount of balances, used in a phased manner beyond one year to avoid fluctuations in the level of the Council Tax; • To ensure the early recognition of emerging issues, associated assessment of risk and appropriate management of the budget process in relation to the assessment of the degree of risk; • To direct available financial resources in line with approved service priorities and reallocate from low/nil priority areas in line with Council Policy to maximise achievement of approved Key Commitments; • The Council should aim to keep its Council Tax to a maximum increase of 2%.
Page 36
10 Budget Consultation Strategy 10.1 During 2011/12 a comprehensive Budget Consultation was undertaken, the results of which have been used to shape the current service provision of the Council. Following consideration of this draft budget it is proposed that a period of public consultation is undertaken through a questionnaire which will be sent to individuals on the Council’s Citizens’ Panel, seeking views on a range of issues including Council Tax and the proposed amendments to the budget. 10.2 In addition to the external consultation there are a series of Budget Review Panel meetings established in order to review these budget proposals in detail and to give the Opposition Groups time to consider and offer alternative proposals of their own. 10.3 The results of both the internal and external consultation will be considered by The Cabinet at the next meeting before the final budget recommendations are made to Council. 11. Reserve Capping Powers to Limit Excessive Increases in Council Tax and Referenda 11.1 The Localism Act abolished the ability for Central Government to cap the level of Council Tax increase that a local authority can charge. However, to replace these powers Government has introduced a new 'local tax lock'. 11.2 These new powers allow local people a vote to stop Council Tax going up if their local authority increases Council Tax by more than an amount specified by the Government. For 2014/15 this level has not been determined. As part of the Local Government Finance Settlement t he Minister has stated that the council tax referendum threshold principles will be announced separately in the New Year. The Government has indicated that it is open to representations on how these will operate and that the Government is particularly open to suggestions that some lower threshold be applied to all or some categories of authorities. The Minister mentions that next year’s elections on 22 May across the country which he believes will allow for referendums to be held at minimal cost. 11.3 The Minister has not indicated when in the New Year the principles will be announced and, at present, the Local Audit and Accountability Bill has passed all stages within the House of Lords and House of Commons. It is possible that the Minister is waiting for the Bill to receive Royal Assent before publishing the final proposed principles. His invitation for suggestions for some lower threshold, taken together with his reference to the availability of elections on 22 May, may be interpreted that the government could be minded to introduce a lower threshold than the 2% limit that was announced in the Autumn Statement 2013. 11.4 It should be noted that no equivalent principles are being proposed for Town and Parish Councils for 2014/15, although, as with the announcement last year they may be in future years, depending upon the level of increases in precepts.
Page 37
12. Options available to The Cabinet 12.1 That The Cabinet recommends for endorsement and scrutiny: (a) The proposed Revenue Medium Term Financial Strategy as detailed in Appendix 1 and 3, or a suitable amended version . (b) The proposed Fees and Charges as detailed in Appendix 4, or a suitable amended version. (c) The proposed Capital Programme detailed in Appendix 5, or a suitable amended version. 13. Evidence Base 13.1 The Medium Term Financial Strategy and budget requirement for 2014/15 has been produced using the base budget created as part of the 2013/14 budget setting process and applying known changes for both additional expenditure and savings. Budget assumptions have been revised in light of the current economic climate and indications of future funding. 14. Implications of the Proposal 14.1 Legal 14.1.1 There are no direct legal implications to this report. 14.2 Financial 14.2.1 This is a finance report which proposes the draft Revenue Budget for 2014/15 and the position for the Medium Term Financial Plan up to 2018/19. The report also identifies the proposed Capital Programme for 2014/15 to 2018/19. 14.3 Environmental 14.3.1 There are no direct environmental implications arising as part of this report. 14.4 Corporate Strategy 14.4.1 This process has been developed to assist the Council in prioritising resources in order to achieve the objectives of the Corporate Strategy. 14.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 14.5.1 There are no direct equality implications arising as part of this report.
15. Risk Assessment 15.1 The Accounts and Audit (England) Regulations 2011 require Local Authorities to fully consider and manage risk as part of the Budget process. 15.2 All Local Authorities are required to formalise their approach to Risk Management and evidence it more directly as part of the budgetary process. This requirement has arisen as a result of:- a) The Accounts and Audit (England) Regulations 2011 :- Regulation 4 - “The relevant body is responsible for ensuring that the financial management of the body is adequate and effective and that the body has a sound system of internal control which facilitates
Page 38
the effective exercise of that body’s functions and which includes arrangements for the management of risk.” Regulation 5 - “The accounting control systems must include measures: (i) to ensure that the financial transactions of the body are recorded as soon as, and as accurately as, reasonably practicable; (ii) to enable the prevention and detection of inaccuracies and fraud, and the reconstitution of any lost records and (iii) to ensure that risk is appropriately managed” b) Prudential Framework :- The assessment of affordability of financial plans requires a judgement about risk. Prudential Indicators are the monitoring tool to assess performance and risk. c) CIPFA Guidance on Reserves and Balances :- 15.3 The Council has for a number of years produced a Medium Term Financial Strategy to ensure that appropriate plans are in place for the use of the Council’s valuable and limited resources. 15.4 The Council aims to maintain reserves at £2m. The General Reserve Statement identifies that the estimated level of reserves does fluctuate above this target but maintains an average in excess of £2m over the five year period. 15.5 There also continues to exist the risk in relation to the outstanding contract dispute that has previously been discussed at The Cabinet. For this reason the position in relation to the Capital Programme remains cautious at this stage. 15.6 The assumptions in regard to the effects of inflation, investment returns, and the economy as a whole (both locally and nationally) have been made to limit risk as far as possible. 16. Conclusion 16.1 The Council has undertaken a comprehensive review of the Medium Term Financial Strategy to arrive at five year budget plan that meets the corporate priorities of the Council. 16.2 The Cabinet is asked to recommend that these budget proposals are endorsed for scrutiny.
David Buckland ASSISTANT CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Page 39 This page has been left intentionally blank Appendix 1 Stratford on Avon District Council "Initital" Medium Term Financial Plan 2014/15 to 2018/19
2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 Original Current Base Base Base Base Base Estimate Estimate Budget Budget Budget Budget Budget £££££££
Chief Executive 919,280 1,010,120 889,020 899,640 910,890 922,750 935,190 Assistant Chief Executive 1,783,937 1,600,287 1,952,101 2,110,051 2,170,540 2,340,040 2,511,180 Head of Ent. Housing & Revenue 1,531,070 1,571,370 1,574,855 1,590,755 1,590,245 1,616,385 1,643,885 Head of Legal & Dem.Services 946,467 950,917 997,370 988,160 998,040 950,620 960,910 Head of Customer Access 2,643,210 2,668,970 2,602,810 2,634,810 2,668,810 2,704,710 2,742,510 Head of Environment & Planning 759,842 1,032,012 570,410 551,350 577,760 605,610 634,920 Head of Technical Services 3,250,703 3,404,833 3,509,253 3,533,742 3,530,254 3,559,294 3,589,754
Net Base Budget 11,834,509 12,238,509 12,095,819 12,308,508 12,446,539 12,699,409 13,018,349
Financed By Revenue Support Grant 3,243,951 3,243,951 2,574,767 1,790,034 1,257,637 1,005,974 761,227 Baseline Funding 2,158,112 2,158,112 2,200,153 2,260,879 2,328,705 2,398,567 2,470,524
Page 41 Page Council Tax Freeze Grant 67,056 67,056 61,241 61,241 0 0 0 Other Specific Grant 119,837 119,837 00000 New Homes Bonus 1,081,842 1,081,842 1,604,207 1,904,207 1,904,207 1,904,207 1,904,207 Council Tax 6,124,149 6,124,149 6,248,419 6,248,419 6,373,387 6,500,855 6,630,872 Retained Business Rates 0 0 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 Collection Fund Adjustment (10,196) (10,196) 36,292 0000
Total Council Resources 12,784,751 12,784,751 12,925,079 12,464,780 12,063,936 12,009,603 11,966,830
(Surplus)/Deficit (950,242) (546,242) (829,260) (156,272) 382,603 689,806 1,051,519 Item 6 Appendix 1
20140113 - Budget Report App 1 Date/Time: 19/12/2013 10:49 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Chief Executive Policy Employees Expenses 342,760 345,860 325,810 Transport Related Expenses 7,480 7,480 8,100 Supplies And Services Expenses 19,330 19,330 18,760 Third Party Payments 55,910 145,910 55,980 Sales Income (500) (500) 0 sub-total 424,980 518,080 408,650 CDC Chief Executive Employees Expenses 380,400 382,670 371,800 Premises Related Expenses 100 0 0 Transport Related Expenses 16,290 16,270 16,100 Supplies And Services Expenses 69,900 65,490 69,950 Third Party Payments 16,750 16,750 14,660 Fees & Charges Income (12,000) (12,000) (15,000) sub-total 471,440 469,180 457,510 Corporate Communications Supplies And Services Expenses 22,860 22,860 22,860 sub-total 22,860 22,860 22,860 Chief Executive's Total 919,280 1,010,120 889,020
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 42 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Assistant Chief Executive Appropriations Capital Charges 297,396 297,396 287,361 Recharges To Other Accounts 0 10,700 11,200 sub-total 297,396 308,096 298,561 Investment Interest Capital Charges 1,200 1,200 1,200 Interest Income (282,550) (303,950) (304,450) Recharges To Other Accounts (10,700) 0 0 sub-total (292,050) (302,750) (303,250) Mortgages Premises Related Expenses 50 50 50 Transfer Payments 3,000 3,000 500 Interest Income (200) (200) (200) Recharges To Other Accounts (3,000) (3,000) (500) sub-total (150) (150) (150) Non Distributed Costs Employees Expenses 173,060 173,060 564,060 sub-total 173,060 173,060 564,060 Corporate Budget Employees Expenses 0 33,200 0 Supplies And Services Expenses 204,071 254,071 122,500 sub-total 204,071 287,271 122,500 Residual Costs Employees Expenses 181,100 98,150 125,590 Third Party Payments 139,000 900 139,000 sub-total 320,100 99,050 264,590 Resources Employees Expenses 425,760 429,060 394,570 Transport Related Expenses 14,820 14,820 11,100 Supplies And Services Expenses 60,200 60,200 63,390 Third Party Payments 46,720 46,720 54,220 Fees & Charges Income (2,300) (2,300) (2,300) sub-total 545,200 548,500 520,980 Monitoring Officer Transfer Payments 160,000 125,000 125,000 sub-total 160,000 125,000 125,000 CDC Resources Supplies And Services Expenses 1,000 1,000 1,000 Third Party Payments 180,660 165,660 165,660 sub-total 181,660 166,660 166,660 HR and Training Employees Expenses 184,950 185,850 183,450 Transport Related Expenses 1,080 1,080 1,080 Supplies And Services Expenses 8,620 8,620 8,620 sub-total 194,650 195,550 193,150 Assistant Chief Executive's Total 1,783,937 1,600,287 1,952,101
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 43 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Head of Enterprise, Housing and Revenue Council Tax Reduction - Admin. Employees Expenses 206,400 208,400 200,500 Transport Related Expenses 4,160 4,160 4,060 Supplies And Services Expenses 7,730 6,030 7,730 Third Party Payments 23,620 16,000 23,620 Government Grant Income (293,092) (293,092) (115,081) sub-total (51,182) (58,502) 120,829 Housing Benefits Transfer Payments 26,175,960 26,341,960 26,175,960 Government Grant Income (26,285,960) (26,451,960) (26,285,960) sub-total (110,000) (110,000) (110,000) Housing Ben. Admin Employees Expenses 246,600 249,100 239,900 Transport Related Expenses 4,210 4,210 4,110 Supplies And Services Expenses 4,960 16,030 4,960 Third Party Payments 56,240 48,240 56,240 Government Grant Income (293,092) (304,162) (414,124) sub-total 18,918 13,418 (108,914) National Non-Domestic Rate Employees Expenses 19,100 19,100 17,700 Transport Related Expenses 1,100 1,100 1,040 Supplies And Services Expenses 8,750 8,750 8,750 Third Party Payments 7,490 7,490 7,490 Transfer Payments 68,900 68,900 68,900 Government Grant Income (215,000) (215,000) (215,000) Fees & Charges Income (54,200) (54,200) (54,200) sub-total (163,860) (163,860) (165,320) NNDR Discretionary Relief Transfer Payments 50,000 50,000 50,000 sub-total 50,000 50,000 50,000 Council Tax Employees Expenses 368,900 372,600 361,220 Transport Related Expenses 9,390 9,390 9,090 Supplies And Services Expenses 26,210 35,530 27,230 Third Party Payments 83,964 83,964 29,580 Fees & Charges Income (257,700) (257,700) (257,700) sub-total 230,764 243,784 169,420 Council Tax Benefits Supplies And Services Expenses 257,000 257,000 230,000 Transfer Payments 15,700 15,700 15,700 sub-total 272,700 272,700 245,700 Social Inclusion Employees Expenses 46,600 47,000 42,800 Transport Related Expenses 1,910 1,910 1,710 Supplies And Services Expenses 192,720 223,720 133,720 Third Party Payments 3,130 3,130 3,130 Other Grants & Contributions (125,000) (145,000) 0 sub-total 119,360 130,760 181,360 Community Leadership Employees Expenses 180,700 182,300 189,600 Premises Related Expenses 300 300 300 Transport Related Expenses 4,890 4,890 6,970 Supplies And Services Expenses 162,110 159,110 165,650 Third Party Payments 44,100 44,100 44,200 Other Grants & Contributions (60,000) (60,000) (60,000) Fees & Charges Income (11,990) (11,990) (11,990) sub-total 320,110 318,710 334,730
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 44 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Local Economy/Tourism Employees Expenses 3,800 3,800 7,400 Transport Related Expenses 220 220 420 Supplies And Services Expenses 85,900 85,900 85,900 Third Party Payments 123,080 123,080 123,080 Government Grant Income (30,000) (30,000) (30,000) Fees & Charges Income (16,000) (16,000) (16,000) sub-total 167,000 167,000 170,800 Housing Employees Expenses 508,700 513,500 504,840 Premises Related Expenses 1,100 1,100 1,100 Transport Related Expenses 17,570 17,570 19,520 Supplies And Services Expenses 25,560 50,560 25,560 Third Party Payments 125,990 290,677 145,290 Government Grant Income 0 (117,027) 0 Other Grants & Contributions (10,000) (10,000) (10,000) Sales Income (18,500) (18,500) (18,500) Fees & Charges Income (4,100) (21,760) (4,100) Recharges To Other Accounts (24,600) (54,600) (24,600) sub-total 621,720 651,520 639,110 Grants Employees Expenses 20,100 20,300 17,700 Transport Related Expenses 1,970 1,970 100 Supplies And Services Expenses 9,260 9,260 9,260 sub-total 31,330 31,530 27,060 Environmental Initiatives Employees Expenses 10,000 10,100 17,800 Transport Related Expenses 930 930 0 Supplies And Services Expenses 2,280 13,280 2,280 Third Party Payments 11,000 18,000 0 Other Grants & Contributions 0 (11,000) 0 Fees & Charges Income 0 (7,000) 0 sub-total 24,210 24,310 20,080 Head of Enterprise, Housing & Revenue Total 1,531,070 1,571,370 1,574,855
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 45 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Head of Legal and Democratic Services Members Services Employees Expenses 401,230 405,230 383,200 Transport Related Expenses 4,660 4,660 4,810 Supplies And Services Expenses 35,690 35,690 35,690 Third Party Payments 38,157 38,157 29,610 Fees & Charges Income (25,000) (25,000) (25,000) sub-total 454,737 458,737 428,310 Monitoring Officer Employees Expenses 66,300 66,300 75,200 Supplies And Services Expenses 720 720 720 sub-total 67,020 67,020 75,920 Local Land Charges Employees Expenses 4,750 4,800 4,850 Supplies And Services Expenses 3,150 3,150 3,740 Transfer Payments 40,000 40,000 40,000 Fees & Charges Income (172,650) (172,650) (172,650) sub-total (124,750) (124,700) (124,060) Elections Employees Expenses 47,840 48,040 110,740 Premises Related Expenses 0 0 6,000 Transport Related Expenses 0 0 250 Supplies And Services Expenses 34,090 34,090 69,700 Third Party Payments 19,280 19,280 19,280 Government Grant Income 0 0 (37,000) Sales Income (2,000) (2,000) (2,000) Fees & Charges Income 0 0 (4,000) sub-total 99,210 99,410 162,970 Corp. And Democratic Core Employees Expenses 69,000 69,200 72,600 Premises Related Expenses 2,350 2,350 2,350 Transport Related Expenses 27,300 27,300 27,680 Supplies And Services Expenses 351,600 351,600 351,600 sub-total 450,250 450,450 454,230 Head of Legal and Democratic Services Total 946,467 950,917 997,370
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 46 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Head of Customer Access Information Technology Employees Expenses 709,730 716,430 711,640 Transport Related Expenses 14,660 14,660 14,190 Supplies And Services Expenses 307,400 307,400 306,780 Third Party Payments 200 200 200 sub-total 1,031,990 1,038,690 1,032,810 Governance, Community Safety & Procurement Employees Expenses 130,400 131,600 126,300 Transport Related Expenses 3,860 3,860 3,900 Supplies And Services Expenses 1,820 1,820 1,820 Third Party Payments 2,380 2,380 2,380 sub-total 138,460 139,660 134,400 Crime Reduction Employees Expenses 36,000 36,500 35,000 Transport Related Expenses 380 380 380 Supplies And Services Expenses 5,520 9,520 5,520 Third Party Payments 2,640 6,770 2,640 Other Grants & Contributions 0 (8,130) 0 sub-total 44,540 45,040 43,540 CDC Resources Third Party Payments 50,000 50,000 50,000 Fees & Charges Income (20,000) (20,000) (20,000) sub-total 30,000 30,000 30,000 Front Office & Trans Team Employees Expenses 1,282,870 1,295,670 1,242,120 Transport Related Expenses 5,810 5,810 5,840 Supplies And Services Expenses 85,870 90,430 90,430 Third Party Payments 23,670 23,670 23,670 sub-total 1,398,220 1,415,580 1,362,060 Head of Customer Access Total 2,643,210 2,668,970 2,602,810
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 47 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Head of Planning and Environment Environmental Health Employees Expenses 543,950 515,920 487,160 Premises Related Expenses 47,860 47,860 46,350 Transport Related Expenses 46,250 46,250 37,790 Supplies And Services Expenses 57,380 57,380 60,720 Third Party Payments 29,130 29,130 30,630 Sales Income (13,000) (13,000) (13,000) Fees & Charges Income (191,020) (191,020) (191,020) Rent Income (24,900) (24,900) (24,900) sub-total 495,650 467,620 433,730 Licensing Employees Expenses 132,800 133,800 133,700 Transport Related Expenses 1,190 1,190 1,180 Supplies And Services Expenses 4,680 4,680 4,680 Third Party Payments 8,500 8,500 8,500 Fees & Charges Income (326,790) (326,790) (326,790) sub-total (179,620) (178,620) (178,730) Regulatory Services Employees Expenses 1,152,642 1,148,742 1,093,930 Transport Related Expenses 49,150 49,150 49,460 Supplies And Services Expenses 24,570 24,570 24,570 Third Party Payments 154,500 688,590 102,800 Fees & Charges Income (942,800) (1,173,790) (961,100) sub-total 438,062 737,262 309,660 Civil Contingencies Funding Supplies And Services Expenses 5,750 5,750 0 Third Party Payments 0 0 5,750 sub-total 5,750 5,750 5,750 Head of Planning and Environment Total 759,842 1,032,012 570,410
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 48 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Head of Technical Services Sports Development Employees Expenses 166,800 167,800 168,450 Premises Related Expenses 4,100 4,100 4,100 Transport Related Expenses 12,000 12,000 12,000 Supplies And Services Expenses 16,470 16,470 12,970 Third Party Payments 3,460 3,460 6,960 Other Grants & Contributions (100) (100) (100) Fees & Charges Income (103,250) (103,250) (103,970) sub-total 99,480 100,480 100,410 Refuse Collection Employees Expenses 121,400 122,800 118,300 Transport Related Expenses 3,450 3,450 2,830 Supplies And Services Expenses 4,980 4,980 4,980 Third Party Payments 3,056,530 3,159,340 3,178,640 Other Grants & Contributions (650,450) (667,070) (667,070) Fees & Charges Income (93,100) (93,100) (93,100) sub-total 2,442,810 2,530,400 2,544,580 Leisure Centres Employees Expenses 66,380 67,050 64,800 Premises Related Expenses 95,140 101,640 106,750 Transport Related Expenses 4,110 4,110 4,070 Supplies And Services Expenses 10,380 5,480 4,880 Third Party Payments 5,600 4,000 0 Fees & Charges Income (55,842) (55,842) (100,087) sub-total 125,768 126,438 80,413 Parks Playfields & Open Spaces Employees Expenses 31,000 31,100 30,400 Premises Related Expenses 36,600 36,600 36,600 Transport Related Expenses 1,670 1,670 750 Supplies And Services Expenses 20,700 28,170 20,700 Third Party Payments 500,620 493,150 500,620 Other Grants & Contributions (103,720) (103,720) (103,720) Recharges To Other Accounts (3,300) (3,300) (3,300) sub-total 483,570 483,670 482,050 Public Conveniences Employees Expenses 23,910 24,120 23,340 Premises Related Expenses 86,370 86,370 82,940 Transport Related Expenses 9,850 9,850 9,720 Supplies And Services Expenses 4,270 4,270 4,290 Third Party Payments 145,380 148,090 148,090 Sales Income (200) (200) (200) Fees & Charges Income (194,000) (194,000) (47,000) sub-total 75,580 78,500 221,180 C.C.T.V. Employees Expenses 122,200 123,000 124,800 Premises Related Expenses 3,080 3,080 6,600 Transport Related Expenses 760 760 1,370 Supplies And Services Expenses 70,100 70,100 67,470 Third Party Payments 36,440 36,440 34,570 Other Grants & Contributions (52,800) (52,800) (55,000) sub-total 179,780 180,580 179,810
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 49 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Recreational Amenities Employees Expenses 15,870 16,010 15,480 Premises Related Expenses 15,680 15,680 15,670 Transport Related Expenses 800 800 750 Supplies And Services Expenses 4,410 4,410 4,490 Fees & Charges Income (220) (220) (10,200) Rent Income (170,100) (170,100) (170,570) sub-total (133,560) (133,420) (144,380) Street Cleansing & Furniture Employees Expenses 52,690 53,160 51,610 Premises Related Expenses 16,600 16,600 16,600 Transport Related Expenses 5,570 5,570 3,990 Supplies And Services Expenses 15,570 15,570 15,570 Third Party Payments 1,290,710 1,332,770 1,332,770 Fees & Charges Income (3,200) (3,200) (3,200) sub-total 1,377,940 1,420,470 1,417,340 Investment Properties Employees Expenses 17,880 18,390 17,830 Premises Related Expenses 20,650 46,050 47,200 Transport Related Expenses 2,640 2,640 2,600 Supplies And Services Expenses 70 180 190 Third Party Payments 8,230 18,840 18,840 Fees & Charges Income (43,480) (43,480) (42,980) Rent Income (604,540) (651,120) (661,250) sub-total (598,550) (608,500) (617,570) Avenue Farm Depot Employees Expenses 7,940 8,000 7,750 Premises Related Expenses 6,890 6,890 6,930 Transport Related Expenses 400 400 360 Supplies And Services Expenses 230 230 210 Fees & Charges Income (780) (780) (710) Rent Income (67,340) (67,340) (67,340) sub-total (52,660) (52,600) (52,800) Miscellaneous Properties Employees Expenses 53,390 53,750 51,750 Premises Related Expenses 8,260 9,260 8,260 Transport Related Expenses 6,180 6,180 5,900 Supplies And Services Expenses 750 750 750 Third Party Payments 14,855 14,855 7,000 Fees & Charges Income (5,000) (5,000) (5,000) Rent Income (11,170) (11,170) (11,960) sub-total 67,265 68,625 56,700 On Street Parking Employees Expenses 461,140 464,340 447,630 Premises Related Expenses 3,700 3,700 1,400 Transport Related Expenses 19,780 19,780 11,560 Supplies And Services Expenses 105,420 105,420 85,610 Third Party Payments 923,040 923,040 813,840 Other Grants & Contributions (764,580) (764,580) (700,240) Fees & Charges Income (888,500) (888,500) (779,800) sub-total (140,000) (136,800) (120,000) SDC Infrastructure Employees Expenses 23,810 24,020 23,240 Premises Related Expenses 45,950 45,950 45,950 Transport Related Expenses 1,280 1,280 1,200 Supplies And Services Expenses 100 100 100 Third Party Payments 32,220 32,220 32,220 sub-total 103,360 103,570 102,710
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 50 Appendix 1 (Part 2)
Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Budgets by Service Area Original Current Draft Service Cost Group Budget Budget Budget 2013/14 2013/14 2014/15 £££ Off-Street Parking Employees Expenses 246,420 248,360 240,300 Premises Related Expenses 487,090 487,090 505,620 Transport Related Expenses 6,970 6,970 6,910 Supplies And Services Expenses 79,140 79,140 80,110 Third Party Payments 269,540 275,030 259,320 Fees & Charges Income (2,129,500) (2,129,500) (2,129,500) Rent Income (63,440) (63,440) (60,860) sub-total (1,103,780) (1,096,350) (1,098,100) Building Control Employees Expenses 415,730 419,830 397,240 Transport Related Expenses 35,620 35,620 35,620 Supplies And Services Expenses 16,320 16,320 16,320 Third Party Payments 24,000 24,000 24,000 Fees & Charges Income (542,000) (542,000) (542,000) sub-total (50,330) (46,230) (68,820) Building Services Employees Expenses 137,800 138,660 134,530 Premises Related Expenses 389,500 363,140 358,370 Transport Related Expenses 7,560 7,560 7,470 Supplies And Services Expenses 18,780 18,670 18,740 Third Party Payments 106,450 97,450 97,450 Rent Income (286,060) (239,480) (190,830) sub-total 374,030 386,000 425,730 Head of Technical Services Total 3,250,703 3,404,833 3,509,253
Council Total 11,834,509 12,238,509 12,095,819
H:\budget 2014-15\Cabinet 13012014\20140113 - Budget Report App 1 (part 2) Page 51 Appendix 2
RECONCILIATION BETWEEN 2013/14 ORIGINAL ESTIMATE AND 2014/15 ORIGINAL ESTIMATE
Original Base Budget 2013/14 11,834,509
Employee Expenses:- Salary 78,008 National Insurance (19,620) Pension 64,360 Car Leasing (11,850) 110,898
Premises Expenses:- Business Rates 9,020
Supplies:- Insurances 4,460 Parish Council shortfall (27,000) Community Transport 70,000 Core Strategy Implementation (200,000) (152,540)
Third Party Payments:- Contracts 144,100 Homelessness Prevention 25,300 Resources - Payroll 12,500 Voluntary Sector Grants (21,000) Valuer's Fees (5,000) Enforcement Appeals (70,000) 85,900
Capital Charges:- RCCO (10,035)
Income:- Public Conveniences 143,000 Leisure Contract (44,245) Individual Electoral Registration (37,000) Benefits Admin Subsidy 56,979 On-Street Parking (5,570) Property Income 43,370 156,534
Other:- Elections 101,780 Consultation Unit (4,810) Customer Access (73,600) Land Drainage (27,000) Cost of borrowing re SLVC 200,000 Procurement Gains (15,000) Removal of Specific Grant Expenditure (119,837) 61,533
Original Base Budget 2014/15 12,095,819
Page 52 Appendix 3 (part 1) Stratford on Avon District Council Proposed Amendments to Budget 2014/15 to 2018/19
Schedule of Proposed Growth/Savings 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 Base Base Base Base Base Budget Budget Budget Budget Budget £££££
Chief Executive Neighbourhood Planning Officer Posts 00 Contribution towards City Deal 18,027 45,442 45,442 45,442 45,442 Savings from Shared Services (50,000) (75,000) (100,000) (150,000) (200,000)
Total Chief Executive (31,973) (29,558) (54,558) (104,558) (154,558)
Assistant Chief Executive Replacement Financial Information System 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000
Total Assistant Chief Executive 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000
Enterprise, Housing & Revenue Empty Property Grants (REPROFILING EXISTING GRANTS) 00000 Act on Energy Grant 11,000 0000
Page 53 Page Loans to Business (£50,000 CAPITAL) 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 Funding for Public Health Warwickshire 10,000 0000
Total Enterprise, Housing & Revenue 25,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000
Customer Access Compliance with PSN ( £5,000 CAPITAL) 400 400 400 400 400 Hardware update for EDMS (£35,000 CAPITAL) 2,800 2,800 2,800 2,800 2,800 Hardware update for Corporate File Servers (£20,000 CAPITAL) 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 Hardware update for Corporate Back Up System (£50,000 CAPITAL) 11,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 Implementation of CW-JETS 5,000 2,400 2,400 2,400 2,400
Total Customer Access 20,800 11,200 11,200 11,200 11,200
Environment & Planning Retention of Temporary Staff (incorporating impact on Customer Access) 240,000 0000
Total Environment & Planning 240,000 0000
Legal & Democratic Webcasting of meetings 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 11,000 Cost of implementing Individual Electoral Registration 76,000 34,000 14,000 14,000 14,000
Total Legal & Democratic 87,000 45,000 25,000 25,000 25,000
Total Proposed Amendments to Budget 360,827 50,642 5,642 (44,358) (94,358)
20140113 - Budget Report App 3 (part 1) Date/Time: 19/12/2013 10:50 Appendix 3 (part 2)
Proposed Budget Amendments – Further Supporting Information by Item
1. Neighbourhood Planning Officers 1.1 Temporary establishment (up to 2 years) of an additional post within the Policy Unit to support local communities in the preparation of neighbourhood plans. 1.2 The number of communities expressing an interest in preparing a neighbourhood plan is growing rapidly. Area designations have been agreed for 5 plans, 4 more are being processed at present and there are a further 9 in the pipeline. The Council receives £5,000 from CLG for each designation. This funding is to help local planning authorities to support the NP process. The Council will receive additional funding (£25,000 per plan) to support the independent examination and referendum required prior to the adoption of each NP. 1.3 Subject to the annual designation of no less than 9 NP areas, the establishment of the post is highly likely to be wholly funded by the income. It is proposed that the workload and anticipated income would be subject to review prior to confirming the post for a second year. 2. Savings from Shared Services 2.1 The Council is working very closely with Cherwell and South Northamptonshire Councils with a view of developing 3 way shared service solutions. The aim of the three way working is to achieve: Reductions in cost Increased resilience of the service Maintained or improved level of service. 2.2 The Council’s work in this area has been recognised by the government who have allocated c £367k of additional grant to the three authorities to provide an added stimulus in achieving these goals. Savings rising to £100,000 were included in last years Medium Term Financial Plan, this suggestion is to build upon this level of saving to a value around 10% of the cost of support services to the Council. 3. Replacement Financial Information System 3.1 The Council is currently using the Powersolve financial information system. This system has been in place at the Council for the last 17 years. The supplier of the system Civica have notified the Council that support will be removed from the product in the near future, for information Stratford is the last local government site using the system. 3.2 A joint procurement with Cherwell and South Northants for a replacement financial system for all three authorities is being developed. This exercise would require a full procurement process, and the Council would need to provide for the full cost of a replacement system. It is estimated that a budgetary provision of c.£250,000 (CAPITAL) would be required. The cost within the revenue account relates to the lost interest on the capital receipt. 3.4 If SDC progress a shared financial service with CDC/SNC then a common financial information system would deliver further efficiencies and resilience, however, this needs to be balanced against the additional cost for the procurement of a replacement system.
Page 54 Appendix 3 (part 2)
4. Empty Property Grants 4.1 Currently the Council has a ‘one off’ budget of £132k and an earmark reserve of £90k funding the empty homes grants. 4.2 It is proposed to re-profile this budget over the next three years to ensure that the Council has resources in place to meet its objectives. 4.3 Grant funded work does not return large numbers of properties each year, however, the existence of grants enables the Council to appear even handed, and not just reliant on punitive measures, when seeking to engage and encourage empty property owners to act to bring empty properties back into use. 5. Act on Energy Grant 5.1 In 2013/14 funding of Act on Energy was derived from New Homes Bonus accumulated receipt. There is currently no identified budget for 2014/15. Act on Energy provide an extremely valuable and cost effective service which supports the current Corporate Strategy. If the Council were to undertake this work outside of this partnership it is estimated that this would require at least one FTE member of staff. This is obviously significantly higher than the Council currently pays to Act on Energy. 5.2 The proposal is to continue the funding for a further year. 6. Loans to Businesses 6.1 The Council is developing a package of support for business and is working with partners (WCC, Cherwell and South Northants DC, Chamber of Commerce and FSB) to this end. In addition, the City Deal ‘clearance house’ proposal would also enhance support.
6.2 The Council has a budget of £50,000 which helps provide rate relief, mainly to small rural businesses. Through business engagement work and formal consultation, businesses have cited rent and rates as significant issues in becoming sustainable. In addition, projects such as ‘shop front grants’ have proved very successful but have been limited to specific areas and grant funding for these projects (mainly via sect 106) is running out.
6.3 This proposal advocates a budget of up to £50,000 to support business. The mechanism for payment could be through a grant or loan. The loans option is preferred as a mechanism could be put in place for repayments to be made once a business was considered to be on sound footing (period would need to be determined) and this could then be recycled to provide more loans. The service would also seek provide match funding from other sources however, at this stage, an amount cannot be quantified.
7. Funding for Public Health Warwickshire 7.1 Over the past two years the Council has been part of a match funded arrangement with Public Health Warwickshire to enable projects to take place in support of addressing health priorities across the district. In 2013/14 South Warwickshire CCG also contributed to the funding pot making a total of £30,000. For 2013/14 the grants are targeted at projects which focus upon smoking cessation, mental health including dementia and excess winter deaths/affordable warmth. Past projects have included installation of a green gym, a programme of support for carers, assistance for rough sleepers, and a targeted campaign to reduce fuel poverty.
7.2 The proposal is to continue the funding for a further year.
Page 55 Appendix 3 (part 2)
8. Compliance with Public Services Network 8.1 This is required for current and future compliance for the Public Services Network (PSN). Funding will enable some changed to the Council’s PSN data – new firewall to introduce walled garden and possible additional internet connection to segregate secure and non-secure access - £5,000 capital. 9. Hardware Update for EDMS 9.1 To update the hardware for the corporate Electronic Document Management System (EDMS). The server was purchased in 2008 and needs increased disk space to accommodate the growing user base and document numbers, including the recent migration of ePlanning documents into EDMS. The new hardware will also allow the use of up to date software versions i.e. Microsoft SharePoint 2013, not currently available on old server technology. This will provide future resilience and offer increased development opportunities including shared working if required 9.2 Other options evaluated include leasing options via G-Cloud and via Pheonix – a major supplier of managed disk space and disaster recovery. The main stumbling block is bandwidth capabilities out of Elizabeth House. The speed of connection required would introduce a high annual revenue cost and show reduced speed of access locally. It will require resilient links in the event the main connection is unavailable. 10. Hardware Update for Corporate File Servers 10.1 This proposal is required to update the hardware and software for the corporate file servers. This is required to meet the demands for increasing volumes of corporate data stored. The current system is over 8 year old and support by Microsoft is coming to an end. 10.2 Other options evaluated include leasing options via G-Cloud and via other data storage providers. The main stumbling block is bandwidth capabilities out of Elizabeth House. The speed of connection required would introduce a high annual revenue cost and show reduced speed of access locally. It will require resilient links in the event the main connection is unavailable. 10.3 The final factor is that if the replacement system contains PSN data there are very strict guidelines on how that information can be stored and shared. These are being hardened over time so any data that is PSN linked will need to be kept local 11. Hardware Update for Corporate Back Up System 11.1 To upgrade hardware and software for the corporate backup system. This is required to meet the demands for backing up increasing volumes of corporate data and for DR purpose. The current system is now over 8 year old and the support by Microsoft and Symantec for our products is coming to an end. 11.2 Our evaluation of current Cloud services has led us to the conclusion that increased internet and network bandwidth together with resilient links required for this would be a considerable investment. 11.3 It a priority to become infrastructure light as systems need replacing but always in the first instance to consider the shared working model. For certain systems that are high volume and have high access requirements it may not always be possible to adopt an infrastructure light or shared model. This is due in part to the current unavailability of affordable appropriate resilient bandwidth to enable cloud based off site infrastructure light or shared infrastructure to be adopted where there is a heavy storage and high access demand. .
Page 56 Appendix 3 (part 2)
12. Implementation of Coventry, Solihull & Warwickshire Joint E-Tendering System (CSW-JETS)
12.1 Since February 2010, Coventry, Solihull, Warwickshire, Nuneaton & Bedworth and Rugby Councils have worked together as a shared procurement service with a shared savings plan. 12.2 CSW-JETS would enable the Council to advertise our opportunities across all authorities through the same system. This means there is a single point of contact for procurement in the sub region and therefore tenderers only have to register once to receive notifications for all authorities. 12.3 A major benefit of the system would be to encourage small business, the voluntary sector, social enterprises to be able to bid for our work and will be working to make sure that our tender processes and documentation are as simple as possible. 12.4 The Public Services (Social Value) Act allows us to explore ways in which businesses can demonstrate the social value that can be added in our local area through our procurement processes and we will endeavour to consider how we can support the regeneration of our local economies through wise use of our purchasing power. 12.5 The e-Tendering system would enable Tenderers to: View a list of tenders/contracts/quotations. View information on contracts that have already been awarded. Express interest in a particular tender or quotation. Receive tender and/or quotation documentation. Safely return your tender or quotation documents. Send and receive correspondence. 12.6 The Contract Management module will enable us to: Performance manage contracts once awarded, and receive notifications when key dates are approaching. 13. Retention of Temporary Planning Staff 13.1 There is an on going need to retain the temporary planning staff until such time as the Core Strategy is such that application numbers reduce. 13.2 It is proposed that this be done by placing some of the additional income (income over budget) from 2013-14 into a reserve for use during 2014-15. It is proposed to make provision in the budget at this point and to fund this through the final account process via slippage of income. 13.3 This proposal also allows for the funding of temporary staffing costs within the Customer Access service whose work is directly impacted upon the activity within the Planning function. 14. Webcasting of Meetings 14.1 The Council has selected a solution for the web-casting of meetings. These meetings will include the Cabinet, Council, selected Overview and Scrutiny Committee, and Planning Committees meetings both held at Elizabeth House and remotely. 14.2 The on-going cost to use the necessary software is estimated to be £6,000 pa, in addition to these costs there will need to be additional staff time estimated at £5,000 pa, to operate and post the webcasts, located within the Committee section. The ICT service will continue to provide on-going technical support to the solution.
Page 57 Appendix 3 (part 2)
15. Implementation of Individual Electoral Registration 15.1 Government is introducing Individual Electoral Registration (IER) in 2014. The system will aim to increase public trust in the voting system, encourage people to take responsibility for their own votes plus reduce the risk and perception of electoral fraud. 15.2 Under IER everyone in the household who is eligible to have their name on the electoral register will have to complete an individual from. 15.3 In 2014 matching of individuals will take place between the Council and Dept of Work and Pensions those who are matched will be sent a confirmation letter. Where there is no match households will be sent a form and followed up with an individual form and if necessary a personal visit from office staff. 15.4 After this initial data matching excise and in future canvasses the Electoral Registration Officer (ERO) must send out an household canvass form during the canvass period and act upon any information received within this form including inviting to register new people added to the form. This also includes people who requested to be registered throughout the year or have come to the EROs attention (for example: through Council Tax). The duty of the ERO is, if necessary, to write to the individual at least three times and make at least one personal visit to achieve a response. 15.5 This is a considerable increase in workload and resource cost, as many more letters will require printing and posting and many more personal visits will need to be made. 15.6 This proposal includes the covering of costs regarding extra printing and posting. This is higher in 2014 due to the confirmation and data checking during this year. It is proposed as part of the funding to have part time member of staff dealing with the increased workloads involved in the data matching and the frequent house to house enquires that will be required. It is recommended that this be on a two year fixed contract which would be reviewed by the ERO, Head of Legal and Democratic Services and the Democratic Services Manager once the system is bedded in and business as usual can be more easily quantified. 15.7 Government has indicated that each Council will receive funding for the introduction of IER, it has been confirmed that SDC will receive around £37k during 2014/15. This income has been assumed within the Base Budget.
Page 58 Discretionary Charges Appendix 4 Business, Housing & Revenues Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20% Council Tax Recovery of costs following summons issue No VAT £85.00 £85.00 £85.00
NNDR (Business Rates) Recovery of costs following summons issue No VAT £85.00 £85.00 £85.00
Community Leadership & Social Inclusion
Rural Cinema Equipment Hire Plus VAT £34.04 £34.04 £40.85
Film and Equipment Hire - 69% of income from ticket sales or miniPlus VAT £34.00 £34.00 £40.80
Housing
House in multiple occupation (HIMO) Inspection Fees Number of properties 5 to 10 No VAT £596.00 £596.00 £596.00 11 to 15 No VAT £659.00 £659.00 £659.00 16 to 20 No VAT £722.00 £722.00 £722.00 21 + No VAT £783.00 £783.00 £783.00
Immigration Housing Certificate No VAT £110.00 £110.00 £110.00
Housing Hazard Awareness Improvement Notice No VAT £250.00 £250.00 £250.00 Hazard Awareness Prohibition Notice No VAT £250.00 £250.00 £250.00 Revocation of Improvement/Prohibition Orders No VAT £60.00 £60.00 £60.00 HIMO Variation/Revocation's No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Energy Performance Certificate No VAT n/a £60.00 £60.00
Home Choice Plus Advertising properties on Home Choice Plus system Plus VAT £52.50 £55.00 £66.00
Page 59 1 Technical Services
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20% Building Control Domestic Charges See appendix document
Non Domestic Charges See appendix document
Car Parking (Subject to change with appropriate consultation)
All Car Parks Long Stay * up to 1 hour Inclusive £1.00 £1.00 £1.00 up to 2 hours Inclusive £2.00 £2.00 £2.00 up to 3 hours Inclusive £3.00 £3.00 £3.00 up to 4 hours Inclusive £4.00 £4.00 £4.00 up to 9 hours Inclusive £6.00 £6.00 £6.00 up to 12 hours Inclusive £8.00 £8.00 £8.00 up to 24 hours Inclusive £10.00 £10.00 £10.00 up to 72 hours Inclusive £20.00 £20.00 £20.00 Evening Charge Inclusive £2.00 £2.00 £2.00
*Bridgeway Free
Season Tickets Short Stay 3 Month Inclusive £135.00 £135.00 £135.00 Yearly Inclusive £500.00 £500.00 £500.00 Yearly Season Ticket discounts (based on numbers purchased) 5-24 5% 5% 5% 25-49 10% 10% 10% 50-99 15% 15% 15% 100-149 20% 20% 20% 150+ 25% 25% 25%
Long Stay 3 Month Inclusive £135.00 £135.00 £135.00 Yearly Inclusive £500.00 £500.00 £500.00 Yearly Season Ticket discounts (based on numbers purchased) 5-24 5% 5% 5% 25-49 10% 10% 10% 50-99 15% 15% 15% 100-149 20% 20% 20% 150+ 25% 25% 25%
Waivers/Dispensations 1 day admin fee Incl. if app. £5.00 £5.00 £5.00 4 days - week admin fee Incl. if app. £20.00 £20.00 £20.00
Stratford value card £2.00 £2.00 £2.00 25% bonus on credit purchased
OAP Parking Permit Admin charge Inclusive £10 £10 £10 in receipt of pension credit guaranteed £0 £0 £0
Page 60 2 Refuse
Street Cleaning Trolley release Fee 1-10 No VAT £16.00 £16.00 £16.00 Trolley release Fee over 10 No VAT £22.00 £22.00 £22.00 Copies of EPA Zoning Plans Plus VAT £27.00 £27.00 £32.40
Refuse Collection Bulky Household Waste Collection (1 to 3 items) No VAT £35.00 £35.00 £35.00 Bulky Household Waste Collection (4 to 6 items) No VAT £45.00 £45.00 £45.00 Bulky Household Waste Collection (7 to 9 items) No VAT £55.00 £55.00 £55.00 Bulky Household Waste Collection (10 to 12 items) No VAT £65.00 £65.00 £65.00
Green Waste Collection (charge applicable for third or subsequent bins) Green Bin Emptying for 1 Year No VAT £40.00 £40.00 £40.00 Green Bin Emptying for 2 Years No VAT £55.00 £55.00 £55.00 Green Bin Emptying for 3 Years No VAT £72.00 £72.00 £72.00
Provision of First Wheeled Bins Free for those on Council tax or Housing benefit Free Free Free Provision and delivery of 240 litre wheeled bin No VAT £35.00 £35.00 £35.00 Provision and delivery of 140 litre wheeled bin No VAT £30.00 £30.00 £30.00
Provision of Additional Wheeled Bins Free for those on Council tax or Housing benefit Free Free Free Provision and delivery of 240 litre wheeled bin No VAT £35.00 £35.00 £35.00 Provision and delivery of 140 litre wheeled bin No VAT £30.00 £30.00 £30.00
Provision of Replacement Bins Free for those on Council tax or Housing benefit Free Free Free In cases of genuine damage by contractor (excluding wilful damage or loss) Free Free Free 240 Litre Bin No VAT £35.00 £35.00 £35.00 140 Litre bin No VAT £30.00 £30.00 £30.00 Swap for larger/smaller No VAT £15.00 £15.00 £15.00
Schedule 2 collection service - fortnightly collection of 1 x 240 litre wheeled bin (or equivalent) for refu Residential hostel, nursing home No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00 Holiday let No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00
Page 61 3 Customer Access
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20% Land Charges
LLC 1 No VAT 15.00 15.00 15.00 Con 29 (R) No VAT 83.00 83.00 83.00 Con 29 (O) Optional enquires on set questions No VAT 5.00 5.00 5.00 Village Green enquiries No VAT 15.00 15.00 15.00 Non standard enquiries (per 20 mins) No VAT 10.00 10.00 10.00 Extra parcel of Land No VAT 10.00 10.00 10.00 Additional question charge No VAT 5.00 5.00 5.00
Page 62 4 Environment & Planning
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20%
Contaminated Land Reports Inclusive £100.00 £100.00 £100.00
Pathlow Gypsy Caravan Site (application from 1 April 2011) Single Plot (inclusive of £1 Council tax) No VAT £63.00 £63.00 £63.00 Double Plot (Inclusive of £1 Council Tax) No VAT £67.00 £67.00 £67.00
Planning DC & Enforcement
A4 SiteMap Ordnance Survey Extracts
6 x Block Plan @ 1:500 scale Inclusive £10.00 £10.00 £10.00 8 x Block Plan @ 1:500 scale Inclusive £10.50 £10.50 £10.50 10 x Block Plan @ 1:500 scale Inclusive £11.00 £11.00 £11.00 6 x Site Location Plan @ 1:1250 scale Inclusive £20.00 £20.00 £20.00 8 x Site Location Plan @ 1:1250 scale Inclusive £20.50 £20.50 £20.50 10 x Site Location Plan @ 1:1250 scale Inclusive £21.00 £21.00 £21.00 6 x Site Location Plan @ 1:2500 scale Inclusive £55.00 £55.00 £55.00 8 x Site Location Plan @ 1:2500 scale Inclusive £55.50 £55.50 £55.50 10 x Site Location Plan @ 1:2500 scale Inclusive £56.00 £56.00 £56.00 Additional Copies are charged at £0.25 per copy Inclusive £0.25 £0.25 £0.25
Pre Application Advice See appended document
Heritage and Design
Conservation
High Hedges Complaint No VAT £400.00 £400.00 £400.00 High Hedges Complaint if in receipt of means tested benefit No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00
Licensing
Privite Hire Vehicle Licencing Operators- with 1-3 vehicles (new) No VAT £351.00 £351.00 £351.00 Operators- with 1-3 vehicles (renewal) No VAT £294.00 £294.00 £294.00 Operators- with 4 to 7 vehicles (new) No VAT £393.00 £393.00 £393.00 Operators- with 4 to 7 vehicles (renewal) No VAT £335.00 £335.00 £335.00 Operators- with 8 to 10 Vehicles (new) No VAT £435.00 £435.00 £435.00 Operators- with 8 to 10 Vehicles (renewal) No VAT £377.00 £377.00 £377.00 Operators - with over 11 vehicles (new) No VAT £477.00 £477.00 £477.00 Operators - with over 11 vehicles (renewal) No VAT £419.00 £419.00 £419.00 Private hire Vehicle (new) No VAT £346.00 £346.00 £346.00 Private hire Vehicle (renewal) No VAT £304.00 £304.00 £304.00 Copy of paper licence No VAT £15.00 £15.00 £15.00 Replacement Badge No VAT £32.00 £32.00 £32.00 Replacement Plate No VAT £53.00 £53.00 £53.00 Change of ownership of plate with no reissue of licence No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00
Hackney Carriages (Annual) New or reissue of plate following change of ownership No VAT £414.00 £414.00 £414.00 Hackney carriage - Renewal No VAT £377.00 £377.00 £377.00 Omnibus No VAT £377.00 £377.00 £377.00 Omnibus Driver No VAT £388.00 £388.00 £388.00 Omnibus Renewal No VAT £74.00 £74.00 £74.00 Statutory License (Drivers renewal - 3 year) No VAT £210.00 £210.00 £210.00 Replacement Tariff Card No VAT £16.00 £16.00 £16.00
Page 63 5 Dual Drivers' Licence 3 Year new No VAT £278.00 £278.00 £278.00 3 Year renewal No VAT £236.00 £236.00 £236.00 Bounced Cheque Charge No VAT £40.00 £40.00 £40.00 CRB Completion and signature + CRB Fee No VAT £9.00 £9.00 £9.00 Knowledge Test No VAT £32.00 £32.00 £32.00
Pleasure Boat Licences (Annual) Class A Rowing. Punts, Canoes No VAT £42.00 £42.00 £42.00 Class A Motor Boats No VAT £58.00 £58.00 £58.00 Class B Carrying not more than 12 Passengers No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Class C Cabin Cruisers or Long Boats No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Boatman's Licence to Navigate Initial No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Boatman's Licence to Navigate Renewal No VAT £58.00 £58.00 £58.00
Street Trading Consents For Fixed Locations Zone 1 - Food No VAT £1,519.00 £1,519.00 £1,519.00 Zone 1 - Non Food No VAT £1,100.00 £1,100.00 £1,100.00 Zone 2 - Food No VAT £812.00 £812.00 £812.00 Zone 2 - Non Food No VAT £707.00 £707.00 £707.00 Zone 3 - Food No VAT £760.00 £760.00 £760.00 Zone 3 - Non Food No VAT £707.00 £707.00 £707.00
To Trade as a mobile operator Food Mobile Zones 1 + 2 + 3 No VAT £1,937.00 £1,937.00 £1,937.00 Food Mobile Zone 2 + 3 No VAT £1,728.00 £1,728.00 £1,728.00 Additional Vehicles per vehicle No VAT £576.00 £576.00 £576.00 Food Mobiles Zone 3 No VAT £1,414.00 £1,414.00 £1,414.00 Additional Vehicles per vehicle No VAT £576.00 £576.00 £576.00 Non Food Mobile Zone 2 + 3 No VAT £760.00 £760.00 £760.00 Additional Vehicles per vehicle No VAT £367.00 £367.00 £367.00 Non Food Mobile Zone 3 No VAT £524.00 £524.00 £524.00 Additional Vehicles per vehicle No VAT £262.00 £262.00 £262.00
Special Events/markets Daily Rate Category 1 - Up to 20 Traders No VAT £120.00 £120.00 £120.00 Category 2 - 21 to 49 Traders No VAT £262.00 £262.00 £262.00 Category 3 - 50 to 75 traders No VAT £393.00 £393.00 £393.00 Category 4 - 76 to 99 Traders No VAT £524.00 £524.00 £524.00 Category 5 - Over 100 Traders No VAT £629.00 £629.00 £629.00 Consecutive days 50% of daily rate No VAT See Above See Above See Above Late night opening of Public Conveniences No VAT Actual Cost Actual Cost Actual Cost Additional Street Cleaning No VAT Actual Cost Actual Cost Actual Cost
Day Rates Food Trader No VAT £68.00 £68.00 £68.00 Non Food Trader No VAT £53.00 £53.00 £53.00
Gambling Act 2005
Adult Gaming Centres New application fee No VAT £1,320.00 £1,320.00 £1,320.00 Annual Fee No VAT £810.00 £810.00 £810.00 Application to vary No VAT £1,000.00 £1,000.00 £1,000.00 Application to transfer No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Application for re-instatement No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Application for provisional statement No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Licence application (provisional statement hodlers) No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Copy Licence No VAT £25.00 £25.00 £25.00 Notification of change No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00
Tracks New application fee No VAT £2,330.00 £2,330.00 £2,330.00 Annual Fee No VAT £1,000.00 £1,000.00 £1,000.00 Application to vary No VAT £1,250.00 £1,250.00 £1,250.00 Application to transfer No VAT £950.00 £950.00 £950.00 Application for re-instatement No VAT £950.00 £950.00 £950.00 Application for provisional statement No VAT £2,330.00 £2,330.00 £2,330.00
Page 64 6 Licence application (provisional statement hodlers) No VAT £950.00 £950.00 £950.00 Copy Licence No VAT £25.00 £25.00 £25.00 Notification of change No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00
Betting Premisies (excluding tracks) New application fee No VAT £2,320.00 £2,320.00 £2,320.00 Annual Fee No VAT £600.00 £600.00 £600.00 Application to vary No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Application to transfer No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Application for re-instatement No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Application for provisional statement No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Licence application (provisional statement hodlers) No VAT £1,200.00 £1,200.00 £1,200.00 Copy Licence No VAT £25.00 £25.00 £25.00 Notification of change No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00
Miscellaneous Animal Boarding Establishments Initial Application No VAT £152.00 £152.00 £152.00 Animal Boarding Establishments Renewal No VAT £105.00 £105.00 £105.00 * Pet Shop Licence Intial Application No VAT £152.00 £152.00 £152.00 * Pet Shop Licence Renewal No VAT £105.00 £105.00 £105.00 * Riding Establishment Licence 1 to 10 Horses No VAT £110.00 £110.00 £110.00 * Riding Establishment Licence 11 to 20 Horses No VAT £163.00 £163.00 £163.00 * Riding Establishment Licence 21 to 30 Horses No VAT £215.00 £215.00 £215.00 * Riding Establishment Licence 31 to 40 Horses No VAT £267.00 £267.00 £267.00 * Riding Establishment Licence over 40 Horses No VAT £320.00 £320.00 £320.00 Dog Breeding Establishment Licence Initial Application No VAT £152.00 £152.00 £152.00 Dog Breeding Establishment Licence Renewal No VAT £105.00 £105.00 £105.00 Motor Vehicle Salvage Operators No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Sex Establishments No VAT £3,500.00 £3,500.00 £3,500.00 Sexual Entertainment Venues No VAT £3,500.00 £3,500.00 £3,500.00 Registration for Acupuncture, Electrolysis, Ear piercing, tattooing eNo VAT £110.00 £110.00 £110.00 Additional Operators No VAT £58.00 £58.00 £58.00 Change of Premises No VAT £110.00 £110.00 £110.00
Dangerous and Wild Animal Licence * Application No VAT £205.00 £205.00 £205.00 * Grant No VAT £110.00 £110.00 £110.00
Zoo Licence * Application No VAT £305.00 £305.00 £305.00 * Grant No VAT £110.00 £110.00 £110.00
*Plus Vet Fees
Pest Control
Control of Pests Indoor Public Health Pests (indoor rats, bedbugs, cockroaches) £25.00 £25.00 £30.00 up to three treatments Plus VAT Single Treatment Pests (e.g. Wasp treatment, Flies in domestic £60.00 £60.00 £72.00 properties) Plus VAT Up to Three Treatment Pests (e.g. Mice, Outdoor Rats, Fleas, Squirrels in domestic house lofts only, Carpet Beetles and £81.00 £81.00 £97.20 Clothes Moths in domestic premises) Plus VAT Commercial Treatment (any single treatment in a commercial £60.00 £60.00 £72.00 premises) Plus VAT Commercial Treatments (up to three treatments in a commercial £81.00 £81.00 £97.20 premises) Plus VAT Pest Control advice visitsor aborted call-outs Plus VAT £25.00 £25.00 £30.00
Dog Warden Collection of Stray Dogs - Fine plus costs (Statutory fine of £25) No VAT 80.00 £80.00 £80.00
S106 Agreement Monitoring Costs Monitoring individual obligations 200.00 200.00 200.00 Monitoring where housing provisions apply 400.00 400.00 400.00
Page 65 7 Resources
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20% Corporate Property
Events All plus VAT if applicable Performers per day £30.00 £30.00 £36.00 Performers per part day £20.00 £20.00 £24.00 Performers per day (bank hol and w-end) £35.00 £35.00 £42.00 Performers per part day (bank hol and w-end) £22.00 £22.00 £26.40 Major events per day (Commercial trade fairs/ displays, main area) £1,850.00 £1,850.00 £2,220.00 Music festivals per day (see plan) £1,750.00 £1,750.00 £2,100.00 Additional area, per day £800.00 £800.00 £960.00 Fairs, circuses and craft fairs per day £500.00 £500.00 £600.00 All other types of non major attraction or event £250.00 £250.00 £300.00 Filming per day £500.00 £500.00 £600.00 Filming per hour £100.00 £100.00 £120.00
Recreation Ground Football pitch with toilets (under 16) per match Plus VAT £10.00 £10.00 £12.00 Pitch with dry changing (adult) per match Plus VAT £20.00 £20.00 £24.00 Overnight mooring fee River Avon Recreation ground Inclusive £10.00 £10.00 £10.00
*VAT not applied when 10 or more games are booked
Page 66 8 Charges for Not for Profit Organisations Technical Services
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20% Schedule 2 collection service - fortnightly collection of 1 x 240 litre wheeled bin (or equivalent) for refu Charity premises/shops No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00 Village halls, Community halls No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00
Schedule 2 collection service - fortnightly collection of 1 x 1,100 litre bin for dry recycling ONLY WCC Schools No VAT £130.00 £130.00 £130.00
Graveyards - Fortnightly collection of 1 x 240 litre bin for refuse, dry recycling or garden waste Collection of 1 x 240 litre refuse wheeled bin (or equivalent) for 1 yNo VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00
Page 67 9 Resources
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20%
Small/Local Charitable Rate All plus VAT if applicable Recreation Ground (Large events, North Rec.) £100.00 £100.00 £120.00 Recreation Ground (small, half North Rec.) £30.00 £30.00 £36.00 Bancroft Gardens and waterside promenade (day events) £50.00 £50.00 £60.00 Bancroft Gardens and waterside promenade (Short duration £20.00 £20.00 £24.00 events, half day or less) Corn Market £30.00 £30.00 £36.00 Corn Market (half day) £20.00 £20.00 £24.00
Large/ Non-Local Charitable Rate All plus VAT if applicable Recreation Ground (Large events, North Rec.) £200.00 £200.00 £240.00 Recreation Ground (small, half North Rec.) £70.00 £70.00 £84.00 Bancroft Gardens and waterside promenade (day events) £70.00 £70.00 £84.00 Bancroft Gardens and waterside promenade (Short duration £50.00 £50.00 £60.00 events, half day or less) Corn Market £50.00 £50.00 £60.00 Corn Market (half day) £30.00 £30.00 £36.00
Note: A small charity is defined as having a turnover of less than £1m per annum A local charity is defined as being registered within the District
Page 68 10 Charges Limited by Statute Technical Services
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20% PCN's No VAT £70/£50 £70/£50 £70/£50 paid within 14 days discount No VAT £35/£25 £35/£25 £35/£25 50% INCREASE IF CHARGE CERTIFICATE SENT OUT FURTHER £5 INCREASE IF SENT TO DEBT REGISTRATION
Page 69 11 Corporate Support
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20% Democratic Services
Sale of Register (These charges may be reviewed independently during the year) Data Copy No VAT 20.00 20.00 20.00 Paper Copy No VAT 10.00 10.00 10.00
*Edited Register Charges as per Representation of the People Regulations 2001 Regulation 110(2) Full Register Charges as per Representation of the People Regulations 2001 Regulation 111(5) Overseas Electors List Charges as per Representation of the People Regulations 2001 Regulation 111(6)
Charges applied to current Register Paper Whole full register No VAT 490.00 490.00 490.00 Data Whole full register No VAT 164.00 164.00 164.00 Paper Whole edited register No VAT 270.00 270.00 270.00 Data Whole edited register No VAT 98.00 98.00 98.00 Paper index No VAT 25.00 25.00 25.00 Data Index No VAT 24.50 24.50 24.50 Data Overseas Voter List No VAT 23.00 23.00 23.00 Paper Overseas Voter List No VAT 20.00 20.00 20.00
Statutory Marked Election Registers Charges (from July 2008) Data Format No VAT 10.00 10.00 10.00 Printed Copy No VAT 10.00 10.00 10.00
Confirmation letter No VAT 5.00 5.00 5.00
Page 70 12 Environment & Planning
Current Proposed 2013/14 2014/15 New Incl. Description VAT Charge Charge VAT @ 20% Authorised Processes Subsistence See appended document
Private Water Supplies plus or at cost of contractor plus our cost in arranging and liaising with contractor Risk Assessment (cost per hour) Inclusive £37.00 £37.00 £37.00 Sampling Inclusive £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Investigations Inclusive £60.00 £60.00 £60.00 Granting an Authorisation Inclusive £85.00 £85.00 £85.00 Analysing a Sample under Regulation 10 Inclusive £25.00 £25.00 £25.00 Analysing a Sample Taken during Check Monitoring Inclusive £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Analysing a Sample Taken during Audit Monitoring Inclusive £500.00 £500.00 £500.00
Planning Applications See appended document
Licensing Act 2003 Fee Structure See appended document
Events Main Application Fee 5,000 to 9,999 No VAT £1,000.00 £1,000.00 £1,000.00 10,000 to 14,999 No VAT £2,000.00 £2,000.00 £2,000.00 15,000 to 19,999 No VAT £4,000.00 £4,000.00 £4,000.00 20,000 to 29,999 No VAT £8,000.00 £8,000.00 £8,000.00 30,000 to 39,999 No VAT £16,000.00 £16,000.00 £16,000.00 40,000 to 49,999 No VAT £24,000.00 £24,000.00 £24,000.00 50,000 to 59,999 No VAT £32,000.00 £32,000.00 £32,000.00 60,000 to 69,999 No VAT £40,000.00 £40,000.00 £40,000.00 70,000 to 79,999 No VAT £48,000.00 £48,000.00 £48,000.00 80,000 to 89,999 No VAT £56,000.00 £56,000.00 £56,000.00 90,000 and over No VAT £64,000.00 £64,000.00 £64,000.00
Events Main Annual Charge 5,000 to 9,999 No VAT £500.00 £500.00 £500.00 10,000 to 14,999 No VAT £1,000.00 £1,000.00 £1,000.00 15,000 to 19,999 No VAT £2,000.00 £2,000.00 £2,000.00 20,000 to 29,999 No VAT £4,000.00 £4,000.00 £4,000.00 30,000 to 39,999 No VAT £8,000.00 £8,000.00 £8,000.00 40,000 to 49,999 No VAT £12,000.00 £12,000.00 £12,000.00 50,000 to 59,999 No VAT £16,000.00 £16,000.00 £16,000.00 60,000 to 69,999 No VAT £20,000.00 £20,000.00 £20,000.00 70,000 to 79,999 No VAT £24,000.00 £24,000.00 £24,000.00 80,000 to 89,999 No VAT £28,000.00 £28,000.00 £28,000.00 90,000 and over No VAT £32,000.00 £32,000.00 £32,000.00
Gambling Act 2005
Licensed Premises Gaming Machine Permit Grant No VAT £150.00 £150.00 £150.00 Existing operator Grant No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Variation No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Transfer No VAT £25.00 £25.00 £25.00 Annual Fee No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00 Change of name No VAT £25.00 £25.00 £25.00 Copy of Permit No VAT £15.00 £15.00 £15.00
Licensed Premises Automatic Notification Process On notification No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00
Club Gaming Permits Grant No VAT £200.00 £200.00 £200.00 Grant (Club Premises Certificate holder) No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Existing operator Grant No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Variation No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Renewal No VAT £200.00 £200.00 £200.00 Renewal (Club Premises Certificate holder) No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00
Page 71 13 Annual Fee No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00 Copy of Permit No VAT £15.00 £15.00 £15.00
Club Machine Permits Grant No VAT £200.00 £200.00 £200.00 Grant (Club Premises Certificate holder) No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Existing operator Grant No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Variation No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Renewal No VAT £200.00 £200.00 £200.00 Renewal (Club Premises Certificate holder) No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Annual Fee No VAT £50.00 £50.00 £50.00 Copy of Permit No VAT £15.00 £15.00 £15.00
Family Entertainment Centre Gaming Machine Permits Grant No VAT £300.00 £300.00 £300.00 Renewal No VAT £300.00 £300.00 £300.00 Existing operator Grant No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Change of name No VAT £25.00 £25.00 £25.00 Copy of Permit No VAT £15.00 £15.00 £15.00
Prize Gaming Permits Grant No VAT £300.00 £300.00 £300.00 Renewal No VAT £300.00 £300.00 £300.00 Existing operator Grant No VAT £100.00 £100.00 £100.00 Change of name No VAT £25.00 £25.00 £25.00 Copy of Permit No VAT £15.00 £15.00 £15.00
Small Lottery Registration Grant No VAT £40.00 £40.00 £40.00 Annual Fee No VAT £20.00 £20.00 £20.00
Page 72 14 Stratford-on-Avon District Building Control Domestic Charges
APRIL 2011
VAT should be added to the charges at the current rate
Individually determined domestic charges
If the work you are carrying out is not listed as a standard charge, the charge will be individually determined.
This method of determining the charge mainly relates to larger schemes and includes the following types of building work.
• Applications subject to a reversion charge (work reverting from an approved inspector to the local authority) • Building work that is in relation to more than one building • Building work consisting of alterations to a domestic property (other than extensions) where the estimated cost exceeds £20,000 • Building work consisting of a domestic extension where the floor area exceeds 100m2 for single storey or 200m2 for two storey • Building work consisting of a non-exempt domestic garage or carport with a floor area over 100m2
If your building work is defined as requiring an individual assessment of a charge you should e-mail Stratford Building Control at: [email protected] with ‘request for building regulation charge’ in the title of the e-mail and provide a description of the intended work. We will contact you within 24 hours. Alternatively telephone our helpline on 01789 260626.
Standard Charges for the Conversion/Creation of New Houses (Table A) Number Plan Inspection Building Notice Regularisation Additional of Dwellings Charge Charge Charge Charge Charge 1) 1 £210 £490 £770 £910 £150
2 £285 £665 £1045 £1235 £150
3 £345 £805 £1265 £1495 £150
4 £390 £910 £1430 £1690 £150 More than 5 Please call for a Please call for a Please call for a quote quote quote
Notes For five or more dwellings or if the floor area of the dwelling(s) exceeds 300m2 the charges will be individually determined. Please contact Stratford on Avon Building Control for further assistance. 1) Additional Charge - for work when the relevant building work, or part thereof, has not been carried out by a competent person referred to in Regulation 7 (5) (g) or (h) of the Building (Local Authority Charges) Regulations 2010 applies. It is additional to the inspection charge, Building Notice charge or Regularisation charge
Stratford-on-Avon District Council Building Control Elizabeth House, Church Street Stratford-upon-Avon CV37 6HX Telephone 01789 260626 Tel: 0845 054 0505 Minicom 01789 260747 Email: [email protected] Email [email protected] Web: www.labcnhw.co.uk Web www.stratford.gov.uk/buildingcontrol Page 73 SDC/1465/MAR11 Domestic extensions to a single building (Table B) Category Plan Inspection Building Regularisation Additional Charge Charge Notice Charge charge Charge 1) 1 Single storey extension floor area not exceeding 10m 2 £90 £210 £330 £390 £150 Single storey extension floor area exceeding 10m 2 but £120 £280 £440 £520 £150 2 not exceeding 40m2 3 Single storey extension floor area exceeding 40m 2 but £165 £385 £605 £715 £150 not exceeding 100m 2 4 Two storey extension floor area not exceeding 20m 2 £135 £315 £495 £585 £150 5 Two storey extension floor area exceeding 20m 2 but not £165 £385 £605 £715 £150 exceeding 60m 2 6 Two storey extension floor area exceeding 60m 2 but not £210 £490 £770 £910 £150 exceeding 100m 2 7 Two storey extension floor area exceeding 100m 2 not £270 £630 £990 £1170 £150 exceeding 200m 2 8 Loft conversion £105 £245 £385 £455 £150 9 Erection or extension of a non exempt detached/ £75 £175 £275 £325 £150 attached single storey domestic garage/carport or stable/outbuilding up to 60m 2 10 Erection or extension of a non exempt detached/ £165 £385 £605 £715 £150 attached domestic two storey garage/carport or stable/outbuilding under 100m 2 11 Conversion of garage or similar to a habitable room(s) £85 £185 £297 £351 £150 12 Alterations to extend or create a basement up to 100m 2 £165 £385 £605 £715 £150 Domestic alterations to a single building (Table C) Category Basis of charge Plan charge Inspection Building Notice Regularisation charge charge 1 Underpinning Fixed price £100 initial cost N/A £100 initial cost £130 initial cost then £25 per metre then £25 per metre then £32.50 per run run metre run 2 Renovation of a thermal Fixed price £50 £150 £220 £260 element to a single dwelling 3 Internal alterations, Estimated cost £45 £105 £165 £195 installation of fittings (not up to £3,000 electrical) and/or structural Between £3,000 £67 £158 £248 £293 alterations and £10,000 Between £10,000 £90 £210 £330 £390 and £20,000 4 Window replacement Fixed price £100 initial window N/A £100 initial window £130 initial window then £10 per then £10 per then £13 per additional window additional window additional window 5 Electrical work (not Fixed price £45 £105 £165 £195 competent persons scheme) 6 Solar Panels Fixed price £85 N/A £85 £100 Notes • 50% reduction can be taken off smaller work when carried out at the same time as larger charged projects • Where part of an extension is single storey and part is two storey the areas can be added together and the charge for a two storey extension will apply. • Where a first floor extension is constructed over an existing single storey structure the charge applied is that for a single storey extension of the same floor area.
1) Additional Charge - Work when the relevant building work, or part thereof, has not been carried out by a competent person referred to in Regulation 7 (5) (g) or (h) of the Building (Local Authority Charges) Regulations 2010 applies. It is additional to the inspection charge, Building Notice charge or Regularisation charge. Page 74 Stratford-on-Avon District Building Control Non Domestic Charges
OCTOBER 2010
VAT should be added to the charges at the current rate
Individually determined Non domestic charges
If the work you are carrying out is not listed as a standard charge, the charge will be individually determined.
This method of determining the charge mainly relates to larger schemes and includes the following types of building work.
• Applications subject to a reversion charge (work reverting from an approved inspector to the local authority) • Building work that is in relation to more than one building • Building work consisting of alterations to a non domestic property (other than extensions) where the estimated cost exceeds £100,000 • Building work consisting of a non domestic extension where the floor area exceeds 200m 2
If your building work is defined as requiring an individual assessment of a charge you should e-mail Stratford Building Control at: [email protected] with ‘request for building regulation charge’ in the title of the e-mail and provide a description of the intended work. We will contact you within 24 hours. Alternatively telephone our helpline on 01789 260626.
Stratford-on-Avon District Council Building Control Elizabeth House, Church Street Stratford-upon-Avon CV37 6HX Telephone 01789 260626 Minicom 01789 260747 Email [email protected] Web www.stratford.gov.uk/buildingcontrol Page 75 SDC/1466/OCT10 Other Non Domestic Work – Extensions and New Build (Table D)
BUILDING USAGE Category of work Assembly/Recreation Industrial and Storage All other use classes Other Residential (Institutional) Plan Inspection Regularisation Plan Inspection Regularisation Plan Inspection Regularisation Charge charge charge Charge charge charge Charge charge charge Floor area not £210 £450 £858 £180 £250 £559 £210 £450 £858 exceeding 10m2 Floor area £290 £600 £1157 £220 £310 £689 £250 £500 £975 exceeding 10m2 but not exceeding 40m2 Floor area £410 £650 £1378 £260 £370 £819 £320 £550 £1131 exceeding 40m2 but not exceeding 100m2 Floor area £500 £750 £1625 £300 £420 £936 £410 £650 £1378 exceeding 100m2 but not exceeding 200m2
All other Non Domestic Work – Alterations (Table E)
Category of Work Basis of Charge Plan Inspection Regularisation Charge Charge Charge Underpinning Fixed price £100 initial N/A £130 initial charge then charge the £25 per £32.50 per metre run metre run Window replacement (non competent person Fixed price £45 £105 £195 scheme) Renovation of a thermal element up to £50,000 Fixed price £60 £120 £234
Alterations not described elsewhere including Estimated cost up to £5,000 £50 £150 £260 Change of use, structural alterations and installation of controlled services Estimated Cost exceeding £105 £245 £455 £5,000 and up to £25,000
Estimated Cost exceeding £150 £350 £650 £25,000 and up to £50,000
Estimated cost exceeding £225 £525 £975 £50,000 and up to £100,000 Installation of a mezzanine floor up to 500m2 Fixed Price £105 £245 £455
Office fit out per storey Fixed Price £105 £245 £455
Shop fit out per storey Fixed Price £105 £245 £455
Page 76 Pre Application Advice Charges from 1 April 2014
Major developments (10 dwellings or more, 1000sqm or £1000.00* for a written response (proportionate to more floor space, or development on sites 1ha or larger) information submitted) Minor developments (5-9 dwellings, 500-999sqm floor £200.00* for written response (proportionate to space, or development on sites 0.5 to 0.99ha) information submitted) Minor developments (1-4 dwellings up to 499sqm floor £175.00* for written response (proportionate to space, or development on sites up to 0.49ha) information submitted) Agricultural buildings (excluding dwellings) – any floor £100.00* per meeting + written response (including space site visit) 100% affordable housing schemes 50% discount to which ever of the above applies. (if applicant is Registered Social Landlord) Listed building advice (including householders) £150.00* (including site visit) Tree advice (including householders) Standing advice on website only – no officer advice to be given Lawful Development Certificates No officer advice to be given – applicant must seek independent professional advice Revisions to permitted schemes Charges as above Conditions Covered by conditions fees
* Denotes where charges are subject to VAT. Figures shown are inclusive of VAT
Page 77 Page 78 Page 79 Page 80 Page 81 Page 82 Page 83 Page 84 Page 85 Page 86 Page 87 Page 88 Licensing Act 2003
Licensing Act 2003 Fee Structure Following extensive consultation with local authorities, industry, clubs and other stakeholders about licence fees, the Department for Culture Media and Sport has announced the fees package.
Fees will recover the licensing authorities' costs of administrating, inspecting and enforcing the new regime.
There were two key findings from the consultation that needed to be addressed:
first that the overall level of premises fees – the main generator of income for Licensing Authorities - was pitched at too low a level to enable the full costs recovery for administration and enforcement in the new regime; and
second, that the control of premises selling alcohol would in general give rise to higher costs than other premises, particularly during transition, particularly where these were situated in town and city centres. These findings are reflected in the revised package, main elements of which include: A £100-£635 one-off payment for a new licence – a rise on the previous proposal of £80-£500.
£70-£350 for an annual fee – up from £40-£225.
The largest town and city centre pubs paying two to three times as much for their initial application fee and annual charge.
£37 for a personal licence
£21 for a temporary event notice. Subject to Parliamentary scrutiny, the new fee structure will have effect from 7 February 2005 – the beginning of the Act's transitional period, when applications for conversions to new licences can be made.
Premises Fees: The premises fees are determined according to the rateable value of the premises, and in the case of bands D and E, whether or not their primary business is the selling of alcohol.
1. Premises and club application and annual fees – each premises that is licensable will be allocated to a fee band according to rateable value
Band A B C D E Rateable No rateable £4,301 £33,001 £87,001 £125,000 Value value to to to to and above £4,300 £33,000 £87,000 £125,000
2. Each band attracts a different level of application fee – payable during transition.
Band A B C D E Fee £100 £190 £315 £450 £635
3. Premises applying to vary conditions in relation to the sale of alcohol during transition will be charged a supplementary fee, according to their fee band BAND A B C D E FEE £20 £60 £80 £100 £120
Page 89 Each band attracts a different level of annual fee – payable one year after the grant of the licence.
BAND A B C D E FEE £70 £180 £295 £320 £350
Rateable value bands A B C D E
Main Application Fee 100 190 315 450 635
Main Annual Charge 70 180 295 320 350
A multiplier applied to premises in bands D and E where they are exclusively or primarily in the business of selling alcohol (mainly large town and city centre pubs). Band D (x E (x 2) 3)
City / town centre pub 900 1905 application Fee
City / town centre pub annual 640 1050 charge
Payment to vary conditions (relates to alcohol only) during transition:
Rateable value bands A B C D E
Variation Fee 20 60 80 100 120
Personal Licences, Temporary Events and Other Fees
6. The Licensing Authorities will also be able to charge other fees in relation to their duties, most notably for temporary events and personal licences
Application for a grant or renewal of personal licence £37
Temporary event notice £21
Theft, loss, etc. of premises licence or summary £10.50
Application for a provisional statement where premises being £315 built, etc.
Notification of change of name or address £10.50
Application to vary licence to specify individual as premises £23 supervisor
Application for transfer of premises licence £23
Interim authority notice following death etc. of licence holder £23
Theft, loss etc. of certificate or summary £10.50
Notification of change of name or alteration of rules of club £10.50
Change of relevant registered address of club £10.50
Page 90
Theft, loss etc. of temporary event notice £10.50
Theft, loss etc. of personal licence £10.50
Duty to notify change of name or address £10.50
Right of freeholder etc. to be notified of licensing matters £21
Application to vary premises licence at community premises to £23 include alternative licence condition
Application for minor variation £89
Page 91 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL Appendix 5 CAPITAL BUDGET INC. NEW BIDS
2013/14 Amended Estimate to Period 4 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 2013/14 Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate £ £ £ £ £ £
GROSS EXPENDITURE Head of Enterprise, Housing & Revenues 837,156 680,000 352,000 352,000 272,000 272,000 Head of Corporate Support 676,500 0 0 0 0 0 Head of Customer Access 80,000 490,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 Head of Environment & Planning 204,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 Head of Technical Services 711,348 5,474,361 822,997 428,229 735,704 735,704 SUB-TOTAL 2,509,004 6,669,361 1,229,997 835,229 1,062,704 1,062,704 S.106 Projects 1,152,306 0 560,000 0 0 0 Page 92 Page GRAND TOTAL 3,661,310 6,669,361 1,789,997 835,229 1,062,704 1,062,704 FINANCED FROM:- Disabled facilities Grants 278,000 278,000 Regional Housing Pot - Empty Homes 92,000 Skater contribution 2,185 Scout Hut contributions 25,000 Traveller Site Grant 179,000 Virtual District Grant 50,000 100,000 Section 106 total 1,127,306 0 560,000 0 0 0 Total/Estimated Receipts 1,753,491 378,000 560,000 0 0 0 Use of SDC receipts 1,907,819 6,291,361 1,229,997 835,229 1,062,704 1,062,704 Total Finance Required 3,661,310 6,669,361 1,789,997 835,229 1,062,704 1,062,704 Use of Capital Receipts: Acc. Capital Receipts b/fwd to 1/4/13 12,568,760 10,660,941 4,369,580 3,139,584 2,304,354 1,241,650 (Surplus) / Deficit on Year 1,907,819 6,291,361 1,229,997 835,229 1,062,704 1,062,704 Accumulated Capital Receipts c/fwd 10,660,941 4,369,580 3,139,584 2,304,354 1,241,650 178,947
1 19/12/2013 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL Appendix 5 CAPITAL BUDGET INC. NEW BIDS
2013/14 Amended Estimate to Period 4 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 2013/14 Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate £ £ £ £ £ £
Head of Enterprise, Housing & Revenues
Disabled Facilities Grants - Mandatory Rolling Programme 450,000 400,000 122,000 122,000 122,000 122,000
Minor Works Assistance & Home Repair Grants (Discretionary) Rolling Programme 187,378 150,000 150,000 150,000 150,000 150,000
Empty Homes 152,000 Page 93 Page Empty Homes - Bid 0 80,000 80,000 80,000 0 0
Business Support 0 50,000
Market Towns - Shipston 2,778
Market Town Regeneration 45,000
Total Head of Enterprise, Housing & Revenues 837,156 680,000 352,000 352,000 272,000 272,000
Head of Corporate Support
Affordable Housing Investment Programme 358,750
Local Public Service Agreement Round 2 (LPSA2) grant f 317,750 0 0 0
Total Head of Corporate Support 676,500 0 0 0 0 0
2 19/12/2013 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL Appendix 5 CAPITAL BUDGET INC. NEW BIDS
2013/14 Amended Estimate to Period 4 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 2013/14 Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate £ £ £ £ £ £
Head of Customer Access
ICT Hardware, Software and Replcement Programme 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
Virtual District Programme – Improving Broadband 50,000 100,000 0 0 0 0
Network drive storage space 0 20,000 0000 Page 94 Page Corporate back up system 0 50,000 0000
PSN minor works inlcuding firewall 0 5,000 0000
Financial System 250,000
Upgrade of EDMS hardware 0 35,000 0000
Total Head of Customer Access 80,000 490,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
Head of Environment & Planning
Land Drainage 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000
Pathlow Traveller Site 179,000
Total Head of Environment & Planning 204,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000
3 19/12/2013 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL Appendix 5 CAPITAL BUDGET INC. NEW BIDS
2013/14 Amended Estimate to Period 4 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 2013/14 Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate £ £ £ £ £ £
Head of Technical Services
Planned Maintenance 363,485 487,361 518,615 341,229 648,704 648,704
Orbit/HoE Infrastructure 87,000 87,000 87,000 87,000 87,000 87,000
Warwick Road Land 207,482 Page 95 Page Bridgetown Land Development, Stratford upon Avon 160,863
Stratford Leisure Centre 100,000 4,900,000
Community Woodland, Bridgetown (SDC) 9,900
Total Head of Technical Services 711,348 5,474,361 822,997 428,229 735,704 735,704
4 19/12/2013 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL Appendix 5 CAPITAL BUDGET INC. NEW BIDS
2013/14 Amended Estimate to Period 4 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 2013/14 Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate Estimate £ £ £ £ £ £
Section 106 Projects
Mason's Road Cyclepath - S.106 0 560,000
Southam Re-development S.106 631,733
Canal Quarter Master Plan - S.106 7,500 Open Space (Avenue Farm play equipment) - S.106 168,139 Page 96 Page Community Facilities(Stratford Skatepark) - S.106 11,749
Open Space (Avenue Farm grounds work ) - S.106 81,819
Open Space (Cottage Lane) - S.106 8,900
Open Space (Trevelyan Crescent) - S.106 14,887
Public Art - S.106 41,320
CCTV Shipston Road (Waitrose)- S.106 22,265
Shipston Scout Hut - S.106 99,137
Netherstead Farm Affordable Housing 64,857
1,152,306 0 560,000 0 0 0
5 19/12/2013 Item 7
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Warwickshire, Coventry & Solihull Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Strategy Lead Officer: Paul Harris Contact on 01789 260314 Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor C Saint
Summary A Green Infrastructure Strategy for the Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull area has been produced to provide evidence for the preparation of plans and policies at a sub-regional and local level. It sets out how Green Infrastructure can be delivered with the involvement of a range of partners, including landowners and developers.
Recommendation
(1) That the Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Strategy be received as evidence to inform the preparation of the Proposed Submission Core Strategy, the first part of Stratford-on-Avon District’s Local Development Framework. (2) That the establishment of a Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull Green Infrastructure Partnership be supported in principle as a means of taking forward and implementing the Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Strategy.
NB. A copy of this report is available as an electronic attachment to the published agenda. Paper copies will be sent to members of The Cabinet.
1 Background/Information 1.1 In 2009 the Coventry, Solihull and Warwickshire Association of Planning Officers (CSWAPO) approved a feasibility study into the production of a historic and natural environment sub-regional document. With the revocation of the Regional Spatial Strategy and the introduction of the National Planning Policy Framework, this has transformed into a Green Infrastructure Strategy for the sub-region. 1.2 Initial work on its preparation was carried out by consultants and it was completed by Warwickshire County Council’s Ecology Unit. The work was funded entirely by Natural England with in-kind officer time from Warwickshire County Council and a sub-group of CSWAPO.
Page 97 1.3 The Strategy covers the disciplines of landscape, biodiversity and accessibility, each of which contributes to Green Infrastructure. Its aim is to provide evidence for Local Development Plan documents and a mechanism to assist the delivery of their policies. 1.4 It is structured to be a ‘living’ document where additional material can be added to reflect changes to national policy and increased knowledge and understanding of each discipline. 1.5 The Strategy went through a period of consultation earlier in the year and comments have been considered. Only one response was particularly negative, relating to Biodiversity Offsetting.
2 Evidence Base 2.1 Green Infrastructure is defined as a network of multi-functional greenspace which supports the natural and ecological processes and is integral to the health and quality of life of sustainable communities. 2.2 The purpose of the Sub-Regional Strategy is to provide evidence for the preparation of Development Plans, such as the District Council’s Core Strategy, and to underpin policies at the sub-regional and local levels. It also sets out how Green Infrastructure can be delivered with the involvement of landowners, developers and other partners. 2.3 The Strategy covers the distinct but inter-related disciplines of landscape, biodiversity and accessibility. Landscape 2.4 The main strategic areas of opportunity for strengthening landscape character are identified in the Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines. In particular, implementing substantial landscape frameworks well in advance of major developments and transport infrastructure can safeguard and enhance important landscape assets, help to create a sense of place for new development and retain vital links with the past. 2.5 While many initiatives have been at the local level, at the broader scale initiatives to work with landowners to maintain and restore permanent grassland and to plant new woodlands and hedgerows is also evident. However, the sub-region is suffering from the neglect of trees, hedgerows and wildflower meadows, largely as a result of changes in farming practices. 2.6 The Strategy makes the following recommendations relating to landscape: • Reassess the Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines in the light of new strategic landscape initiatives and partnership working, including the role of the Local Nature Partnership. • Prioritise strategic landscape improvements, particularly in relation to conserving and enhancing hedgerows and field boundaries, woodlands, grasslands and wetlands, and maintaining rural character. • Use the provision of Green Infrastructure to strengthen landscape character, reflecting locally distinctive natural and cultural landscape features.
Page 98 Biodiversity 2.7 The principle of conserving biodiversity is emphasised in the Lawton Review ‘Making Space for Nature’ (2010). This concluded that the collection of wildlife areas in England is fragmented and does not represent a coherent and resilient ecological network capable of responding to the challenges of climate change and other pressures. The report summarised what needed to be done to enhance habitats as ‘more, bigger, better and joined’. 2.8 Within the sub-region, the Biodiversity Action Plan (BAP) has mapped priority habitats. The results have been used to identify Biodiversity Core Areas where enhancement should be focused, although opportunities to create new features elsewhere should not be overlooked. 2.9 The Strategy makes the following recommendations relating to biodiversity: • Safeguard and enhance all Green Infrastructure biodiversity assets. • For woodland, grassland and wetland habitat categories, connect individual assets to form Core Areas, and connect these to form large functional Clusters. • Create either new Core Areas large enough to function independently as an individual site, or a functional Cluster of larger and smaller sites where there is a distinct local need or deficiency in a habitat category. Accessibility 2.10 A set of criteria was established to define and identify Green Infrastructure assets that could be considered to be of sub-regional importance due to their size, nature and accessibility, eg. country parks, common land, nature reserves, National Trust properties, long distance walking and cycling routes, canals. 2.11 Natural England’s Accessible Natural Greenspace Standard defines maximum distances that a resident should have to travel to reach accessible greenspace. This will be used as the basis for assessing the situation in the sub-region. 2.12 The Strategy makes the following recommendations relating to biodiversity: • Map areas with GI accessibility asset deficiency throughout the sub- region. • Identify how to secure resources and increase accessibility to existing GI assets and create or enhance new assets in those areas of deficiency. 2.13 The general provisions of the Sub-Regional GI Strategy are consistent with and complement related evidence-base studies produced for the District Council, such as the District Green Infrastructure Study, Landscape Sensitivity Study, Special Landscape Areas Study and the Sport, Open Space and Recreation Study. As such, the policies in the emerging Core Strategy on Landscape, Natural Environment and Green Infrastructure are consistent with provisions of the Sub-Regional GI Strategy. Furthermore, these policies will help to deliver certain recommendations in the Strategy.
Page 99 2.14 It has been suggested that the delivery and monitoring of the Strategy could be effectively managed through the creation of a Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Partnership comprising the constituent local authorities and organisations such as Natural England and the Warwickshire Wildlife Trust. 2.15 While detailed consideration needs to be given to the purposes of such a Partnership and how it would be established and operate, at this stage there would be merit in supporting the principle so that the concept can be assessed further by the various local authorities and agencies involved. 2.16 If the concept of a Green Infrastructure Partnership for the sub-region is taken forward, a further report will be brought to The Cabinet should it be apparent that any new expectations placed on the Council might not be met within existing resources.
3 Options available to The Cabinet 3.1 The following options are available to The Cabinet to consider: Option 1a: • To receive the Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Strategy as evidence to inform the Core Strategy. Option 1b: • To discount the Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Strategy as evidence to inform the Core Strategy. Option 2a: • To support the principle of the creation of a Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Partnership. Option 2b: • Not to support the principle of the creation of a Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Partnership.
4 Members’ Comments 4.1 Any comments received have been incorporated into the report.
5 Implications of the Proposal 5.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 5.1.1 At examination an Inspector will be obliged to consider whether the Council’s Core Strategy is sound and legally correct, i.e. (inter alia) that it is based on up-to-date and reliable evidence. The test of soundness is a statutory test under Section 20(5) of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004. 5.2 Financial 5.2.1 There has been no cost to the District Council in producing this Strategy apart from a small amount of officer time. Ongoing resource implications are similarly expected to be limited. 5.3 Environmental
Page 100 5.3.1 The provision and enhancement of Green Infrastructure assets will make a major contribution to the environmental character and quality of the District. 5.4 Corporate Strategy 5.4.1 The provision of certain Green Infrastructure features, eg. woodland planting, management of floodplains, plays a major role in minimising the impacts of climate change which is one of the four key aims of the Corporate Strategy. 5.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 5.5.1 Improving the accessibility to open spaces can benefit all sections of society.
6 Risk Assessment 6.1 Preparation of the Core Strategy requires robust and up-to-date evidence. It is important to make policy decisions that are supported by evidence from a reputable source, otherwise there is a significant risk that the Core Strategy would be found to be unsound at Examination in Public.
7 Conclusion 7.1 The Sub-Regional Green Infrastructure Strategy establishes a clear approach to enhancing GI assets relating to landscape, biodiversity and accessibility across the District. As such it provides a valuable basis for related policies in the Core Strategy and the implementation of GI projects through a range of agencies and mechanisms.
Paul Lankester CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Page 101 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 7 Appendix 1
WARWICKSHIRE, COVENTRY & SOLIHULL
SUB-REGIONAL GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE STRATEGY
Prepared by
Warwickshire Museum and Natural Environment
Page 103 Acknowledgements:
Coventry, Solihull and Warwickshire Association of Planning Officers (CSWAPO) would like to thank Natural England for the financial and officer support in preparing this document.
CSWAPO would also like to acknowledge the assistance from Landuse Consultants and Richard Drakely (WCC Tourism Officer) in preparing the Accessibility elements, Mike Murray for preparing the Landscape elements and Dave Lowe (WCC Principal Ecologist) for preparing the Biodiversity elements.
CSWAPO would also like to thank the support from the Local Authority Planning Officers and Local Authority discipline leads that formed the CSWAPO Project Officer Group, who steered the report over the 3 years of preparation.
1
Page 104 Contents
Vision ...... 3 Executive Summary ...... 3
INTRODUCTION ...... 5 Purpose ...... 5 Structure ...... 5 Framework ...... 5 Outputs and Outcomes ...... 6 Governance ...... 6
PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT ...... 7 What is Green Infrastructure? ...... 7 What are the benefits? ...... 7 Disciplines ...... 8 Typology ...... 9 Ecosystems Services ...... 10 Landscape...... 13 Vision ...... 13 Background ...... 13 International...... 13 National ...... 13 Sub-regional ...... 15 Local ...... 18 Biodiversity ...... 19 Vision ...... 19 Background ...... 19 International...... 19 National ...... 20 Sub-regional ...... 22 Accessibility ...... 26 Vision ...... 26 Background ...... 26 International...... 26 National ...... 27 Sub-regional ...... 28 Local ...... 29
PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 32 Landscape...... 32 Infrastructure Delivery Mechanisms ...... 37 Grants ...... 37 Local Planning Authority ...... 37 Other Land Management Systems ...... 38 Biodiversity ...... 39 Infrastructure Delivery Mechanism ...... 42 Grants ...... 43 Local Planning Authority ...... 43 Other Land Management Systems ...... 43 Accessibility ...... 45 Infrastructure Delivery Mechanism ...... 47 Grants ...... 47 Local Planning Authority ...... 47 Other Land Management Systems ...... 47
PART C – ASSETS & MAPS ...... 48 Landscape ...... 48 Biodiversity ...... 49 Accessibility ...... 50
2
Page 105
Vision A diverse and well-managed Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull Green Infrastructure network that underpins the quality of life for communities. This will be the result of a well- connected, accessible and biodiversity resilient landscape, supporting economic growth, social health and climate change adaptation.
Executive Summary ‘Green Infrastructure is a network of multifunctional greenspace, both new and existing, both rural and urban, which supports the natural and ecological processes and is integral to the health and quality of life of sustainable communities’.1
The purpose of this Strategy is to provide evidence for the preparation of plans, policies and strategies relating to Green Infrastructure (GI) at a sub-regional level and at a local level. It also details how GI can be delivered with the help from landholders and partners. . The strategy covers the disciplines of Landscape Biodiversity Accessibility
Figure 1 shows the extent of the sub-regional area of Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull that this Strategy covers.
Landscape The main strategic areas of opportunity for strengthening landscape character are identified in the Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines and are still relevant, including opportunities to demonstrate exemplary approaches to landscape conservation management. However, it is recommended that the Enhancement Zones be re-assessed to identify target areas for landscape restoration. In particular, planning and implementing substantial landscape frameworks, well in advance of major developments and transport infrastructure, can bring many benefits, including safeguarding and enhancing vital landscape assets, helping to create a sense of place for new development and retaining vital links with the past.
Biodiversity The strategy identifies sub-regional GI Biodiversity Assets and identifies Strategic Areas for delivering the Biodiversity Strategy’s aim to reconnect habitats throughout the sub-region. It makes the recommendation consistent with national policies and strategies to safeguard, enhance and create GI Biodiversity Assets to connect individual sub-regional GI Biodiversity assets together to form core areas creating large functional clusters of woodland, wetland and grassland habitats. After this has been scientifically demonstrated the next aim is to Connect the large functional areas together. However, this does not preclude the opportunity to create new areas that will be large enough to function independently.
Accessibility The Strategy uses the Natural England’s Accessible Natural Greenspace Standard criteria and the Woodland Access Standards to identify sub-regional GI Accessibility Assets. It
1 English Nature (2003) English Nature Report 526 ‘Accessible Natural Green Space Standards in Towns and Cities: A Review and Toolkit for Implementation’.
3
Page 106 recommends that areas of deficiency are identified so that new or existing features can be created or enhanced to meet the sub-regional needs.
Figure 1: Sub-regional area covered by the Green Infrastructure Strategy
4
Page 107 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Purpose The purpose of this Strategy is to provide evidence for the preparation of plans, policies and strategies relating to Green Infrastructure (GI) at a sub-regional level. It is to be available for adopting as a strategic mechanism to deliver GI enhancements across the partner authorities to meet national, sub-regional and local Green Infrastructure needs. However, there will be elements that can be applied at a local, parish and field level through partnership and landowner assistance. Structure
Green Infrastructure is dynamic, being subject to change from many influences: from land- use change to climate change; from political approaches and scientific modelling to identifying assets. It is therefore essential that this strategy has the flexibility to evolve. This evolution, however, must be evidence based and democratically approved within an accountable partnership.
To allow for this flexible approach the strategy will form three parts:
PART A - STRATEGIC CONTEXT This part will be ‘static’; providing the background and reasoning as to why sub-regional GI Assets are important.
PART B - ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS This part will be ‘semi-static’; detailing methods as to how sub-regional GI Assets have been identified and how models of delivery have been determined.
PART C - ASSETS and MAPS This part will be ‘living’; showing the location of sub-regional GI Assets as they are now and as they change over time.
Framework
The Strategy will broadly follow the ‘North West Green Infrastructure Guide2 (NWGIG) as a framework for its production and the monitoring of progress in delivering its objectives. The NWGIG identifies five basic steps to Green Infrastructure Planning:
STEP 1 - Partnerships and Priorities STEP 2 - Data Audit and Resource Mapping STEP 3 - Functional Assessment STEP 4 - Needs Assessment STEP 5 - Intervention Plan
More detail on this process is available at www.greeninfrastructurenw.co.uk. Further explanations of the above steps with tools, actions and methods that go towards the
2 North West Green Infrastructure Guide (NWGIGThink Tank, 2008)
Page 108 successful completion of these Steps, together with the progress made to complete them are found within Appendix 1.
Outputs and Outcomes
The desired outcome is a comprehensive, interactive and highly flexible evidence base, which can be used for a range of purposes:
A framework for the sustainable land management of the area; A tool for predicting the implications of change on the natural environment; Informing the sustainable management of the historic environment and the conservation and enhancement of heritage assets; An accurate picture of the green infrastructure of an area – essential in making planning decisions, informing developments and strategies; A tool for delivering the natural environmental contribution to identified priorities in the fields of health, economy and quality of life; A structured plan for delivering environmental change; Attracting funding by demonstrating researched needs and outcomes; Attracting inward investment; and Assisting priority setting for neighbouring authorities in areas of common interest.
Governance
Warwickshire County Council on behalf of Coventry, Solihull and Warwickshire Association of Planning Officers (CSWAPO) owns this document. The reporting of the strategy’s progress will be from the Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull Green Infrastructure Partnership (WCSGIP) as detailed in Appendix 1. This partnership will be a professional group of the WCS Local Nature Partnership with links to the Local Enterprise Partnerships.
Each of this strategy’s structural parts will require updating. Each may require different mechanisms to ensure all partners approve these changes and continue to work towards common goals.
Changes to PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT or PART B – ASSESSMENT and RECOMMENDATIONS: Any changes to these parts of the strategy will need to be initiated through the WCSGIP for subsequently approval by CSWAPO. If CSWAPO believe that the changes are of a material nature then this will trigger a full public and stakeholder consultation to be carried out in accordance with the County Council’s Statement of Community Involvement. The Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull Local Nature Partnership will then acknowledge the final changed document.
Changes to PART C – ASSETS & MAPS and ANNEXES: This part will be updated on a regular basis. These changes will not require any approval as they will be in the form of maps that show the location of any Green Infrastructure Assets as defined in Part B. Any queries relating to the evidence detailed on the maps are to be made to the WCSGIP.
6
Page 109 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
What is Green Infrastructure?
‘Green Infrastructure is a network of multifunctional greenspace, both new and existing, both rural and urban, which supports the natural and ecological processes and is integral to the health and quality of life of sustainable communities’.3
There are a number of definitions of Green Infrastructure, but they all promote the concept of multi-functionality, a holistic approach and the need to connect together different types of green space. Green Infrastructure considers both public and private assets in both a spatial dimension (for example areas or links/corridors) and also at a conceptual/thematic level (for example sustainable living, as individual elements within sites such as trees and their contribution to shading and cooling, and as part of wildlife corridors). The multifunctional character of GI means that it also incorporates all of the following:
Cultural as well as landscape and ecological assets/habitats; Concepts such as sustainable water and resource management; Use of river and canal corridors and floodplains for amenity greenspace and biodiversity; Positive benefits to human health and mental wellbeing Positive benefits to supporting economic growth; and sustainable travel modes including walking and cycling.
At a more holistic level it is seen as part of the life-support systems of an area; providing ‘ecosystem services’.
What are the benefits?
The benefits of Green Infrastructure are wide ranging and relate to the principles of sustainable development, including economic growth. One of the key challenges will be to ensure that Green Infrastructure can penetrate and impact upon all planning and land management decision-making processes. By planning, implementing and managing Green Infrastructure at the strategic landscape scale, it is possible to deliver a range of benefits, often in combination:
Environmental Benefits: reinforce and enhance landscape character, local distinctiveness and aesthetic qualities; safeguard and enhance natural (including soils) and historic assets; provide the context for a living, working landscape and associated land management; improve environmental quality, e.g. better air and water quality, local adaptation to climate change, noise and light pollution; contribute to sustainable drainage and flood mitigation; provide an opportunity to protect, recreate and rehabilitate landscapes and habitats damaged or lost by previous development or agricultural change; and
3 English Nature (2003) English Nature Report 526 ‘Accessible Natural Green Space Standards in Towns and Cities: A Review and Toolkit for Implementation’ and National Planning Policy Framework (2012)
7
Page 110 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
help maintain and enhance biodiversity, reversing habitat fragmentation and increasing biodiversity to restore functioning ecosystems that underpin a rich wildlife resource.
Social Benefits: help establish local identity and a sense of place; promote a sense of community, providing the essential contact between people and the aesthetic and spiritual qualities of landscapes and nature; develop a multi-functional landscape resource that meets local needs and aspirations, and provide opportunities for community involvement; improve health and well-being, including increased physical activity such as walking and cycling, and opportunities for quiet contemplation; provide community resources for learning and training, creating a focus for social inclusion and environmental education; and inspire cohesive partnership working across a range of disciplines and sectors.
Economic Benefits: provide an enhanced environmental setting that will assist in attracting business and inward investment, as part of a narrative for growth and retaining people; promote employment in the environmental sector; enhance the potential for investment in tourism; improve and sustain land and property values; reduce land management costs; reduce sickness absence; and Increase business productivity and staff retention.
From a ‘Strategic Enhancement Working Agricultural Landscape’ perspective our landscapes have been almost entirely created by man. They are dynamic, working landscapes, and can only be sustained by appropriate, positive management which is best delivered by viable agricultural, forestry and rural businesses, especially those that are responsible for the sustainable appearance of the landscape – primarily, land owners and land managers. The rural economy of our landscapes is multifunctional, diverse, and dynamic, and is no less subject to change than urban society. The rural economy of our landscapes requires development to modernize as does any modern business in this country.
Our landscapes and the businesses that produce them need to evolve to be able to adapt to new challenges such as climate change or the current global financial crisis. Not only does the world need to develop alternative mechanisms to produce energy to which the contribution of renewals is vitally important, but in addition, the countryside will provide the mechanism by which our valued flora and fauna species will be able to migrate to new habitats. Land managers will also need to adapt their businesses to cope with new species and diseases that could have a detrimental effect on the output of ecosystem services. In terms of financial markets, businesses need to be resilient to changes in market forces; these challenges need to be acknowledged with the delivery of this strategy Disciplines For the purpose of identifying assets this strategy has sub-divided Green Infrastructure into three disciplines:
Landscape Biodiversity Accessibility
8
Page 111 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Typology The Draft Planning Guidance Green Infrastructure for Biodiversity4 (ALGE, 2012) has produced a typology list of Green Infrastructure assets. Table 1 shows these typologies and their associations with the three disciplines covered by this strategy.
Table 1: Typology of Green Infrastructure Assets and their Discipline Association
Typology
Landscape Biodiversity Accessibility Natural and semi-natural rural, peri-urban and urban green spaces, including: woodland and scrub, grassland (for example downland and meadow), heath and moor, wetlands, open and running water, ++ ++ + brownfield sites, bare rock habitats (for example cliffs and quarries), coasts, beaches, ancient trees and community forests. Parks and gardens – urban parks, country and regional parks, formal and private formal gardens, and institutional grounds (for ++ ++ ++ example schools and hospitals). Amenity green space – informal recreation spaces, play areas, outdoor sport facilities, housing green spaces, domestic gardens, roof gardens, village greens, urban commons, other incidental + + ++ space, green roofs, hedges and trees, community woodland, civic squares and spaces, and highway trees and verges. Allotments, city farms, orchards and urban edge farmland. ++ ++ ++ Cemeteries and churchyards. ++ + ++ Green corridors – rivers and canals including their banks, road and rail corridors, cycling routes and rights of way. ++ ++ ++ Existing national and local nature reserves and locally designated sites for nature conservations (for example Local Wildlife Sites etc). ++ ++ + Archaeological and historic sites. ++ + + Functional green space such as sustainable urban drainage schemes and flood storage areas. ++ ++ + Built structures – bird and bat nesting, roost sites attached to existing and new build developments. + ++ o
Key ++ Strong association + Relevant association o No association
4 Draft Planning Guidance – Green Infrastructure for Biodiversity was produced by the Association of Local Government Ecologist, February 2012. 9
Page 112 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Ecosystems Services
Ecosystem services are the benefits that people obtain from ecosystems. These include: provisioning services such as food and water; regulating services such as flood and disease control; cultural services such as spiritual, recreational, and cultural benefits; and supporting services such as nutrient cycling that maintain the conditions for life on earth.
The National Ecosystem Assessment5 (UNEP-WCMC, 2011) illustrated various processes, their services, goods/benefits and their values in Figure 2 below. Figure 2 depicts ecosystem services associated with broad habitat types. It attempts to illustrate how habitats play an important role in our environmental, social and economic well-being.
Figure 2: Set of processes, services, good/benefits used in the UK National Ecosystem Assessment6
5 UK National Ecosystem Assessment Secretariat is based at United Nations Environment Programme World Conservation Monitoring Centre (UNEP-WCMC) in Cambridge. 6 http://uknea.unep-wcmc.org/Resources/tabid/82/Default.aspx 10
Page 113 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Figure 3: Eight Broad Habitats assessed in the UK National Ecosystem Assessment
In accordance with the Millennium Ecosystem Service categories, there are five potential functions performed by GI. This categorisation enables the sub-regional GI assets available in different parts of the sub-region to be compared against potential functions to help establish where functional deficiencies might exist.
11
Page 114 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Table 2: GI Functions and Links to Categories of Ecosystem Services
Ecosystem Service Categories
(Millennium Assessment)
Examples of relevant GIS
Regulating Cultural Supporting Functions performed by GI datasets Provisioning Habitat provision and Nature conservation access to nature designations, biodiversity records, local biodiversity data, Biodiversity Action Plans Vulnerability mapping, flood Sustainable resource risk mapping, UKCIP data, management and climate Water Framework Directive change adaptation datasets Productive landscapes Natural England HLS target areas, allotments, orchards,
Agricultural Land Classification Landscape setting and Landscape character context including historic assessments, historic environment landscape character,
cultural heritage designations, tranquillity and intrusion maps Access, recreation and Infrastructure, green space movement (NPPF assessment of open spaces), ANGSt analysis,
local green space provision standards, Public Rights of Way, Cycle Network
Represents an association between the Function performed by GI and the Ecosystem Service Category.
The evaluation of ecosystem services within the sub-region is being evaluated and may form an addition to this strategy in the future.
12
Page 115 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Landscape
Vision “The integration of development and modern land management into the landscape, especially in areas with strong landscape character, in order to ensure that the beauty and diversity of the sub-region is conserved for present and future generations to enjoy.”
Background In its narrowest sense, landscape simply means the appearance of land. However, strategic landscapes and Green Infrastructure are not just concerned with the visual appearance of the landscape, its qualities of shape, form and colour, but, more particularly, with the way in which the various components come together to create different landscapes. Where these components occur in a distinct and consistent pattern, they give character to the landscape.
A strategic and integrated approach to landscape conservation and enhancement would benefit the whole community and repair, to some degree, the damage caused to our landscapes in the recent and not so recent past. Such an approach also has the potential to inspire a community effort in the widest sense, with everyone having a valuable part to play.
As yet, there is no consensus about what a given landscape should look like in the future and to what extent this should draw upon the past. Denton-Thompson (2009) considered that “whilst we accept that we have the power to transform landscapes by intent or as a bi- product of other drivers of change ... we still do not have a clear vision for the multi- functional landscape that future generations will require”(Denton-Thompson, M. (2009), An Emerging Imperative, Landscape, March 2009, p. 8-11). GI has considerable potential to help address this question and Green Infrastructure can contribute to the management, conservation and improvement of strategic and local landscapes. It should be designed and managed as a multi-functional resource, capable of providing the landscape, ecological services and quality of life benefits that are needed to underpin sustainability. Its design and management should also protect and enhance the character and distinctiveness of an area with regards to habitats and landscape types.
International The European Landscape Convention (ELC) defines Landscape as: “an area, as perceived by people, whose character is the result of the action and interaction of natural and/or human factors.”
The European Landscape Convention introduced a Europe-wide concept centring on the quality of landscape protection, management and planning and covering the entire territory, not just outstanding landscapes. Through its ground-breaking approach and its broader scope, it complements the Council of Europe’s and UNESCO’s heritage conventions.
National In 2005 the Countryside Agency produced a map, dividing England into areas with similar landscape character, which were called National Character Areas (NCAs7). This map
7 At the time of writing the National Character Areas are being revised by Natural England; published ones being Arden, Severn & Avon Vales, Cotswolds and Mease Sence Lowlands 13
Page 116 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT subdivides England into 159 NCAs, providing a picture of the differences in landscape character at the national scale.
Character descriptions for each of the NCAs were produced and published in regional volumes to highlight the influences determining the character of the landscape, such as land cover, buildings and settlements. The descriptions can be found on the Natural England website8. Each of the regional groupings breaks down into a longer list of NCAs sitting within each of the regional areas.
The NCAs are now a widely recognised national spatial framework, used for a range of applications. Examples include the targeting of Natural England's Environmental Stewardship scheme and the Countryside Quality Counts project. It is important to remember that the boundaries of the NCAs are not precise and that many of the boundaries should be considered as broad zones of transition. NCAs form part of the data gathered for a Landscape Character Assessment (LCA). LCAs provide more detailed descriptions at a local level within NCAs. Figure 4 below shows the NCAs for the sub-regional area covered by this Strategy.
Figure 4: Natural England - Sub-regional National Character Area Map
8 National Character Area – West Midlands 14
Page 117 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Sub-regional In 1987, a three year pilot project was initiated by the Countryside Commission (now Natural England) with Warwickshire County Council, “to consider the unique and distinctive landscapes of Warwickshire, and to develop a new methodology for landscape assessment tailored to the needs of lowland England.” This methodology was subsequently described in some detail in the Countryside Commission’s publication: Assessment and Conservation of Landscape Character – The Warwickshire Landscapes Project Approach (CCP 332). The project carried out a systematic landscape assessment within the old geographical area of Warwickshire, including the countryside in and around Coventry and Solihull. After extensive consultation with all the major agencies and local authorities having an influence on the countryside, the Warwickshire Landscapes Project published the first of its studies in 1990. This was subsequently revised and republished in 1993, entitled Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines – Arden. These guidelines became the accepted model by the Countryside Commission for assessing the character of lowland landscapes within England.
The study represented the first comprehensive and systematic assessment of the historic Arden landscape, extending from Alcester in the south to Atherstone in the north, and including most of Coventry and Solihull. The Guidelines described Arden’s special landscape character, assessed pressures affecting it and put forward management strategies and guidelines to conserve, restore and enhance its appearance. It embraced the interests of landowners, farmers, foresters, planners, river and highway engineers and conservationists, to take in the whole spectrum of countryside activity.
Subsequent Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines were prepared to cover the landscapes of the Avon Valley, Feldon, Cotswolds, Dunsmore, High Cross Plateau and Mease Lowlands. Coventry City Council also published complementary ‘Design Guidelines for Development in Coventry’s Ancient Arden’ in 1995, which is Supplementary Planning Guidance.
The Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines were originally produced in the early to mid-1990s by Warwickshire County Council and revised in the light of the information produced by the regional mapping of the Midlands. These Guidelines have proved an invaluable planning and land management tool, in helping to ensure that the diversity and beauty of the Warwickshire landscapes are conserved for present and future generations to enjoy. Although the system of landscape assessment is an evolving science, more recent studies9 have demonstrated that these Guidelines remain highly relevant today, and particularly in the context of Green Infrastructure.
The diverse landscapes throughout Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull, as identified in the Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines, are particularly valued for their scenic qualities, rich wildlife and cultural associations, and are fundamental to the intrinsic character and local distinctiveness of the area. These landscapes are also an essential part of the narrative for delivering environmental, social and economic objectives.
The Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines divide the county into seven broad regional character areas, outlined below. However, only four of these - Arden, Dunsmore, Avon Valley and Feldon - can truly be described as strategic Warwickshire landscapes. The others show characteristics more typically associated with surrounding counties. This is especially true of the Cotswolds, the Ironstone Wolds and the High Cross Plateau. Nevertheless, they form a distinct upland fringe along the southern and eastern edge of the county. Similarly, Mease Lowlands is another marginal Warwickshire region. A summary of the seven broad regional landscape character areas (show in Figure 5) are:
9 Recent landscape studies include: Stratford-on-Avon District Landscape Sensitivity Assessment, White Consultants (July 2011) and Nuneaton and Bedworth Borough Council Landscape Character Assessment, Entec (September 2004). 15
Page 118 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
1. Arden – an historic region of former wood pasture and heath characterised by a dispersed settlement pattern, Ancient Woodlands and mature hedgerow oaks. 2. Dunsmore – a well wooded, and in places urbanised, region characterised by low glacial plateaus, sandy soils and remnant heathy vegetation. 3. Avon Valley – a prosperous agricultural and market gardening region closely associated with the river Avon and characterised by historic market towns, nucleated villages and orchards. 4. Feldon – a lowland agricultural region strongly influenced by Tudor and later parliamentary enclosures and characterised by heavy clay soils, large geometric fields and a nucleated settlement pattern of small rural villages. 5. Cotswolds – a sparsely populated region of limestone and ironstone uplands characterised by open wolds, large walled fields and distinctive stone villages. 6. High Cross Plateau – a rural agricultural region characterised by open clay wolds and small nucleated villages. 7. Mease Lowlands – a rural agricultural region of large country estates and small nucleated villages characterised by tall church spires.
Figure 5: Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines10
10 Diagram taken from the Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines series, published by Warwickshire County Coucnil Planning & Transport Department, 1993 16
Page 119 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
At a county level, the Landscape Character Assessments identify and describe the seven generic Landscape Character Types. Detailed descriptions assess the character of each type in terms of its key characteristics. The positive features of key significance, strength of character and condition of each Landscape Character Type are evaluated, leading to identification of a landscape strategy and management guidelines for landscape renewal.
Also at a county level, the Warwickshire Historic Landscape Characterisation Project, better known as HLC11, is part of an ongoing national programme funded by English Heritage that aims to digitally map the present day historic character of the English landscape on a county-by-county basis to inform its management, conservation and understanding at local, county, regional and national levels. HLC looks at the whole landscape from the present day back to the medieval period and characterises areas into a number of standard types such as fields, settlement and designed landscapes. Detailed information about the historic character of each mapped area and its development over time is recorded in a linked database.
11 A report with more information about the project including detailed analysis of the results together with maps and photographs is available online at: http://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/hlc
17
Page 120 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Local Districts and Borough have produced local landscape studies that refresh and update the Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines. Where these have been produced they are important documents that must be taken into consideration during decision making.
18
Page 121 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Biodiversity
Vision A Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull where wildlife thrives alongside humans within a resilient landscape; where land and buildings are managed positively for biodiversity, and where biodiversity enhancements are embedded into development, contributing to the extension and joining up of existing biodiversity assets.
Background Biodiversity describes the variety of life on Earth, encompassing the whole of the natural world and all living things with which we share the planet.
International Biodiversity is being unsustainably lost on a global, national and local scale. Figure 6 below shows the nine planetary boundaries that have been proposed which, if respected, would likely ensure that the Earth remains sustainable for human life. It is estimated that three of the boundaries – those for climate change, the nitrogen cycle and biodiversity loss – have already been transgressed while we are approaching transgression of several others12.
Figure 6: Planetary Boundaries (Rockström, J et al, 2009)
Climate change Chemical pollution Ocean (not yet quantified) acidification
Atmospheric Stratospheric aerosol loading ozone depletion (not yet quantified)
Nitrogen Rate of cycle biodiversity loss Phosphorous cycle
Land system change Global freshwater use
12 The Anthropocene: From Global Change to Planetary Stewardship, Will Steffen, A ° sa Persson, Lisa Deutsch, Jan Zalasiewicz, Mark Williams, Katherine Richardson, Carole Crumley, Paul Crutzen, Carl Folke, Line Gordon, Mario Molina, Veerabhadran Ramanathan, Johan Rockstro¨m, Marten Scheffer, Hans Joachim Schellnhuber, Uno Svedin 19
Page 122 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
In layman’s terms the unprecedented extinction rates the planet is currently experiencing and the relationship between this and human influences. Figure 6 illustrates the rate of biodiversity loss if left to natural safeguarding processes. Scientifically, it illustrates the estimate of quantitative evolution of control variables for seven planetary boundaries, from preindustrial levels to the present. The inner (green) shaded nonagon represents the safe operating space with proposed boundary levels at its outer contour. The extent of the wedges for each boundary shows the estimate of current position of the control variable. Points show the estimated recent time trajectory (1950–present) of each control variable. For biodiversity loss, the estimated current boundary level of >100 extinctions per million species-years exceeds the space available in the figure13.
At the tenth meeting of the Conference of the Parties, held from 18 to 29 October 2010 in Nagoya, Aichi Prefecture, Japan, a revised and updated Strategic Plan was adopted for Biodiversity, including the Aichi Biodiversity Targets14 for the 2011-2020 period. This new plan will be the overarching framework on biodiversity, not only for the biodiversity-related conventions, but for the entire United Nations system. The tenth meeting of the Conference of the Parties agreed to translate this overarching international framework into national biodiversity strategies and action plans within two years.
Additionally, the meeting decided that the fifth national reports, due by 31 March 2014, should focus on the implementation of the 2011-2020 Strategic Plan and progress achieved towards the Aichi Biodiversity Targets. These targets are outlined below.
Strategic Goal A: Address the underlying causes of biodiversity loss by mainstreaming biodiversity across government and society.
Strategic Goal B: Reduce the direct pressures on biodiversity and promote sustainable use.
Strategic Goal C: To improve the status of biodiversity by safeguarding ecosystems, species and genetic diversity.
Strategic Goal D: Enhance the benefits to all from biodiversity and ecosystem services.
Strategic Goal E: Enhance implementation through participatory planning, knowledge management and capacity building.
The EU biodiversity strategy to 2020 has a vision that “By 2050, European Union biodiversity and the ecosystem services it provides — its natural capital — are protected, valued and appropriately restored for biodiversity's intrinsic value and for their essential contribution to human wellbeing and economic prosperity, and so that catastrophic changes caused by the loss of biodiversity are avoided.” This includes a 2020 headline target of “Halting the loss of biodiversity and the degradation of ecosystem services in the EU by 2020, and restoring them in so far as feasible, while stepping up the EU contribution to averting global biodiversity loss.”
National Nationally, the 2020 mission for The England Biodiversity Strategy (Defra 2011) is “to halt overall biodiversity loss, support healthy well-functioning ecosystems and establish coherent ecological networks, with more and better places for nature for the benefit of wildlife and people.”
13 Planetary Boundaries: Exploring the Safe Operating Space for Humanity, Rockström, J. et al, 2009 14 Aichi Biodiversity Targets: http://www.cbd.int/sp/ and http://www.cbd.int/sp/targets 20
Page 123 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
The “fragmentation of natural environments is driving continuing threats to biodiversity. The previous global target to reduce significantly the rate of loss of biodiversity by 2010 was not met. In England, species and habitats are still declining. In 2008, for example, 18 out of 42 priority habitats and 120 out of 390 priority species were in decline” (Natural Environment White Paper, Defra, 2012).
The National Ecosystem Assessment recorded a significant loss in many areas of the UK habitats. The findings have been summarised below.
Summary of the status and trends of the UK’s ecosystems and the services that they provide to society (taken from the National Ecosystem Assessment):
The landscape of the UK has changed markedly during the last 60 years with the expansion of Enclosed Farmlands, Woodlands and Urban areas, and the contraction and fragmentation of Semi-natural Grasslands, upland and lowland Heaths, Freshwaters wetlands and Coastal Margin habitats. Changes in the extent and condition of habitats have significantly altered the ecosystem services they provide. Within Enclosed Farmland, crop and livestock production has increased significantly, but accompanied by a loss of landscape diversity, an increase in soil erosion and reduced soil quality, and a reduction in farmland birds and pollinators, in particular However, there have been a number of recent improvements, including a reduction in greenhouse gas emissions, due to both reduced fertiliser application and lower livestock numbers, and improved chemical quality of water. The expansion of Woodlands has contributed to both improved climate regulation, through greater carbon sequestration, and air quality, while at the same time increased timber supply. More recent changes in forest policy and woodland management have enhanced general amenity value and wild species diversity. Expansion of Urban areas has degraded regulating services for climate, hazards, soil and water quality, and noise. Fragmentation and deterioration of wetlands, and in particular the separation of rivers from their floodplains, has compromised hazard (flood) regulation and many other ecosystem services. Across all habitats apparent reductions in soil quality and continuing declines in the diversity of many wild species, including the variety and abundance of pollinators, is of particular concern.
The impacts of the above trends on the Ecosystem Services and their associated habitats at the UK-wide scale since 1990 is illustrated in Figure 7. Full details of the methodology involved in quantifying the impacts can be found in the National Ecosystem Assessment technical report15.
15 http://uknea.unep-wcmc.org/Resources/tabid/82/Default.aspx 21
Page 124 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Figure 7: National Ecosystem Services trends since 1990
Sub-regional In terms of species and habitats at the local level, there have been winners and losers. The 2010 Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) progress is illustrated in Table 3. This is based on the results of reporting on targets and actions by the LBAP partnership between 2008 and 2010 (Action Plans are reported on in a three year cycle and the ‘Year’ column relates to the last reporting period for that plan).
22
Page 125 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Table 3: Local Biodiversity Action Plan Report 2007 - 2010
A green, upward arrow indicates that positive progress has been made towards achieving the targets set out within the Local Biodiversity Action Plan for that species or habitat. Two horizontal orange arrows indicate that no progress has been made, but there has been no loss to that species/habitat either. A downward red arrow indicates that the species/habitat has suffered a loss, therefore there has been negative progress towards achieving the LBAP targets.
Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull
Table 8 below illustrates the distribution of habitats within the sub-region, suggesting that the county is primarily composed of arable land and improved grassland, which dominate the county at 49% and 29% of the county’s area respectively. This is followed by woodland at 8%, of which broadleaved comprises 6%, and then neutral grassland at 4%. It is interesting to note that amenity grassland covers 4% of Warwickshire, although this does include golf courses. The low percentage of woodland habitat cover within the county is of particular concern, as Warwickshire is well known for its Forest of Arden landscape.
23
Page 126 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Table 8 – Percentage of each Phase 1 Habitat within the sub-region16
Habitat Type %age Habitat Type %age Broad-leaved semi-natural woodland 3.12 Continuous bracken 0.04 Broad-leaved semi-natural plantation 2.41 Tall ruderal 0.47 Coniferous semi-natural woodland 0.00 Other tall herb and fern - non ruderal 0.00 Coniferous plantation 0.71 Dry heath/acid grassland mosaic 0.00 Mixed semi-natural woodland 0.03 Sphagnum bog 0.00 Mixed plantation 0.76 Acid/neutral flush 0.00 Dense/continuous scrub 0.83 Basin mire 0.00 Scattered scrub 0.24 Swamp 0.07 Parkland/scattered broad-leaved trees 0.17 Inundation vegetation 0.00 Parkland/scattered coniferous trees 0.01 Standing water 1.01 Recently felled woodland 0.01 Running water 0.39 Orchard 0.08 Quarry 0.29 Unimproved acid grassland 0.00 Spoil 0.01 Semi-improved acid grassland 0.04 Refuse-tip 0.07 Unimproved neutral grassland 0.10 Arable 49.00 Semi-improved neutral grassland 3.58 Allotments 0.18 Unimproved calcareous grassland 0.02 Arable field margins 0.67 Semi-improved calcareous grassland 0.04 Amenity grassland 4.23 Improved grassland 28.66 Ephemeral/short perennial 0.07 Marsh/marshy grassland 0.22 Introduced shrub 0.01 Poor semi-improved grassland 2.12 Bare ground 0.32
Local North Warwickshire North Warwickshire has just less than half of the sub-region’s acid grassland and dry heath and acid grassland mosaic habitat types plus significant areas of marsh/marshy grassland and inundation grassland, both of which are vulnerable habitats. These are probably associated with the River Tame and Anker corridors, which correspondingly may be the reason for North Warwickshire having a large proportion of the sub-region’s open water habitat resulting from mineral extraction.
Nuneaton & Bedworth Borough Nuneaton & Bedworth Borough has an underlying geological hard rock lending itself to deep quarrying activities. These habitats, which include rock exposure, short-ephemeral vegetation and scrub, can be particularly important for invertebrates such as butterflies and insects.
Rugby Borough Rugby Borough has no significantly high percentage of any of the sub-region’s habitat types. However, it does have a range of agricultural habitats, which include a significant amount of the sub-region’s arable land and improved grassland. It also contains relatively high proportions of neutral grassland and poor semi-improved grassland.
Warwick District Warwick District contains a relatively large proportion of the sub-region’s woodland. This is consistent with the Forest of Arden Landscape Character, which is associated with the west of Warwickshire. However, the Habitat Biodiversity Audit (HBA) does not report on the management of this woodland, therefore the quality of this habitat is unknown. Aside from woodland, this area has a similar agricultural landscape to Rugby.
16 State of the Environment report, Habitat Biodiversity Audit, 2012 (in preparation) 24
Page 127 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Stratford District Stratford District has almost all of the sub-region’s calcareous grassland plus a large proportion of the sub-region’s neutral grassland. Stratford also holds the majority of the sub- region’s traditional orchard habitat, which is a valuable and vulnerable habitat.
Coventry Coventry is mainly a built environment habitat. The remaining primary habitats are mostly composed of amenity grassland land and improved grassland, which dominate the city. This is followed by arable land, then neutral grassland, then broadleaved. The district also contains a moderate amount of scrub habitat, which can be particularly important for a range of wildlife including birds and invertebrates such as butterflies and insects. Woodland habitats appear to be increasing through scrub or planting schemes such as community woodlands, allotments and parkland. Species-rich grassland of acid, neutral and marshy is declining. These are important habitat types for wildlife with both local and national targets to reduce this loss. Improved grassland is also declining. The only grassland type increasing is poor semi-improved. This habitat type is often the result of either unmanaged species-rich and improved grassland, potentially inferring that less grassland management is being carried out within Coventry than in other areas.
Solihull Solihull district is also fairly urbanised, but has a greater proportion of rural habitats than Coventry. Arable, amenity grassland and improved grassland are the dominant habitats, followed by semi-natural neutral grassland. The district also has a relatively large area of broad-leaved woodland for its size, which correlates with its position within the Arden Landscape Character Area.
25
Page 128 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Accessibility
Vision An accessible Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull landscape where residents, workers and visitors can responsibly enjoy the natural world, be it in an urban or rural setting.
Background The Coventry, Solihull and Warwickshire area contains attractive and distinctive landscapes with several significant visitor attractions and areas of historic importance, including Shakespeare’s Stratford-upon-Avon, Warwick and Kenilworth Castles and the Cotswolds Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty. This landscape is accessible to both people who live in the area as well as those visiting from outside through a number of ways:
Paths – e.g. Public Rights of Way and canal towpaths; Estates – e.g. Country Parks and publicly accessible estates; and Open Spaces – e.g. Parks and Gardens, village and urban greens and accessible Nature Reserves.
Visitors to the sub-region are primarily drawn by the appeal of our history and heritage. However, access to Green Infrastructure, including our network of canals, country parks, cycling and walking trails etc., broadens the visitor offer to encourage longer stays and more opportunities to spread the economic benefits of tourism to more communities. Our Green Infrastructure and connections with our natural landscapes also help to reinforce what is special and distinctive about the place.
At a strategic level, the visitor economy has been recognised by the Government as one of a number of priority sectors able to bring about a step change in our economy and employment prospects. The visitor economy has a number of clear strengths, assets and opportunities that can be targeted and better utilised to help stimulate and strengthen future economic growth. Tourism provides jobs, brings new facilities to communities and contributes to positive perceptions of our area as a great place to visit, work, study, live and invest.
In supporting the growth agenda, it is essential that we continue to conserve the sub-region’s distinct sense of place in the form of its landscape heritage, historic environment and Green Infrastructure, and the opportunities that these provide to grow tourism locally.
As well as tourism, Green Infrastructure improves accessibility to greenspace for local residents, and helps to enhance quality of life within the sub-region and make this an attractive place to live.
International There are sites within Warwickshire Coventry and Solihull that have international appeal as visitor destinations. No direct references to these locations have been found within European or wider strategies. However, this strategy recognises that Stratford-on-Avon, with its association to Shakespeare, and Warwick Castle are both sufficiently significant to be considered as international sites.
26
Page 129 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
National The Government has produced a Tourism Policy Summary of Approach17, which seeks to outline in a single document an approach to Tourism on behalf of Government departments across Whitehall. It has a focus on domestic and inbound policies and activities. This builds on the Government’s position to prioritise Tourism as a growth industry in this Parliament. Relevant Goals and Policies for Green Infrastructure include:
Increase the proportion of UK residents who holiday in the UK to match those who holiday abroad each year. Improve skills and productivity to make the UK’s visitor economy one of the most competitive in the world, while reducing red tape so that UK tourism businesses can flourish.
There are a number of more specific goals relating to domestic tourism and inbound tourism. These can be found by following the link in footnote 15 below.
The Strategic Framework for Tourism in England 2010 - 202018 (British Tourist Authority (trading as VisitEngland) June 2011) has a vision ‘To maximise tourism's contribution to the economy, employment and quality of life in England’. It aims to deliver these through associated Action Plans19 produced after extensive consultation and collaboration with England's tourism industry. It sets out the ways in which the industry can work together to achieve a 5% growth in value, year-on-year, over the next decade. This will lead to an additional £50bn in expenditure and the creation of 225,000 jobs. The Strategic Framework aims to achieve four interdependent objectives, which are designed to address the opportunities and challenges for England's visitor economy;
Objective 01 - To increase England's share of global visitor markets. Objective 02 - To offer visitors compelling destinations of distinction. Objective 03 - To champion a successful, thriving tourism industry. Objective 04 - To facilitate greater engagement between the visitor and the experience.
There are also a number of relevant national documents that emphasise the importance of accessibility to greenspace for local residents as well as for visitors to the area:
The National Planning Policy Framework states that Planning policies should protect and enhance public rights of way and access. Local authorities should seek opportunities to provide better facilities for users, for example by adding links to existing rights of way networks including National Trails.
The Countryside and Rights of Way Act 2000 (the CROW Act), through section 60, places a duty on highway authorities to publish a plan which considers local rights of way (defined as including cycletracks but excluding footways).
Natural England have produced ‘Nature Nearby’ Accessible Natural Greenspace Guidance20 aimed at parks and greenspace practitioners and their partners. The guidance proposes the adoption of three key standards by greenspace professionals that will deliver high quality and inspiring visitor experiences in local green spaces, to connect people with the natural environment. The standards include the Accessible Natural Greenspace Standard (ANGSt).
17 http://www.culture.gov.uk/images/publications/Government2_Tourism_Policy_2011.pdf 18 http://www.visitengland.org/Images/Strategic%20Framework%20main%20document_tcm30-33240.pdf 19 http://www.visitengland.org/strategicframework/actionplans/Index.aspx 20 http://publications.naturalengland.org.uk/publication/40004?category=47004 27
Page 130 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
ANGSt was developed in the early 1990s and is based on research into minimum distances people would travel to the natural environment. ANGSt recommends that everyone, wherever they live, should have accessible natural greenspace:
of at least 2 hectares in size, no more than 300 metres (5 minutes walk) from home;
at least one accessible 20 hectare site within two kilometres of home;
at least one accessible 100 hectare site within five kilometres of home; and
at least one accessible 500 hectare site within ten kilometres of home; plus
a minimum of one hectare of statutory Local Nature Reserves per thousand population.
ANGSt can act as a powerful tool in assessing current levels of accessible natural greenspace, and planning for better provision, helping to achieve the Green Infrastructure Strategy’s aims of improving access to and connectivity with greenspaces.
The Woodlands Trust believe that in terms of provision of natural greenspace, woods should be seen as the optimal habitat and that a separate standard for woodland, which should complement the Accessible Natural Greenspace Standard (ANGSt) (Woodland Trust, Space for People, 2010).
The newly formed Canal and Rivers Trust has also produced its strategic priorities in the 2012 Shaping Our Future document21. One of the key priorities is:
Ensuring our canals and rivers are open, accessible and safe.
Green Infrastructure planning also has strong links with the national health agenda, as ready access to greenspaces is proven to improve people’s mental well-being22. The Local Government’s Information Unit’s 2012 ‘Measuring National Well-being – Where We Live’23 study shows that access to greenspace was identified as having a significant bearing on well-being, with over 9 in 10 adults believing it to be important to have local green spaces nearby.
This link is addressed by the Town and Country Planning Association in their 2012 ‘Reuniting health with planning: healthier homes, healthier communities’ document24. This document aims to support the aims held within the 2012 National Planning Policy Framework25 regarding supporting healthy communities through the planning process.
Sub-regional The ‘Visitor Economy Strategy (2005 -2009)26 for Warwickshire and Coventry has the following Green Infrastructure related Strategic Priorities:
Destination Health Check o Work with Heart of England Tourism to establish the procedure for destination health checks, and then pilot these in the sub-region starting with Stratford, which is an international cultural icon. Impressive Infrastructure
21 http://canalrivertrust.org.uk/media/library/1442.pdf 22 http://www.mind.org.uk/assets/0000/2138/ecotherapy_report.pdf 23 http://www.ons.gov.uk/ons/rel/wellbeing/measuring-national-well-being/where-we-live/art-where-we-live.html 24 http://www.tcpa.org.uk/data/files/TCPA_FINAL_Reuniting-health-planning.pdf 25 http://www.communities.gov.uk/planningandbuilding/planningsystem/planningpolicy/planningpolicyframework/ 26 This strategy is currently being updated 28
Page 131 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
o Develop Stratford’s Tourist Information Centre (TIC) to be a regional flagship, fulfilling its role as a gateway to the region. o Take a partnership approach to the development of a Destination Management System (DMS) for the sub-region. Effective Delivery o Support the Visitor Economy Forum to develop a strategic approach to tourism infrastructure. o Investigate how the whole sub-region can engage with Destination Management Plans. o Commission reliable and consistent research and data across the sub-region to monitor the health of the visitor economy and effectiveness of the strategy.
There are also a number of national documents which relate to the rights of way and recreational highway network. These include:
Rights of Way Improvement Plans (ROWIP) - Statutory Guidance to Local Highway Authorities in England (Defra Nov 2002); Guidance on Local Transport Plans (LTPs) and the Natural Environment (Natural England 2009); LTP and ROWIP Integration (Natural England 2009); Guidance on LTPs (DfT 2009); Handbook for Local Access Forum members (published March 2008)27 Guidance issued by Natural England; The Local Access Forums (England) Regulations 200728 - these are the regulations which set out the framework within which the Forum must operate; and Guidance on Local Access Forums in England (published February 2007)29 - this is the guidance issued to authorities by DEFRA.
All of the above documents are to be delivered at a local level (see below). However, in 2002 Warwickshire, Solihull and Coventry authorities agreed to set up a joint Local Access Forum30, or 'LAF', in response to a new duty introduced by the Countryside and Rights of Way Act 2000. The membership of the LAF includes a Councillor from each of the three authorities (upper tier or unitary), as well as individuals representing various interests from across the three authority areas.
Local Warwickshire County Council has produced a Rights of Way and Recreational Highway Strategy 2011-2026 that covers:
all rights of way; cycle routes where they are part of the rights of way network; and unclassified county roads, which are managed in a similar way to the rights of way network and which have mainly recreational use.
27 http://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/Web/corporate/pages.nsf/Links/60DB5300C4A206D08025719900579895/$file/LAFhandBook_t cm2-32136.pdf 28 http://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/Web/corporate/pages.nsf/Links/60DB5300C4A206D08025719900579895/$file/2007+regulation s.pdf 29 http://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/Web/corporate/pages.nsf/Links/60DB5300C4A206D08025719900579895/$file/2007+laf- guidance.pdf 30 http://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/Web/corporate/pages.nsf/Pages%20by%20Department/60DB5300C4A206D08025719900579 895 29
Page 132 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Improvement of rights of way and highways enhances accessibility to greenspace both for residents and for visitors to the sub-region. These improvements should be flexibile to mitigate any significant conflict there might be with the modern land use (Natural England Stakeholder Working - ‘Stepping Forward’ in 2010.
The Natural England Good Practice Note on Rights of Way Improvement Plans (ROWIP) and Local Transport Plans (LTP) integration states that ‘The new Local Transport Plan guidance recognises the role of active travel solutions such as walking and cycling. There is now an opportunity for local authorities to take a broader, more holistic approach to transport and address the rights of way network as an integral part of urban and rural transport systems and in contributing to the achievement of all the national transport goals’. It also states that ‘Integration gives local authorities an advantage in delivering positive benefits for people and the natural environment – a more active lifestyle in a greener, healthier, low carbon, quieter and safer environment’. This has been integrated into the West Midlands Local Transport Plan (LTP) and promoted through the Centro’s draft integrated transport prospectus31 and Green Transport Charter (Centro, 2010). Warwickshire County Council has integrated this into their Local Transport Plan, which is shown in Figure 9 below.
Figure 9: Integration between WCC’s Rights of Way Improvement Plan and Local Transport Plan 3
The Rights of Way and Recreational Highway Strategy vision is “To ensure that the public gain maximum use and enjoyment of the network, whilst protecting and improving it for future generations of residents and visitors’. The overall objectives in implementing the Strategy are to achieve:
A well-managed and maintained asset; A sustainable network which meets the needs of modern users; A network which is accessible to, and used by, a wide variety of people from different backgrounds and with differing abilities;
31 Additional Centro document links are http://www.centro.org.uk/LTP/LTP.aspx and http://www.centro.org.uk/corporateinformation/publications.aspx Case studies can be found at http://www.centro.org.uk/LTP/LSTF.aspx. 30
Page 133 PART A – STRATEGIC CONTEXT
Responsible users who respect the countryside as a working environment and as an investment for the future; and A better rights of way network for all.
This covers issues and challenges including:
Accessibility – increasing access to the countryside for the whole community; Education - Enabling people to learn about the opportunities that the countryside and rights of way network offer can act to make the countryside more accessible to all, as well as reducing the potential for conflict; Health, wellbeing and social benefits - It has been well documented that walking, cycling and other forms of exercise such as running and horseriding can be important contributors to people’s ongoing health and fitness. A number of ‘walking for health’ groups have been set up around Warwickshire, but these groups operate independently of WCC; Path networks and connections - Modern users are very different and whilst the network has a role in transport links for walkers and cyclists between settlements and destinations, the majority of the people use the network for recreation; Paths on the ground - The majority of the paths are maintainable at public expense and so the responsibility for the maintenance of the path network rests mainly with the Highway Authority, although the landowner or land manager does bear some responsibility; Records, changes and mapping - The survival and protection of rights of way though the 20th Century is largely down to the requirement for each highway authority to create and maintain a Definitive Map and Statement. The document gives legal protection to those routes which are included and must be constantly reviewed; Strategic development and promotion - As recreational pastimes, walking, cycling and horseriding have a broad appeal and many people travel outside their immediate area to participate. There are several regionally and nationally important long distance promoted routes which pass through Warwickshire, such as the Heart of England Way and the Monarch’s Way, as well as many smaller locally devised and promoted trails. These have been developed and are promoted mainly by voluntary organisations and this is largely outside the control of WCC; and Tourism and leisure - Warwickshire is well known as a tourist destination, with several honeypot sites. The challenge is to expand that tourist destination to include the countryside so as to bring additional visitors to the County and to extend the stay of current visitors. It is recognised that visitors to the rights of way network do add value to the rural economy.
Further details of the strategic interventions to safeguard and maintain the green infrastructure outlined above are contained in each of the District/Borough and City Council’s Green Infrastructure Plans and other relevant local plans, such as the Solihull and Metropolitan Borough Council (2009) Walking Strategy32 and Cycling Strategy33.
Local Authority Greenspace audits will also play an important role in making achieving this objective.
32 http://www.solihull.gov.uk/Attachments/Appendix_D_-_Walking_Strategy.pdf 33 http://www.solihull.gov.uk/Attachments/Appendix_C_-_Cycling_Strategy.pdf
31
Page 134 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Landscape
The original landscape guidelines for Warwickshire pioneered the development of an objective and systematic method for mapping the physical and cultural character34 of landscapes in England. In the light of these guidelines, considerable resources have been invested in helping to maintain and restore these Warwickshire landscapes at a local level. For example, since 1980 there has been a Countryside Project within Coventry, originally established as a partnership between Coventry City Council and the Countryside Commission, helping to conserve and enhance the character and quality of Ancient Arden as a working landscape, and as a bridge to the countryside and a gateway to the city. A number of initiatives have been undertaken, often in partnership with local landowners, to maintain the distinctive features of this characteristically ancient landscape and, in particular, to maintain the sharp distinction between urban and rural in the Green Belt.
More recently, between 2006 and 2008 further studies35 have been commissioned within Warwickshire and Coventry to evaluate the extent to which the Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines have been implemented. These studies have been used to:
review the character and condition of the landscapes; review recent management and conservation activity; identify forces for change and management priorities; and where necessary, recommend modifications to the boundaries of the Landscape Character Areas.
These landscape character assessments will be used to help inform the provision and management of future Green Infrastructure networks. They will also be supported by National Character Area assessments and environmental opportunities promoted by Natural England, and the pioneering work being developed by Warwickshire County Council on Biodiversity Offsetting and Connectivity/Opportunity Mapping, in partnership with the University of York.
The Landscape Description Unit (LDU) method emerged from the Warwickshire Landscapes Project; a detailed study which combined a review and analysis of existing written and mapped information, together with field surveys, to describe the character and special features of the different landscapes within the county. The LDU now forms the spatial framework for a substantial area of landscape character mapping across the country by Natural England, including all the counties in the West Midlands. A map of LDUs has already been produced for Warwickshire and in some local studies, including the Ancient Arden landscape within Coventry, these have been sub-divided into smaller (c 1:10,000 scale) Land Cover Parcels (LCPs). Land Cover Parcels are derived by sub-dividing each LDU based on differences in land cover and historic pattern. The land cover analysis identifies features within the landscape, such as areas of parkland, larger woodlands, and patches of disturbed land, smaller urban areas and other non-agricultural land. The historical analysis identifies parish units and areas of farmland with different sizes and patterns of fields.
34 Landscape Character is described as “the distinct and recognisable pattern of elements that occurs consistently in a particular type of landscape, and how this is perceived by people” (Guidelines for Landscape and Visual Impact Assessment; Landscape Institute and IEMA, 2002) 35 Joint green belt study (Coventry city, Nuneaton and Bedworth Borough, Rugby Borough and Warwick District)
32
Page 135 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
The analysis was followed by an evaluation of recent changes which had affected the landscape and the factors likely to influence change in the future. From this a series of management strategies and landscape guidelines were developed. The guidelines were designed for people directly involved in landscape management, providing advice about how and where landscape character needed to be conserved, restored and/or enhanced.
The historical development of the Warwickshire landscapes is a major factor influencing the character of the present day landscapes. In a region with few dramatic physical features, it is these human influences, developed over many centuries and underpinned by nature and geology, which has created the man-made landscapes and special features that clearly embody the local distinctiveness of Warwickshire’s landscapes. However, these distinctive landscapes are both robust and vulnerable. After surviving for hundreds of years, subtle aspects of a farm’s history, including distinctive ridge and furrow meadows, can be erased in one afternoon of deep ploughing. The alignment of a new bypass, which may help a village to breathe again, can cause historical landscape features to disappear forever. In many cases, changes may be small and piecemeal but, cumulatively, they can have hugely detrimental effect on the landscape and the difference between town and country. The key is to provide the development and infrastructure that present day society – after measured reflection – decides it needs, but in a way that retains ‘local distinctiveness’ and the essential visual harmony of the landscape, and in ways that still respect and reinforce local tradition and a sense of place.
Strategic Landscape Opportunities
This Study highlights the need for a more strategic framework and delivery program for Green Infrastructure planning in Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull. It should be considered in the context of the sub-region and its aspirations for environmental transformation and strategic landscape improvements. Green Infrastructure planning will be a key to the delivery of Local Plans and will complement other regional initiatives such as the West Midlands Forestry Framework to create woodlands, including Woodland Opportunity Mapping, and Natural England’s work on National Landscape Character Areas. Green Infrastructure planning offers a unique opportunity for strategic landscape conservation and enhancement to be at the fore of all development and land-use initiatives, and accorded the same importance as other forms of infrastructure.
Landscape Character The process of landscape characterisation involves a combination of desk study and field surveys to systematically divide the countryside into discrete and relatively homogenous units of land, within which the constituent physical, biological and historical elements occur in repeating patterns and share certain aesthetic characteristics. The desk study generates landform, land cover and historical overlays in the GIS which, combined with field surveys, results in landscape types that have discrete and distinctive character.
The intrinsic character of Warwickshire’s landscapes has remained largely intact since the publication of the Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines. The maintenance and enhancement of the character of the landscape has been encouraged by the adoption of management strategies and sensitive countryside management schemes, in partnership with the local community, farmers and conservation organisations.
Landscape Condition The condition of a landscape, which should be clearly distinguished from its character, is a measure of how far removed that landscape is from an ‘optimal’ state, where all the key characteristics are present and functional. Condition, therefore, has a visual as well as a functional dimension. The former reflects the degree to which the existing landscape pattern appears visually fragmented, owing to the loss of existing features or the imposition of new
33
Page 136 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS features which appear ‘out of place’. The functional dimension embraces a range of issues related to the ecological quality of the countryside and the extent to which present day land use respects the inherent ecological and cultural character of the land.
The pastoral character of the landscape survives in places, but in many areas there has been a shift to a more intensive system of mixed arable farming, a long-term trend that has affected many parts of formerly mixed farming in lowland agricultural landscapes in the UK. This shift towards a more arable farming system has been associated with the loss of semi- improved grasslands and hedgerow boundaries; a process that has slowed since the introduction of legislation to retain hedgerows and Countryside Stewardship schemes. There is evidence of the decline in hedgerow function resulting in ‘gappy’ and thinning hedgerows, especially in areas of intensive arable farming, and the urban fringe where horse grazing has increased significantly, as traditional farming has declined.
Management Priorities and Recommendations
Much has been achieved at the landscape scale since the publication of the Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines as a result of initiatives to retain and, where possible, enhance the character of the Warwickshire landscapes. While many of these initiatives have been small- scale, at the broader scale, initiatives to work with landowners to maintain and restore permanent grassland, and to plant new woodlands and hedgerows, is also evident. However, the region is suffering from the type of neglect of trees, hedgerows and wildflower meadows, evident across large areas of lowland England as farming changes. The ecological interest of the region is also confined largely, but not solely, to Ancient Woodlands, many of which are in need of urgent management, and species rich grassland. Both these habitat types are only widespread in a few Land Cover Parcels.
Warwickshire is largely a rural county with very strong historical connections and the image of ‘leafy Warwickshire’. The south of Warwickshire comes closest to this traditional image, supported by new initiatives such as The Heart of England Forest Project, which aims to “plant and preserve a large native forest in the heart of England.” However, farming changes, Dutch elm disease, new developments, and associated light and noise pollution have fundamentally changed the appearance of the countryside. Ancient Woodlands, together with ancient/veteran trees, represent an irreplaceable semi-natural habitat. With only 2.07% of Warwickshire now covered by Ancient Woodland, which is below the national average, we cannot afford to lose any more of this finite resource.
Warwickshire also contains a large number of ancient trees, of which many may not be formally recorded. The Woodland Trust and Ancient Tree Forum are running a national project – the Ancient Tree Hunt – to identify and map ancient trees, so that they can be protected and enhanced for the benefit of all.
The Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines identified Enhancement Zones, considered to be strategic priorities for landscape conservation and enhancement. In the light of new information, including the regional character area mapping of the Midlands, Historic Landscape Characterisation (HLC) project, the Habitat Biodiversity Audit (HBA) and Connectivity/Opportunity Mapping, it is recommended that these Enhancement Zones be re- assessed in order to identify key priorities for conservation and enhancement. An integrated and partnership approach will be required. This will be particularly important in relation to planning for sustainable landscapes in and around the urban fringe, major growth areas and transport infrastructure projects.
Recommendation 1
1a) Re-assess the Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines in the light of:
34
Page 137 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
i) new strategic landscape initiatives and partnership working, including the Local Nature Partnership, Nature Improvement Areas (NIA), Connectivity/Opportunity Mapping and Biodiversity Offsetting; ii) new regional information in partnership with the Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull Habitat Biodiversity Audit Partnership (HBA), Historic Landscape Characterisation (HLC) and Natural England; iii) GIS mapping of the Landscape Description Units (LDUs) and Land Cover Parcels (LCPs – c. 1:10,000 scale); and iv) recent policy changes, with particular reference to o Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull Strategic Green Infrastructure Study, 2012 o Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull Local Plans o National Planning Policy Framework, 2012 o West Midlands Biodiversity Partnership, Landscapes for Living, 2012 o Biodiversity Strategy for England, 2011 o Green Infrastructure Partnership, 2011 o Natural Environment White Paper – The Natural Choice: securing the value of nature, July 2011 o West Midlands Forestry Framework, 2010, Woodland Opportunity Mapping and Woodland Uplift 2012 o Section 40 of the Natural Environment and Rural Communities Act, 2006.
1b) It is recommended that a review of the Enhancement Zones be undertaken, with priority broadly characterised into three strategic categories:
i) areas in which the primary aim should be landscape conservation; ii) areas in which the primary aim should be landscape enhancement; and iii) areas in which the aim should be a roughly equal prescription of landscape conservation and enhancement.
It is important to note that these categories should be designed to reflect the primary characteristic rather than the exclusive characteristic of these areas. For example, within areas which primarily demand landscape conservation, there will be pockets of degraded landscape which will require enhancement. The same principle applies to areas in which the primary aim is landscape enhancement, which will also include pockets of high quality landscape that will need conserving. It will also be important to consider Connectivity and Opportunity Mapping, as part of an integrated approach to improving strategic local landscapes.
Recommendation 2
2a) Prioritise strategic landscape improvements, having regard to the selective evaluation of the Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines in 2006 - 2007.
Hedgerows and Field Boundaries Enhance the structure of the landscape through replanting and regeneration of primary hedgerow boundaries. Reintroduce mixed native species hedgerows along primary boundaries. Enhance the age structure of hedgerow tree cover, particularly hedgerow oaks.
Woodlands Conserve and enhance the biodiversity of Ancient Woodlands and veteran trees, through sensitive woodland management.
35
Page 138 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Identify opportunities for restoring Ancient Woodland on former sites. Identify opportunities for new tree planting, to strengthen the sense of landscape cohesion and connectivity.
2b) Use Woodland Opportunity Mapping to help target woodland creation opportunities, including Ancient Woodland restoration at a landscape scale.
Grasslands Conserve neutral grasslands and enhance species diversity. Maintain and restore areas of older permanent pasture, including ridge and furrow meadows. Conserve the ecological character of wet grasslands. Identify opportunities for sensitive grassland management, to strengthen the sense of landscape cohesion and connectivity.
Wetlands Maintain the special character and continuity of river and canal corridors. Enhance the unity and wetland character of river valley wetlands, through habitat creation and management.
Rural Character Maintain strong rural character. Conserve pastoral character. Restrict and, where possible, reverse the sub-urbanisation of the landscape. Identify opportunities to strengthen ‘local distinctiveness’ and a ‘sense of place’. Identify opportunities for new tree planting to soften the impact of buildings and ‘grey’ infrastructure. Landscape character assessment to be a major consideration at the inception, planning and design of all major development and infrastructure projects.
Recommendation 3 Green Infrastructure provision and development should strengthen landscape character, reflecting locally distinctive natural and cultural landscape patterns, and integrating with natural processes and systems and land-use change, contributing to their long-term protection, conservation and enhanced management. Proposals should be informed by the guidance contained in the Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines, Connectivity/Opportunity Mapping and complementary landscape character assessments produced by local authorities. Targeted enhancement should include urban fringe landscapes and growth areas, strategic transport corridors and agricultural landscapes:
Strategic Enhancement: Countryside In and Around Towns The landscape quality of the urban fringe countryside is a key influence on how the overall characters of the Warwickshire landscapes are perceived and enjoyed. Rural urban fringe landscapes close to the main towns are widely recognised as highly important to people’s experiences and quality of life. Opportunities should be sought to reinforce and enhance landscape character, by creating new and maintaining existing Green Infrastructure, linking urban areas with the wider countryside. For example, this could include establishing new community woodlands and wildflower meadows. New development on the edges of settlements has the potential to be visually intrusive, particularly in the early years before landscape mitigation schemes mature. In responding to the planned expansion of settlements, particular attention will need to be given to the manner in which new developments can be sensitively accommodated into the rural-urban fringe landscape in terms of their siting, materials and design, including scale, layout and landscape mitigation.
36
Page 139 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Strategic Enhancement: Transport Corridors The strategic transport routes are a primary means by which many people see and experience Warwickshire, Coventry and Solihull, including visitors, tourists and investors. These routes include motorways and major road corridors, as well as the railway network. Opportunities exist to enhance these corridors in order to improve the overall visual experience, strengthening landscape character and a sense of place. Such enhancements may include the ecological management of roadside verges for wild flowers and wildlife habitats, the extension of roadside verge tree and shrub planting, clearing litter, reducing unnecessary clutter and limiting standardised treatments during highway improvement schemes. Landscape enhancement can help contain the impact of transport corridors and conserve landscape features. Mitigation and enhancement of these transport corridors, to strengthen landscape character, should be a priority in the future planning of strategic Green Infrastructure.
Strategic Enhancement: Working Agricultural Landscapes While not mapped for any specific area, it is recognised that the quality and appearance of the working agricultural landscape is crucial as a framework for more specific environmental enhancement. Conservation and enhancement of traditional features of the farmed landscape is a common theme within the Warwickshire Landscapes Guidelines, particularly for landscapes assessed as being in poor condition and where intensive farming practices dominate.
Due to the intensification of agricultural practices, coupled with the loss of many hedgerows, and field trees through Dutch elm disease, the landscape has become much more open and fragmented over the past 30-40 years. Opportunities exist to enhance the landscape, restore connectivity and so enrich the visual experience of the countryside through the Environmental Stewardship and other agri-environmental grant schemes - for example, by restoring hedgerows and field patterns, reintroducing hedgerow trees and establishing new copses, woodlands and wildflower meadows on farmland. In addition, opportunities exist to create richer green lanes through a mixture of tree and hedge planting beside rights of way, in order to ‘break up’ views across large areas of open farmland. These types of enhancements would help create a richer and more varied complex of views and vistas across the area. The use of Connectivity and Opportunity Mapping will be critical to this process.
Infrastructure Delivery Mechanisms
The delivery of this strategy will be through a variety of mechanisms, including Biodiversity Offsetting (see Annexe A for more details).
Grants Landscape priorities can be delivered through various grants such as Heritage Lottery Fund (HLF) and English Heritage funding. Bids that are coherent with the aims of this strategy should be supported.
Local Planning Authority The mechanism to deliver landscape priorities within the planning system is through local Infrastructure Delivery Plans (IDPs), Community Infrastructure Levies, Public Open Space contributions, legal agreements and Biodiversity Offsetting36. Biodiversity Offsetting is explained in the following section.
36 Biodiversity Offsetting -
37
Page 140 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Other Land Management Systems For example:
Agri-Environment schemes – e.g. Entry-level Stewardship (ELS) and Higher-level Stewardship (HLS); Local Authority land management – e.g. of highway verges, Country Parks etc; Environment Agency management and capital spend – e.g. flood alleviation works; Non-Government Organisational land management – e.g. canal works, Wildlife Trust Reserves; Outdoor sporting provision – e.g. golf courses, sports grounds Voluntary land management - including agricultural; Neighbourhood Plans – e.g. village greens, community orchards, Local Green Space Designations; and Local amenity groups, e.g. tree planting bodies.
38
Page 141 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Biodiversity
The principles of conserving the biodiversity within the sub-region are based on the Lawton Review of Making Space for Nature (2010)37. Professor Sir John Lawton concluded unequivocally that England’s collection of wildlife areas is fragmented and does not represent a coherent and resilient ecological network capable of responding to the challenges of climate change and other pressures. The review called for ‘a step-change in nature conservation [...] a new, restorative approach which rebuilds nature and creates a more resilient natural environment for the benefit of wildlife and ourselves’. The review made 24 recommendations, but summarised what needed to be done in just four words: more, bigger, better and joined. This has been summarised into Figure 10.
Figure 10: The components of ecological networks (from Making Space for Nature)
The diagram shows that natural areas can be increased by habitat creation (‘more’), extended, for example through adding protected buffer zones to existing natural areas (‘bigger’), enhanced through habitat restoration (‘better’) and connected by stepping stone corridors, landscape corridors and linear corridors such as road verges or railway embankments (‘joined’).
The sub-region has formed partnerships with the Universities of Warwick, Coventry and York to build upon previous Landscapes for Living and other studies using the Habitat Biodiversity Audit data. These studies will be used to identify Biodiversity Core Areas, corridors, stepping stones and restoration areas for three main habitat categories:
Woodland; Grassland; and Wetlands.
37 http://archive.defra.gov.uk/environment/biodiversity/documents/201009space-for-nature.pdf
39
Page 142 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Appendix 2 includes details of the habitat classification for each of these habitat categories.
Biodiversity Core Areas
BAP priority habitats have been mapped (see Figure 11) and the results have been used to identify Biodiversity Core Areas, using either a 500m2 or 1000m2 grids as appropriate for each habitat category. They have followed a methodology developed by Natural England but adapted for this strategy to identify strategic, semi-strategy and non-strategic areas where enhancements will be focused. However, biodiversity in no restricted to these area and opportunities to create new features and core areas should not be overlooked.
Figure 11: Sub-regional Core Area Habitat Map for Grasslands
Biodiversity Connectivity Mapping
40
Page 143 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
The University of York has produced maps showing areas of good-to-poor connectivity (Molianen & Neiminen, 2002) for the three Woodland, Grassland and Wetland categories based on:
connectivity of habitat patches (including hedgerows); distance between patches; average dispersal distance of an indicative species; and suitable habitat area of patch.
Connectivity Maps have been developed for both 500m and 1000m average dispersal distances to compliment the Biodiversity Rich Area mapping and illustrate opportunity at a ‘field’ level. Figure 12 shows an example of a Connectivity Map for 1000m dispersal.
Figure 12: Example Woodland Connectivity Map at 1000m dispersal for Princethorpe, Warwickshire (woodland areas shown without hedges)
41
Page 144 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Distinctiveness Mapping
The distinctiveness scores have been derived from the UK National Ecosystem Assessment ((UK NEA, 2011). The scores have been adapted from the Defra Biodiversity Offsetting Technical Paper and associated documents38. The Defra scores are interpreted as those that best match the HBA Phase 1 habitat categories. For this strategy this scoring is used to identify important habitats from the Phase 1 habitat types. The distinctiveness scores range from 3 - high, 2 – moderate and 1 – low as briefly equate to the following:
High distinctiveness scores equate to Biodiversity Action Plan (BAP) habitats. They can be divided into three main categories; semi-improved woodlands and species rich hedgerows; semi-improved and unimproved grasslands and wetland habitats.
Moderate distinctiveness scores are a mid-way assessment for areas that are either a transition from high to low or vice versa; or are of indeterminate biodiversity.
Low distinctiveness score are areas of low biodiversity interest. These areas cover the majority of the survey areas for the settlements, and includes agricultural farm land, amenity grassland and coniferous woodland.
Management Priorities and Recommendations
These mapping approaches are being used to identify sub-regional GI Biodiversity Assets and identify Strategic Areas for delivering the Biodiversity Strategy’s aim to reconnect habitats throughout the sub-region.
Sub-regional GI Biodiversity Assets – are all qualifying woodland, grassland and wetland features that have a connective function or a high distinctiveness value.
Recommendation 1 The aim of the sub-regional GI Strategy is to safeguard and enhance all GI Biodiversity Assets.
Recommendation 2 The aim of the sub-regional GI Strategy is to fulfil two priorities for each of the woodland, grassland and wetland habitat categories:
Priority 1) - Connect together individual sub-regional GI Biodiversity assets to form core areas .
Priority 2) – Connect the Core Areas together [where Priority 1 has been achieved] to form large functional clusters.
Recommendation 3 An additional aim is to create either new Core Areas large enough to function independently as an individual site or a functional cluster of larger and smaller sites where there is a distinct local need or deficiency in a habitat category.
Infrastructure Delivery Mechanism The delivery of this strategy will be through a variety of mechanisms.
38 Biodiversity Offsetting: Coventry, Solihull and Warwickshire is one of the 6 national pilots that is testing the Offsetting metrics system between 2012 -2014. It is anticipated that the sub-regional pilot is to be delivered through the Sub-regional GI Strategy.
42
Page 145 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Grants Biodiversity priorities can be delivered through various grants such as Heritage Lottery Fund (HLF) and English Heritage funding. Bids that are coherent with the aims of this strategy should be supported.
Local Planning Authority The mechanism to deliver Biodiversity priorities within the planning system is through site landscape and restoration plans, local Infrastructure Delivery Plans (IDPs), Community Infrastructure Levies, Public Open Space contributions, legal agreements, but mainly through Biodiversity Offsetting39. The procedure and governance model for enacting Biodiversity Offsetting is detailed in the supplementary document associated with this strategy: Annex A – Biodiversity Offsetting.
Essentially, where Biodiversity Offsetting has been agreed the offset will be guided to put “the right habitat in the right place”. This is encouraged in the Defra Biodiversity Offsetting Metrics40 by a ‘spatial risk’ of three area categories:
Strategic Areas; Semi-Strategic Areas; and Non-Strategic Areas.
Within the sub-region these have been identified through the Biodiversity Connectivity Mapping at the appropriate average dispersal distance (500m or 1000m) and defined as follows.
Strategic Areas – Areas where habitat enhancement or creation will connect one or more high quality habitat areas together.
Semi-Strategic Areas – Areas where habitat enhancement or creation will expand existing habitat within a Biodiversity Rich Area.
Non-strategic Areas - Areas where habitat enhancement or creation will not expand upon existing habitat.
These sub-regional Green Infrastructure Biodiversity Core Areas and Strategic Areas Maps are available on Warwickshire County Council’s Green Infrastructure web pages (link to be added after consultation). These will be updated on a regular basis to reflect the dynamic changes that affect ecosystems both for good or bad.
Neighbourhood Areas The inclusion of biodiversity un Neighbourhood and Parish plans will help in creating and enhancing local GI Assets that could build into the sub-regional objectives.
Other Land Management Systems For example:
Agri-Environment schemes – e.g. Entry-level Stewardship (ELS) and Higher-level Stewardship (HLS); Local Authority land management – e.g. of highway verges, Country Parks etc;
39 http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/natural/biodiversity/uk/offsetting/ 40 http://www.defra.gov.uk/publications/2012/04/02/pb13745-bio-tech-paper/
43
Page 146 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Environment Agency Catchment Area Plans - management and capital spend – e.g. flood alleviation works; Non-Government Organisational land management – e.g. canal works, Wildlife Trust Reserves; Outdoor sporting provision – e.g. golf courses, sports grounds Voluntary land management; Neighbourhood Plans – e.g. village greens, community orchards, Local Green Space Designations; and Local amenity groups, e.g. tree planting bodies.
44
Page 147 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Accessibility
The importance of Green Infrastructure assets to people at different geographical scales is central to this study. A set of criteria was established to systematically define and identify those Green Infrastructure assets in the study area that could be considered to be of sub- regional importance; i.e. assets that have importance to people beyond their own local authority boundaries. Green Infrastructure assets would be considered if they fell within the sub-region itself or within a 10km buffer outside of the sub-region.
The first criterion was based on Natural England’s Accessible Natural Greenspace Standard (ANGSt) Model2. ANGSt uses distance thresholds, and defines the maximum distance that any resident should have to travel from their home to reach accessible natural or semi- natural greenspace. It is divided in to four tiers, as shown in Table 4 below.
Table 4: ANGSt thresholds for maximum distance that a resident should have to travel to reach accessible greenspace
Sub-regional Sites or habitats over Within 10 km provision 500ha County scale Sites or habitats over Within 5 km provision 100ha District scale Sites or habitats over Within 2 km provision 20ha Neighbourhood Sites or habitats over Within 300 m scale sites 2ha
Given that the sub-region has very few large assets, all sites over 100ha (the county scale and sub-regional assets under ANGSt) were considered to be sub-regional assets for the purposes of this study. In addition significant linear assets, including all the canals, main rivers and large water bodies, and the long distance walking and cycling routes of national, regional and county level importance were included. Clusters of sites that are within 500m of each other that collectively are over 100ha have also been included as sub-regional assets. Table 5 below provides a summary of the criteria used for selection of sub-regional Green Infrastructure assets.
Table 5: Summary of the criteria for identifying sub-regional Green Infrastructure assets
Criteria for identifying Sub Regional Green Infrastructure Assets 1) Sites over 100ha (County and Sub-regional level sites as defined by ANGSt);
2) Canals, main rivers, large water bodies;
3) Long distance walking and cycling routes of national, regional or county level importance.
4) Clusters of sites that are within 500m of each other that collectively are over 100ha.
45
Page 148 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
5) Sites that are under 100ha that may still be considered a sub-regional asset as nominated by each local planning authority.
The final criterion for identifying sub-regional assets proved to be the most difficult to define. It was felt that there were a number of sites that, whilst they were under 100ha in size, may still be considered a sub-regional asset. Each planning authority identified any additional assets that are below 100ha in size that they felt warranted being included as sub-regional assets.
In order to identify the Green Infrastructure assets in the study area that fall within the first four criteria, the data sets listed below were used and then the outputs were reviewed to help ensure that no significant assets had been missed. Each authority within the sub-region then identified and provided data for any assets that would fall under criterion number five.
The datasets that were used in identifying sub-regional assets are listed below.
• Access Land (under the Countryside and Rights of Way Act) • Registered Common Land • Section 15 land (S.15 of the Countryside and Rights of Way Act 2000 – pre-existing public rights of access that on CROW land apply instead of CROW rights) • Section 16 land (land voluntarily dedicated for public access under the Countryside and Rights of Way Act) • SAC • SSSI • National Nature Reserves • Local Nature Reserves • Country Parks • Parks and Gardens • National Trust sites • RSPB Reserves • Warwickshire Open Spaces • Bancroft Gardens / Recreation Ground • Coventry Green Belt • Nuneaton & Bedworth Woodland Grant Scheme • Rugby Core Strategy proposed urban extensions • Habitat Biodiversity Audit
In order to protect the unique value of ancient woodlands and ancient/veteran trees, support new native woodland creation in suitable locations and work towards implementing the Woodland Access Standards promoted by the Woodland Trust:
No person should live more than 500m from at least one area of accessible woodland of no less than 2ha in size; and There should be at least one area of accessible woodland of no less than 20ha within 4km (8km round trip) of people’s homes.
Management Priorities and Recommendations
Recommendation 1 To map areas with GI Accessibility Asset deficiency throughout the sub-region.
Recommendation 2
46
Page 149 PART B – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
To identify how to secure resources and increase accessibility to existing GI assets and create or enhance new GI Accessibility Assets in those areas of deficiency.
Infrastructure Delivery Mechanism The delivery of this strategy will be through a variety of mechanisms.
Grants Accessibility priorities can be delivered through various grants such as Heritage Lottery Fund (HLF) and English Heritage funding. Bids that are coherent with the aims of this strategy should be supported.
Local Planning Authority The demand for additional sub-regional accessibility Green Infrastructure will be obtained through local Community Infrastructure Levy outlined in Infrastructure Delivery Plans and/or other legal agreements.
The Countryside and Rights of Way Improvement Plan will also set out intentions on improving accessibility to the countryside through the Community Access Forum.
Other Land Management Systems For example:
Local Authority land management – e.g. of Country Parks etc; Environment Agency management and capital spend – e.g. flood alleviation works; Non-Government Organisational land management – e.g. canal works, Wildlife Trust Reserves; Outdoor sporting provision – e.g. golf courses, sports grounds Voluntary land management; Neighbourhood Plans – e.g. village greens, community orchards, Local Green Space Designations; and Local amenity groups, e.g. tree planting bodies.
47
Page 150 PART C – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
PART C – ASSETS & MAPS
Landscape This evidence can be found at www.warwickshire.gov.uk/greeninfrastructure
48
Page 151 PART C – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Biodiversity This evidence can be found at www.warwickshire.gov.uk/greeninfrastructure
Figure 13: Example Map for Strategic Woodland Areas
49
Page 152 PART C – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Accessibility Figure 11 and Table 6 below identify all those assets that were regarded as sub regional assets for the purpose of this study.
Table 6: Listing of Sub-regional Assets
LUC ID Number Name area (ha) Broad Accessibility 2003 COVENTRY NORTH WEST GREEN BELT 1,869.0 Limited Access 2004 COVENTRY SOUTHERN GREEN BELT 705.8 Limited Access 865 STONELEIGH ABBEY 390.4 Limited Access 851 RAGLEY HALL 346.8 Limited Access 903 WARWICK CASTLE (and Warwick Castle Park) 319.9 Limited Access 833 PACKINGTON HALL 318.7 No Access Publically 836 COOMBE ABBEY 316.2 Accessible Publically 1308 KINGSBURY WATER PARK 259.6 Accessible 832 MEREVALE HALL 193.8 No Access 899 COMPTON VERNEY 191.8 Limited Access COVENTRY SOUTH WEST GREEN BELT (incl Publically 2005 War Memorial Park) 186.3 Accessible 860 NEWNHAM PADDOX 176.2 Limited Access 1501 ARBURY ESTATE 175.6 Limited Access 849 ARBURY HALL 172.9 Limited Access RUGBY PROPOSED URBAN EXTENSION 2000-1 GREEN SPACE 168.2 Limited Access MIDDLETON LAKES (CURRENT BOUNDARY 1324 FROM 28/02/2007) 158.9 No Access 854 FARNBOROUGH HALL 142.7 Limited Access Publically 141-148 ALVECOTE POOLS 129.3 Accessible 905 KENILWORTH CASTLE 120.3 Limited Access Publically 1988 NEWBOLD COMYN PARK 120.1 Accessible 893 WROXALL ABBEY 119.1 No Access 1991 WAVERLEY WOOD 117.4 Limited Access 869 CHARLECOTE PARK 110.3 Limited Access 871 ALSCOT PARK 108.8 No Access 115-116 BENTLEY PARK WOOD 105.4 Limited Access Publically 1989 HAY WOOD 104.3 Accessible Publically 1322 HARTSHILL HAYES 54.8 Accessible Publically 1311 BURTON DASSETT HILLS 39.8 Accessible BANCROFT GARDENS / RECREATION Publically 2002 22.8 GROUND Accessible Publically 1301 DRAYCOTE WATER 8.8 Accessible
50
Page 153 PART C – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
LUC ID Number Name area (ha) Broad Accessibility Publically 890 LONDON ROAD CEMETERY, COVENTRY 7.7 Accessible Publically 1 ENSOR’S POOL 3.6 Accessible RUGBY PROPOSED URBAN EXTENSION 1998 281.7 Limited Access GREEN SPACE Publically 898 SUTTON PARK 912.5 Accessible 881 STANFORD HALL 238.0 Limited Access Publically 1313 RIVER ARROW 223.0 Accessible KINGFISHER (including Babbs Mill and Yorks Publically 1306 246.0 Wood) Accessible 904 WROXTON ABBEY 130.7 No Access Publically 141-148 ALVECOTE POOLS 129.3 Accessible 325 HIDCOTE MANOR GARDEN 125.6 Limited Access 870 DAYLESFORD HOUSE 119.9 No Access 887 BATSFORD PARK 114.6 Limited Access 839 ROUS LENCH COURT 110.2 No Access Publically 1305 DAVENTRY 67.5 Accessible 896 FAWSLEY HALL 364.6 No Access 880 HEYTHROP PARK 315.2 No Access Publically 1320 LICKEY HILLS 213.6 Accessible Publically 1304 WOODGATE VALLEY 192.4 Accessible 329 CHADWICH MANOR ESTATE 173.9 Unknown 338 HANBURY HALL 157.2 Limited Access 895 GREAT TEW 155.2 No Access Publically 867 HEWELL GRANGE 137.2 Accessible 850 SARSDEN HOUSE 117.7 No Access 858 GREAT BARR HALL 109.5 No Access Publically 300 FORGE MILL LAKE 104.9 Accessible
51
Page 154 PART C – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Linear Assets
Name Asset Avon River Walk Promoted Route Centenary Way Promoted Route Coventry Way Promoted Route Heart of England Way Promoted Route Macmillan Way Promoted Route Millenium Way Promoted Route Monarchs Way Promoted Route North Arden Heritage Trail Promoted Route North Arden Heritage Trail Loops Promoted Route Shakespeare's Avon Way Promoted Route Warwickshire Cotswold Route Promoted Route Solihull Way (Cole Valley Way) Promoted Route COTSWOLD WAY National Trail Ashby Canal Canal Birmingham & Fazeley Canal Canal Coventry Canal Canal Digbeth Branch Canal Canal Grand Union Canal Canal Oxford Canal Canal Rushall Canal Canal Stratford-upon-Avon Canal Canal Tame Valley Canal Canal Worcester & Birmingham Canal Canal
52
Page 155 Figure XX: Sub-regional Assets (NB need a key! Green = park/garden, including country parks, Turquoise = Cov greenbelt, dark green = Warks OS, Dark blue = Rugby Urban Growth, Purple = National Trust owned, Orange = RSPB owned, Red = SAC, Piunl = SSSI, Burgundy = LNR)
PART C – ASSESSMENTS and RECOMMENDATIONS
Figure 14: GI Accessibility Assets
ALVECOTE POOLS MIDDLETON LAKES ALVECOTE POOLS SUTTON PARK MIDDLETON LAKES MEREVALE HALL SUTTON PARK MEREVALE HALL GREAT BARR HALL HARTSHILL HAYES GREAT BARR HALL HARTSHILL HAYES KINGSBURY WATER PARK BENTLEY PARK WOOD KINGSBURY WATER PARK BENTLEY PARK WOOD FORGE MILL LAKE ENSOR'S POOL FORGE MILL LAKE ENSOR'S POOL ARBURY HALL ARBURY HALL KINGFISHER ARBURY ESTATE KINGFISHER ARBURY ESTATE PACKINGTON HALL WOODGATE VALLEY NEWNHAM PADDOX PACKINGTON HALL WOODGATE VALLEY NEWNHAM PADDOX STANFORD HALL COVENTRY NW GREEN BELT COVENTRY S GREEN BELT STANFORD HALL COVENTRY NW GREEN BELT COVENTRY S GREEN BELT LONDON ROAD CEMETERY CHADWICH MANOR ESTATE LONDON ROAD CEMETERY COVENTRY SW GREEN BELT COOMBE ABBEY CHADWICH MANOR ESTATE COOMBE ABBEY
Page 156 Page COVENTRY SW GREEN BELT (INCL. WAR MEMORIAL PARK) (INCL. WAR MEMORIAL PARK)
LICKEY HILLS KENILWORTH CASTLE LICKEY HILLS KENILWORTH CASTLE WAVERLEY WOOD WAVERLEY WOOD HAY WOOD HAY WOOD HEWELL GRANGE HEWELL GRANGE STONELEIGH ABBEY STONELEIGH ABBEY WROXALL ABBEY DRAYCOTE WATER WROXALL ABBEY DRAYCOTE WATER ARROW ARROW HANBURY HALL NEWBOLD COMYN PARK DAVENTRY HANBURY HALL NEWBOLD COMYN PARK DAVENTRY
WARWICK CASTLE WARWICK CASTLE FAWSLEY HALL FAWSLEY HALL RAGLEY HALL CHARLECOTE PARK RAGLEY HALL CHARLECOTE PARK ROUS LENCH COURT BANCROFT GARDENS ROUS LENCH COURT BANCROFT GARDENS COMPTON VERNEY BURTON DASSETT COMPTON VERNEY BURTON DASSETT ALSCOT PARK ALSCOT PARK
FARNBOROUGH HALL FARNBOROUGH HALL
HIDCOTE MANOR GARDEN HIDCOTE MANOR GARDEN
WROXTON ABBEY WROXTON ABBEY
BATSFORD PARK BATSFORD PARK GREAT TEW GREAT TEW HEYTHROP PARK HEYTHROP PARK DAYLESFORD HOUSE DAYLESFORD HOUSE SARSDEN HOUSE SARSDEN HOUSE
53
Appendix 1: North West Green Infrastructure Guide (NWGIG)
APPENDIX 1
North West Green Infrastructure Guide (NWGIG)
54
Page 157 Appendix 1: North West Green Infrastructure Guide (NWGIG)
Appendix 1 - North West Green Infrastructure Guide (NWGIG)
The Strategy will broadly follow the ‘North West Green Infrastructure Guide41 (NWGIG) as a framework for its production and the monitoring of progress in delivering its objectives. The NWGIG identifies five basic steps to Green Infrastructure Planning:
STEP 1 - Partnerships and Priorities STEP 2 - Data Audit and Resource Mapping STEP 3 - Functional Assessment STEP 4 - Needs Assessment STEP 5 - Intervention Plan
More detail on this process is available at www.greeninfrastructurenw.co.uk. Further explanations of the above steps with tools, actions and methods that go towards the successful completion of these Steps, together with the progress made to complete them are found within Appendix 1.
STEP 1 - Partnerships and Priorities Build partnerships of stakeholders who benefit from, and lobby for, green infrastructure. Review relevant policies and strategies. Determine the key outcomes for the green infrastructure mapping process. The Partnership determines the scope of the plan based on resources, objectives and information available. Build organisational support for the Green Infrastructure Plan.
STEP 2 - Data Audit and Resource Mapping Identify available information, including maps, regional and national guidance, datasets, relevant policy frameworks, regional and national strategies and stakeholders. Generate a map of the physical area showing Green Infrastructure types and locations, usually on a Geographic Information System (GIS).
STEP 3 - Functional Assessment Assess current situation – what the Green Infrastructure is doing, where it is functioning well and needs to be maintained, and where it needs to be improved. Assess future situation – consider the threats to Green Infrastructure; seek out the opportunities for improvement; consider how it might need to change; determine how to secure change.
STEP 4 - Needs Assessment Cross-reference Green Infrastructure planning with strategic outcomes identified in Step 1. Reference relevant datasets such as deprivation indices, market research, house prices etc.
STEP 5 - Intervention Plan The Green Infrastructure Plan will set out: What the green infrastructure of an area is; What it is doing and what it might do; Where the Green Infrastructure is functioning well and needs maintaining;
41 North West Green Infrastructure Guide (NWGIGThink Tank, 2008)
55
Page 158 Appendix 1: North West Green Infrastructure Guide (NWGIG)
How it needs to change; and What will be done to secure change.
Outputs and Outcomes The desired outcome is a comprehensive, interactive and highly flexible evidence base, which can be used for a range of purposes:
A framework for the sustainable land management of the area; A tool for predicting the implications of change on the natural environment; An accurate picture of the green infrastructure of an area – essential in making planning decisions, informing developments and strategies; A tool for delivering the natural environmental contribution to identified priorities in the fields of health, economy and quality of life; A structured plan for delivering environmental change; Attracting funding by demonstrating researched needs and outcomes; and Attracting inward investment.
The progress of the Outputs and Outcomes associated to the five Steps listed above is reported within Annexe B. Changes to this Annexe will accord with the governance procedures detailed in the main strategy document.
Indicative steps for the for the planning process have been listed in the table below.
56
Page 159 Appendix 1: North West Green Infrastructure Guide (NWGIG)
Steps in the green infrastructure planning process
Step Tools and Data Process Steps Methods 1 Partnerships Regional and sub-regional Assemble partnerships Identify GI stakeholders & and Priorities strategies Assess policy frameworks champions LDF Documents Determine strategic Compile GI Strategy position Community Plans priorities to which GI will into central evidence Local Strategies and contribute database Neighbourhood Plans Agree scope and scale of Local and strategic values GI planning project Public Benefit Assessment? 2 Data Audit Aerial Photographs Identify data shortfalls and GIS mapping of green and Resource National Land Use how these will be infrastructure components Mapping Database OS Mastermap addressed and relationships to Web-source geographic and Identify existing GI surround land uses and demographic data components, their quality, demographic data Data held by local distribution, connected- authorities and partners ness Data from Greenspace Identify geographic context audits of GI – relationship to Socio-economic data surrounds communities and environmental features 3 Functional Landscape character Identify existing GI Workshops with key Assessment assessment components, their quality stakeholders to discuss Historic Landscape and functionality forces of change Characterisation Map of existing functions GIS mapping of spatial Conservation area appraisal Consider spatial implications of forces for Concept statements implications of forces for change Town and village statements change Case study methodologies Greenspace strategies Map potential functions Clere model Biodiversity Action Plans Habitat Audits 4 Needs Greenspace provision Identify whether the GIS mapping of local needs Assessment guidelines existing GI is appropriate and strategic priorities Open Space/Greenspace to local need Comparison of existing GI audits Determine how strategic functions and local needs Census Data priorities can be Case study methodologies Deprivation statistics represented by datasets Rural economy profiles Relate existing GI and Climate change adaption functionality to strategic requirements priorities and standards Proposed built developments and spatial changes Strategic priority and forward planning documents 5 Intervention GIS datasets and wider What changes are needed Using steps 1 to 4 determine Plan evidence database from to GI design, development, type and locations required stage 1, 2 & 3 maintenance and Advocacy and promotion Engagement with regional, management? through policy frameworks; sub-regional and local policy Where are these changes LEPs, LNPs, LDFs, development and needed? Neighbourhood Plans consultation including LSPs By what means will Incorporate intervention plan Use of existing, proven changes be sought? into proposed project and delivery mechanisms programmes e.g. CROWIP Section 106 agreements, endowments, ring fenced funds and match funding.
Update: January 2013
57
Page 160 Appendix 2: Habitat Classifications for Woodland, Wetland and Grassland Categories
APPENDIX 2
Habitat Classifications for Woodland, Wetland and Grassland Categories
58
Page 161 Appendix 2: Habitat Classifications for Woodland, Wetland and Grassland Categories
Habitat Connectivity Categories
The following habitat classifications have been selected for evaluating both the Core Area Maps and the Connectivity Mapping. These have undergone peer review as appropriate habitat for establishing strategic priorities.
HABCODE Habitat description Woodland Wetland Grassland A111 Broad-leaved semi-natural woodland X A112 Broad-leaved plantation X A121 Coniferous semi-natural woodland A122 Coniferous plantation A131 Mixed semi-natural woodland X A132 Mixed plantation X A21 Dense continuous scrub X A22 Scattered scrub X A31 Broad-leaved parkland/scattered trees X A32 Coniferous parkland/scattered trees X A4 Recently felled woodland A5 Orchard X B11 Unimproved acidic grassland X B12 Semi-improved acidic grassland X B21 Unimproved neutral grassland X B22 Semi-improved neutral grassland X B31 Unimproved calcareous grassland X B32 Semi-improved calcareous grassland X B4 Improved grassland B5 Marsh/marshy grassland X B6 Semi-improved neutral grassland C11 Continuous bracken C31 Tall ruderal C32 Non-ruderal D5 Dry heath/acidic grassland mosiac X E11 Sphagnum Bog E21 Acid/neutral flush E32 Basin Mire F1 Swamp F22 Inundation vegetation G1 Standing water X G2 Running water I21 Quarry I22 Spoil I24 Refuse tip J11 Arable J112 Allotments J113 Set-aside J12 Amenity grassland
59
Page 162 Appendix 2: Habitat Classifications for Woodland, Wetland and Grassland Categories
HABCODE Linear Habitat description Woodland Wetland Grassland A21 Linear Scrub X A3 Linear Trees X J23 Hedge with Trees G1 Intact Hedge X J21 Standing X J23 Hedge with Trees X
60
Page 163 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 8
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2013
Subject: Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Area Designation Lead Officer: Fiona Blundell Contact on 01789 260333 Lead Member Portfolio Holder: Councillor C Saint
Summary The report provides information on Neighbourhood Planning and its process. It summarises the consultation representations received in relation to the proposed Alcester Neighbourhood Plan and recommends designating the Neighbourhood Plan Area as submitted by Alcester Town Council. This will enable the formal preparation of the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan. Recommendation That the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Area be designated as submitted in Appendix 1.
1. Background/Information 1.1 The District Council has carried out consultation on the area application submitted by Alcester Town Council for the formal designation of an Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Area. The Neighbourhood Plan area comprises Alcester Parish. A copy of the area application is attached to this report as Appendix 1 . 2 What is a Neighbourhood Plan? 2.1 Once adopted, a Neighbourhood Plan will form part of the statutory Local Plan for the area. Consequently, the Local Planning Authority is required to make decisions in accordance with the Neighbourhood Plan, unless material considerations indicate otherwise; in the same manner by which it makes decisions in accordance with the Development Plan. A Neighbourhood Plan is therefore a significant planning document, which may be prepared by a Town or Parish Council, or combination of parishes, (or Neighbourhood Forum in non-parished areas) with the local communities. The Plan is able to set out policies on development and planning policies in response to local issues. A Neighbourhood Plan is required to be in general conformity with the Development Plan policies and the National Planning Policy Framework. 2.2 There are a number of key procedural stages involved in the Neighbourhood Planning process. These include the following: • Designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area • Pre-submission consultation and publicity of the Plan • Submission of the Plan to the Local Planning Authority • Consideration of the Plan by the Local Planning Authority relating to its conformity with the Development Plan
Page 165 • Consideration of the Plan by an Independent Examiner • Referendum of the local community • Adoption of the Neighbourhood Plan if ‘sound’. 3. Designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area 3.1 The designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area is the first formal stage in the plan making process. 3.2 The Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012 requires that a valid application for a Neighbourhood Plan designation includes the following information:- • a map which identifies the area to which the area application relates; • a statement explaining why this area is considered appropriate to be designated as a neighbourhood area; and • a statement that the organisation or body making the area application is a relevant body for the purposes of Section 61G of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 (as Amended). 3.3 The application contains a map which shows the proposed Neighbourhood Plan area. Alcester Town Council qualifies as a relevant body to submit an area application to the Local Planning Authority. 3.4 The area application also includes a statement to explain why the area is considered appropriate as a Neighbourhood area. Alcester Town Council considers that ‘the Proposed Neighbourhood Area covers all the land within the administrative boundaries of Alcester Town Council. In determining the application for designation, the local planning authority must have regard to the desirability of designating the whole of the area of a Parish Council as a Neighbourhood and desirability of maintaining the boundaries as published in the (SDC) Parish Boundary Review.’ 3.5 Consultation has been carried out on the proposed area application in line with the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. The consultation period commenced on 10 October 2013 and finished on 22 November 2013. 3.6 The consultation was carried out by publishing a copy of the area application on the District Council’s website. A public notice was placed in the Stratford Herald, Stratford Observer, Redditch Advertiser, Redditch Standard and the Alcester Chronicle. It was also displayed on the Stratforward Business Improvement District website. In addition, an email notification was sent to all stakeholders and interested parties, in accordance with Schedule 1 of the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. A copy of the area application and the public notice was also displayed in the Stratford-upon-Avon and Alcester libraries. Furthermore, laminated copies of the proposed area map and public notice were also sent out to the Town Council for distribution in the Town by the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Group. A press release was also sent to the radio stations Touch FM and BBC Coventry and Warwickshire. 3.7 Five consultation representations were received which were in support of the area application. The statutory consultees comprising Natural England and English Heritage have raised no objections and provided some generic guidance. All responses have been forwarded to the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Steering Group. 3.8 When determining an area application, the Council is required to consider how desirable it is to designate the whole of the Parish area as a
Page 166 Neighbourhood area; to maintain the existing boundaries of areas already designated as Neighbourhood areas; and to consider whether it is appropriate to designate the area as a Business area in accordance with Section 61 G and H of the Town and Country Planning Act (TCPA) 1990. 3.9 To assess the appropriateness of any proposed Neighbourhood area, the Local Planning Authority must ensure that Neighbourhood areas are coherent, consistent and appropriate in planning terms. As well as considering consultation representations, other factors may be taken into account. These may include the following: • any natural or man-made features (such as rivers or mountains, roads, railway lines or canals); • catchment areas for current and planned infrastructure and services (e.g. schools); • development proposals and allocations and environmental designations. 3.10 Consideration should be given as to whether there would be any overlapping of Neighbourhood Plan areas. The proposed area comprises the existing Parish boundary, so there would be no overlapping with an adjacent Neighbourhood boundary. 3.11 Section 61H of the TCPA 1990 states that in deciding to designate a Neighbourhood Area, Local Authorities should consider that the area is wholly or predominantly business in nature. Given that the proposed area comprises the existing Alcester Parish, it would not be appropriate to designate it as a Business area. 3.12 Government guidance from the Planning Advisory Service states that unless there are valid planning reasons, Local Planning Authorities should approve area applications. 4. Options available to The Cabinet 4.1 The following options are available in relation to the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan: Option 1 To approve the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Area so that it may be designated as such and enable the further development of the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan. Option 2 To refuse the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan Area designation and to publish a notice of its refusal on the District Council’s website in line with the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. 5. Implications of the Proposal 5.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 5.1.1 The Localism Act 2011 places a legal requirement on the District Council to assist and support local communities in the preparation of Neighbourhood Plans. 5.1.2 Neighbourhood Plans must however be compatible with EU obligations and Human Rights requirements together with such plans having regard to National Planning policy and be in general conformity with strategic policies in the development plan for the area.
Page 167 5.1.3 The District Council is under a duty to bring them into force, following examination of the Neighbourhood Plan by an independent qualified person, confirming that conditions in 6.1.2 have been met and thereafter such plans have been passed by a local referendum. 5.2 Financial 5.2.1 The Department of Communities and Local Government has provided funding to Local Authorities, to enable them to fulfil their statutory duty to ‘assist and support’ local communities in the preparation of Neighbourhood Plans. Any additional costs will be met within existing resources. 5.3 Environmental 5.3.1 Neighbourhood Plans are not required to carry out the type of sustainability appraisal necessary for a development plan document as required by the Town and Country Planning Act 2004. There may be the need to carry out a Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) depending on the content of the Neighbourhood Plan. Local Planning Authorities are advised to undertake an early SEA screening of the Plan to determine whether it is required. However, it is not required for the consideration of an area application. 5.4 Corporate Strategy 5.4.1 The designation of a Neighbourhood area is the first formal step in the production of a Neighbourhood Plan. As such, it will contribute towards Aim One ‘Addressing local housing need’ and Aim Three ‘Improving access to services’ of the Stratford-on-Avon District Council’s Corporate Strategy. Through the preparation of a Neighbourhood Plan for Alcester, its residents may have more influence over development and decisions that affect their area. 5.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 5.5.1 No issues identified. 6. Risk Assessment 6.1 Government guidance produced by the Planning Advisory Service states that unless there are valid planning reasons, local authorities should approve area applications. If the Council decides to refuse the application it must publish its decision and statement of reasons. Any decision to refuse the area application should be founded on robust reasoning or the Council would be subject to a legal challenge. 7. Conclusion 7.1 An area application has been submitted by Alcester Town Council for the designation of the Parish of Alcester as a Neighbourhood Plan Area by the District Council. This is the first formal stage in the Neighbourhood Planning process and if adopted, it will enable the further development of the Alcester Neighbourhood Plan.
Paul Lankester CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Page 168 Item 8 Appendix 1 Alcester Parish Neighbourhood plan
______
Neighbourhood Area Application September 2013
______Produced By Alcester Town Council
Page 169 Introduction
Under Section 61G of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 as amended by the Localism Act 2012 (c.20 sch. 9 Para. 2), Alcester Town Council as the ‘relevant body’, hereby formally submits an application to Stratford-on-Avon District Council as the local planning authority, for the designation of a neighbourhood area pursuant to the preparation of a Neighbourhood Plan.
Background
Back in June 2012 Alcester Town Council at its full Council meeting proposed to begin initial workshops to begin the process of collecting views and ideas of the local community in order to begin formulating its Neighbourhood plan, these took place during the following months. In June 2013 it was then proposed to Full Council to put together a Steering Committee to drive the formulation of the Neighbourhood Plan reporting to a Designated Neighbourhood Forum.
Terms of Reference have been drawn up for both the Steering Committee and the Designated Neighbourhood Forum to work to and they will begin work once the Designated Neighbourhood Area has been defined, which is accepted as the first formal step in the process of producing the Neighbourhood Plan.
Under Part 2 Regulation 5 of the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012, Alcester Town Council hereby submit an application to define their parish boundary as the Neighbourhood Area, and this report will explain why this area is considered appropriate to be designated as a Neighbourhood Area.
The Application
According to Regulation 5 of the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012, the following information needs to be submitted:
a. a map which identifies the area to which the area application relates; b. a statement explaining why this area is considered appropriate to be designated as a neighbourhood area; and c. a statement that the organisation or body making the area application is a relevant body for the purposes of section 61G of the 1990 Town and Country Planning Act (as amended by the Localism Act 2012).
According to the Parish Boundary review as conducted by Stratford-on-Avon District Council, Alcester Town Council are submitting the area identified in that report as Alcester Parish for the Designated Neighbourhood Area, and a map has been attached to this Report to show the area this application relates to.
The Proposed Neighbourhood Area covers all the land within the administrative Boundaries of Alcester Town Council. In determining the application for designation, the local planning authority must have regard to the desirability of designating the whole of the area of a parish Council as a Neighbourhood and the desirability of maintaining the boundaries as published in the parish
Page 170 Boundary review. Under Sch. 9 of Section 61G (7) of the Localism Act 2012 the Neighbourhood Areas may not overlap and by using Alcester Town Council’s Parish Boundary this should avoid any potential overlaps with surrounding parishes in the future. Therefore it is felt that there are no compelling reasons why the Neighbourhood Area as indicated in the attached Map should not be given favourable consideration.
Under Section 61G of the 1990 Town and Country Planning Act (as amended by the Localism Act 2012) a relevant body is defined as a Parish Council or an organisation or body which is, or is capable of being designated a Neighbourhood Forum. As the leading organisation in the formulation of the Neighbourhood Plan, Alcester Town Council, as a Parish Council, are considered the relevant body for the purposes of this process and are therefore authorised under Section 61(G) 2(a) of the 1990 Town and Country Planning Act (as amended by the Localism Act 2012).
Conclusion
For the reasons outlined above, the proposed Neighbourhood Area as shown on the attached Map, is considered to be appropriate and justified and the ‘relevant body’ for the purposes of this application.
The Town Council therefore respectfully requests that the District Council processes this application in accordance with Regulation 6 of the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012.
Page 171 © Crown Copyright and database rights 2013. Ordnance Survey 100024287.
Wards AlcesterPage 172 Item 9
THE CABINET 13 January 2014
Subject: Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan Area Designation Lead Officer: Fiona Blundell Contact on 01789 260333 Lead Member Portfolio Holder: Councillor C Saint
Summary The report provides information on neighbourhood planning and its process. It summarises the consultation representations received in relation to the proposed Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan and recommends designating the Neighbourhood Plan Area as submitted by Bishops Itchington Parish Council. This will enable the formal preparation of the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan. Recommendation That the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan Area be designated as submitted in Appendix 1 and 2.
1. Background/Information 1.1 The District Council has carried out consultation on the area application submitted by Bishops Itchington Parish Council for the formal designation of a Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan Area. The Neighbourhood Plan area comprises whole of Bishops Itchington parish. A copy of the area application is attached to this report as Appendix 1 and 2 . 2 What is a Neighbourhood Plan? 2.1 Once adopted, a Neighbourhood Plan will form part of the statutory Local Plan for the area. Consequently, the Local Planning Authority is required to make decisions in accordance with the Neighbourhood Plan, unless material considerations indicate otherwise; in the same manner by which it makes decisions in accordance with the Development Plan. A Neighbourhood Plan is therefore a significant planning document, which may be prepared by a Town or Parish Council, or combination of Parishes, (or Neighbourhood Forum in non-parished areas) with the local communities. The Plan is able to set out policies on development and planning policies in response to local issues. A Neighbourhood Plan is required to be in general conformity with the Development Plan policies and the National Planning Policy Framework.
2.2 There are a number of key procedural stages involved in the Neighbourhood Planning process. These include the following: • Designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area • Presubmission consultation and publicity of the Plan • Submission of the Plan to the Local Planning Authority
Page 173 • Consideration of the Plan by the Local Planning Authority relating to its conformity with the Development Plan • Consideration of the Plan by an Independent Examiner • Referendum of the local community • Adoption of the Neighbourhood Plan if ‘sound’. 3. Designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area 3.1 The designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area is the first formal stage in the plan making process. 3.2 The Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012 requires that an valid application for a Neighbourhood Plan designation includes the following information; • a map which identifies the area to which the area application relates; • a statement explaining why this area is considered appropriate to be designated as a neighbourhood area, and; • a statement that the organisation or body making the area application is a relevant body for the purposes of Section 61G of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 (as Amended). 3.3 The application contains a map which shows the proposed Neighbourhood Plan area. Bishops Itchington Parish Council qualifies as a relevant body to submit an area application to the Local Planning Authority. 3.4 The area application also includes a statement to explain why the area is considered appropriate as a neighbourhood area. Bishops Itchington Parish Council considers ‘that the Parish of Bishops Itchington in its entirety is an appropriate and logical area to include within the Plan.’ 3.5 Consultation has been carried out on the proposed area application in line with the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. The consultation period commenced on 10 October 2013 and finished on 22 November 2013. 3.6 The consultation was carried out by publishing a copy of the area application on the District Council’s website. A public notice was placed in the Stratford Herald, Stratford Observer, Leamington Courier and Southam News newspapers. It was also displayed on the Stratforward Business Improvement District website. In addition, an email notification was sent to all stakeholders and interested parties, in accordance with Schedule 1 of the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. A copy of the area application and the public notice were also displayed in the Stratford- upon-Avon and Harbury libraries. Furthermore, laminated copies of the proposed area map and public notice were also sent out to the Parish Council, for distribution in the town by the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan Group. A press release was also sent to the radio stations Touch FM and BBC Coventry and Warwickshire. 3.7 Six consultation representations were received in support of the area application. The statutory consultees comprising Natural England and English Heritage have raised no objections and provided some generic guidance. Network Rail has also provided some recommendations relating to future development which may impact on their land and assets. All responses have been forwarded to the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan Steering Group. 3.8 When determining an area application, the Council is required to consider how desirable it is to designate the whole of the parish area as a
Page 174 neighbourhood area; to maintain the existing boundaries of areas already designated as neighbourhood areas; and to consider whether it is appropriate to designate the area as a business area in accordance with Section 61G and H of the Town and Country Planning Act (TCPA) 1990. 3.9 To assess the appropriateness of any proposed neighbourhood area, the Local Planning Authority must ensure that neighbourhood areas are coherent, consistent and appropriate in planning terms. As well as considering consultation representations, other factors may be taken into account. These may include the following • any natural or man-made features (such as rivers or mountains, roads, railway lines or canals); • catchment areas for current and planned infrastructure and services (e.g. schools); • development proposals and allocations and environmental designations. 3.10 Consideration should be given to whether there would be any overlapping of Neighbourhood Plan areas. The proposed area is comprises the existing Parish boundary, so there would be no overlapping with an adjacent neighbourhood boundary. 3.11 Section 61H of the TCPA 1990 states that in deciding to designate a Neighbourhood Area, Local Authorities should consider that the area is wholly or predominantly business in nature. Given that the proposed area comprises the existing Bishops Itchington Parish, it would not be appropriate to designate it as a business area. 3.12 Government guidance from the Planning Advisory Service states that unless there are valid planning reasons, Local Planning Authorities should approve area applications. 4. Options available to The Cabinet 4.1 The following options are available in relation to the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan: Option 1 To approve the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan area so that it may be designated as such, and enable the further development of the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan. Option 2 To refuse the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan area designation and to publish a notice of its refusal on the District Council’s website in line with the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. 5. Implications of the Proposal 5.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 5.1.1 The Localism Act 2011 places a legal requirement on the District Council to assist and support local communities in the preparation of neighbourhood plans. 5.1.2 Neighbourhood Plans must however be compatible with EU obligations and Human Rights requirements together with such plans having regard to national planning policy and be in general conformity with strategic policies in the development plan for the area.
Page 175 5.1.3 The District Council is under a duty to bring them into force, following examination of the Neighbourhood Plan by an independent qualified person, confirming that conditions in 6.1.2 have been met and thereafter such plans have been passed by a local referendum. 5.2 Financial 5.2.1 The Department of Communities and Local Government has provided funding to Local Authorities, to enable them to fulfil their statutory duty to ‘assist and support’ local communities in the preparation of neighbourhood plans. Any additional costs will be met within existing resources. 5.3 Environmental 5.3.1 Neighbourhood Plans are not required to carry out the type of sustainability appraisal necessary for a development plan document as required by the Town and Country Planning Act 2004. There may be the need to carry out a Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) depending on the content of the Neighbourhood Plan. Local Planning Authorities are advised to undertake an early SEA screening of the plan to determine whether it is required. However, it is not required for the consideration of an area application. 5.4 Corporate Strategy 5.4.1 The designation of a neighbourhood area is the first formal step in the production of a neighbourhood plan. As such, it will contribute towards Aim One ‘Addressing local housing need’ and Aim Three ‘Improving access to services’ of the Stratford-on-Avon District Council’s Corporate Strategy‘. Through the preparation of a neighbourhood plan for Bishops Itchington, its residents may have more influence over development and decisions that affects their area.
5.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 5.5.1 No issues identified. 6. Risk Assessment 6.1 Government guidance produced by the Planning Advisory Service states that unless there are valid planning reasons, local authorities should approve area applications. If the Council decides to refuse the application, it must publish its decision and statement of reasons. Any decision to refuse the area application should be founded on robust reasoning or the Council would be subject to a legal challenge. 7. Conclusion 7.1 An area application has been submitted by Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan Parish Council for the designation of the Parish of Bishops Itchington as a Neighbourhood Plan Area by the District Council. This is the first formal stage in the neighbourhood planning process and if adopted, it will enable the further development of the Bishops Itchington Neighbourhood Plan.
Paul Lankester CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Page 176 Item 9 Appendix 1
Mrs Alison Biddle MILCM Clerk to the Council
The Planning Policy Team SDC Elizabeth House Church Street Stratford on Avon CV37 6HX
18 September 2013
Dear Sir,
Application for the designation of a neighbourhood plan area
Bishop’s Itchington Parish Council (BIPC) hereby formally applies to Stratford-on-Avon District Council for designation of a neighbourhood area in accordance with Regulation 5 of The Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012.
In compliance with the requirements of Regulation 5 we include a map identifying the area to which the application relates.
We also confirm that the parish council considers that the parish of Bishop’s Itchington in its entirety is an appropriate and logical area to include within the plan. It is recognised that there will be a need to consult with our neighbouring parishes, in particular with Harbury where a potential planning site straddles the boundary between our two parishes but it is not intended to include any part of Harbury parish in the defined area.
This application for designation of a neighbourhood area is submitted by Bishop’s Itchington Parish Council which , as a parish council, is a relevant body for the purposes of this matter defined as such under Section 61G (2) of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990.
Bishop’s Itchington Parish Council has initiated a neighbourhood plan steering group which comprises local residents, landowners and parish councillors. This group will take the lead in preparing the neighbourhood plan for this area and has the parish council’s full support.
Brewster’s Corner Pendicke Street Southam Warwickshire CV47 1PN
telephone 01926 811394 Page 177 email [email protected] website www.bishopsitchington-pc.gov.uk
BIPC formally requests that Stratford-on-Avon District Council, as the local planning authority, publicises this application in accordance with Regulation 6 of The Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. We can confirm that no previous application has been made for this area.
Yours faithfully,
Alison Biddle Clerk to the Council
Page 178
Bishops Itchington CP Date: 18-9-2013 Scale: 1:34390
Map Centre - easting / northing: © Contains Ordnance Survey Data : Crown 439110 / 256842 copyright and database right 2013 Page 179 Page Item 9 Appendix 2 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 10
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2013
Subject: Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Area Designation Lead Officer: Fiona Blundell Contact on 01789 260333 Lead Member Portfolio Holder: Councillor C Saint
Summary The report provides information on neighbourhood planning and its process. It summarises the consultation representations received in relation to the proposed Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan and recommends designating the Neighbourhood Plan Area as submitted by Snitterfield Parish Council. This will enable the formal preparation of the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan. Recommendation That the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Area be designated as submitted in Appendix 1 and 2.
1. Background/Information 1.1 The District Council has carried out consultation on the area application submitted by Snitterfield Parish Council for the formal designation of a Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Area. The Neighbourhood Plan Area comprises Snitterfield Parish. A copy of the area application is attached to this report as Appendix 1 and 2 . 2 What is a Neighbourhood Plan? 2.1 Once adopted, a Neighbourhood Plan will form part of the statutory Local Plan for the area. Consequently, the Local Planning Authority is required to make decisions in accordance with the Neighbourhood Plan, unless material considerations indicate otherwise; in the same manner by which it makes decisions in accordance with the Development Plan. A Neighbourhood Plan is therefore a significant planning document, which may be prepared by a Town or Parish Council, or combination of Parishes, (or Neighbourhood Forum in non-Parished areas) with the local communities. The Plan is able to set out policies on development and planning policies in response to local issues. A Neighbourhood Plan is required to be in general conformity with the Development Plan policies and the National Planning Policy Framework. 2.2 There are a number of key procedural stages involved in the Neighbourhood Planning process. These include the following: • Designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area; • Presubmission consultation and publicity of the Plan; • Submission of the Plan to the Local Planning Authority;
Page 181 • Consideration of the Plan by the Local Planning Authority relating to its conformity with the Development Plan; • Consideration of the Plan by an Independent Examiner; • Referendum of the local community; • Adoption of the Neighbourhood Plan if ‘sound’. 3. Designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area 3.1 The designation of a Neighbourhood Plan Area is the first formal stage in the plan making process. 3.2 The Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012 requires that a valid application for a Neighbourhood Plan designation includes the following information; • a map which identifies the area to which the area application relates; • a statement explaining why this area is considerate appropriate to be designated as a Neighbourhood Area, and; • a statement that the organisation or body making the area application is a relevant body for the purposes of Section 61G of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 (as Amended). 3.3 The application contains a map which shows the proposed Neighbourhood Plan Area. Snitterfield Parish Council qualifies as a relevant body to submit an area application to the Local Planning Authority. 3.4 The area application also includes a statement to explain why the area is considered appropriate as a Neighbourhood Area. Snitterfield Parish Council considers that ‘our Parish Boundary to be appropriate to define the Neighbourhood Plan Area as this encompasses the village Of Snitterfield and its environs, and is the area that is relevant to our local community for neighbourhood planning.’ 3.5 Consultation has been carried out on the proposed area application in line with the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. The consultation period commenced on 17 October 2013 and finished on 29 November 2013. 3.6 The consultation was carried out by publishing a copy of the area application on the District Council’s website. A public notice was placed in the Stratford Herald, Stratford Observer newspapers. It was also displayed on the Stratforward Business Improvement District website. In addition, an email notification was sent to all stakeholders and interested parties, in accordance with Schedule 1 of the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. A copy of the area application and the public notice were also displayed in the Stratford-upon-Avon and Shipston-on-Stour libraries. Furthermore, laminated copies of the proposed area map and public notice were also sent out to the Parish Council, for distribution in the town by the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Group. A press release was also sent to the radio stations Touch FM and Coventry and Warwickshire. 3.7 Seven consultation representations were received in response to the area application. Natural England has raised no objections and provided some generic guidance. All responses have been forwarded to the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Steering Group.
Page 182 3.8 When determining an area application, the Council is required to consider how desirable it is to designate the whole of the Parish area as a Neighbourhood Area; to maintain the existing boundaries of areas already designated as Neighbourhood Areas; and to consider whether it is appropriate to designate the area as a Business Area in accordance with Section 61G and H of the Town and Country Planning Act (TCPA) 1990. 3.9 To assess the appropriateness of any proposed Neighbourhood Area, the Local Planning Authority must ensure that Neighbourhood Areas are coherent, consistent and appropriate in planning terms. As well as considering consultation representations, other factors may be taken into account. These may include the following • any natural or man-made features (such as rivers or mountains, roads, railway lines or canals); • catchment areas for current and planned infrastructure and services (e.g. schools); • development proposals and allocations and environmental designations. 3.10 Consideration should be given to whether there would be any overlapping of Neighbourhood Plan Areas. The proposed area comprises the existing Parish boundary, so there would be no overlapping with an adjacent neighbourhood boundary. 3.11 Section 61H of the TCPA 1990 states that in deciding to designate a Neighbourhood Area, Local Authorities should consider that the area is wholly or predominantly business in nature. Given that the proposed area comprises the existing Snitterfield Parish, it would not be appropriate to designate it as a business area. 3.12 Government guidance from the Planning Advisory Service states that unless there are valid planning reasons, Local Planning Authorities should approve area applications. 4. Options available to the Cabinet 4.1 The following options are available in relation to the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan: Option 1 To approve the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Area so that it may be designated as such, and enable the further development of the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan. Option 2 To refuse the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan Area designation and to publish a notice of its refusal on the District Council’s website in line with the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2012. 5. Members’ Comments 5.1 No comments received. 6. Implications of the Proposal 6.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 6.1.1 The Localism Act 2011 places a legal requirement on the District Council to assist and support local communities in the preparation of Neighbourhood Plans.
Page 183 6.1.2 Neighbourhood Plans must however be compatible with EU obligations and Human Rights requirements together with such plans having regard to national planning policy and be in general conformity with strategic policies in the development plan for the area. 6.1.3 The District Council is under a duty to bring them into force, following examination of the Neighbourhood Plan by an independent qualified person, confirming that conditions in 6.1.2 have been met and thereafter such plans have been passed by a local referendum. 6.2 Financial 6.2.1 The Department of Communities and Local Government has provided funding to Local Authorities, to enable them to fulfil their statutory duty to ‘assist and support’ local communities in the preparation of Neighbourhood Plans. Any additional costs will be met within existing resources. 6.3 Environmental 6.3.1 Neighbourhood Plans are not required to carry out the type of sustainability appraisal necessary for a development plan document as required by the Town and Country Planning Act 2004. There may be the need to carry out a Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) depending on the content of the neighbourhood plan. Local Planning Authorities are advised to undertake an early SEA screening of the plan to determine whether it is required. However, it is not required for the consideration of an area application. 6.4 Corporate Strategy 6.4.1 The designation of a Neighbourhood Area is the first formal step in the production of a Neighbourhood Plan. As such, it will contribute towards Aim One ‘Addressing local housing need’ and Aim Three ‘Improving access to services’ of the Stratford-on-Avon District Council’s Corporate Strategy‘. Through the preparation of a Neighbourhood Plan for Snitterfield, its residents may have more influence over development and decisions that affects their area. 6.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 6.5.1 No issues identified. 7. Risk Assessment 7.1 Government guidance produced by the Planning Advisory Service states that unless there are valid planning reasons, local authorities should approve area applications. If the Council decides to refuse the application, it must publish its decision and statement of reasons. Any decision to refuse the area application should be founded on robust reasoning or the Council would be subject to a legal challenge. 8. Conclusion 8.1 An area application has been submitted by Snitterfield Parish Council for the designation of the Parish of Snitterfield as a Neighbourhood Plan Area by the District Council. This is the first formal stage in the neighbourhood planning process and if adopted, it will enable the further development of the Snitterfield Neighbourhood Plan.
Paul Lankester CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Page 184 Item 10 Appendix 1
SNITTERFIELD PARISH COUNCIL
Clerk to the Council: Mr I A Wilkins, 21 Flower Road, Stratford upon Avon, Warwickshire, CV37 OEA Telephone: 01789 266665
sth Septembe r 2A1B
The Policy Manager Strafford on Avon District Council Elizabeth House Church Street Stratford upon Avon Warwickshire CV37 6HX
This is a formal application from the Neighbourhood Plan Committee of the Snitterfield Parish Councilto Stratford on Avon District Councilto have our Parish formally designated as a Neighbourhood Plan Area under Part 2, Regulation 5, of the Neighbourhood Planning (General) Regulations 2O12. The regulation states that an application submitted to the local planning authority must include:
(a) a map which identifies the area to which the area application relates; (b) a statement explaining why this area is considered appropriate to be designated as a neighbourhood area; and (c) a statement that the organisation or body making the area application is a relevant body for the purposes of section 61G of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 (as amended)
The followinq is submitted:
(a) A map showing the area delineated by the boundary of the Parish is attached
(b) We consider our Parish boundary to be appropriate to define the Neighbourhood Plan Area as this encompasses the village of Snitterfield and its environs, and is the area that is relevant to our local community for neighbourhood planning.
(c) Under Section 61G (2) of the Town and Country Act 1990, a relevant body is defined as a parish council or an organisation or body which is, or is capable of being designated as a neighbourhood forum. This application is submitted by Snitterfield Parish Councilwhich is considered to be a relevant body for the purposes of this application and is, therefore, authorised under Section 61G (2).
lan A, Wilkins Clerk of Snitterfield Parish Council
Page 185 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 10 Appendix 2
0
© Crown copyright and database rights 2013. Ordnance Survey 100030484.
SnitterfiePageld 187 Parish This page has been left intentionally blank Item 11
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012 Lead Officer: Fiona Blundell Contact on 01789 260333
Lead Member: Councillor C Saint
Summary This report sets out the assessment of Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012.
Recommendation
That Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012 (shown in Appendix 4 and 5) be adopted as a material consideration when determining planning applications, in accordance with the provisions of the Local Plan Review and as an important source of local information.
1 Background/Information 1.1 Parish Plans are community led projects, identifying and surveying the assets, needs, opportunities, problems and solutions of a community. Through ‘capacity’ and ‘consensus building’, Parish Plans provide communities with a framework to take stock of the present and plan for the future. 1.2 Parish Plans are continuing to be produced by the communities in the District. Many communities in the District have completed or are in the process of reviewing existing Parish Plans with associated recommendations and Action Plans. Further background information on the process is included in Appendix 1.
2 Background to the submitted Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012 2.1 At an Annual Parish Meeting in 2010, Lighthorne Parish Council invited residents to volunteer to form a steering group to prepare a parish plan. A survey questionnaire was hand-delivered to 230 residential properties in the parish in Spring 2011. The findings were presented at a public meeting at the Village Hall in August 2011. 2.2 150 households completed the questionnaire survey which provided a response rate of 68%. 263 adults and 46 children gave their views as part of the survey. The adults’ response rate was 68% based on the number of registered electors in the Parish.
Page 189 3 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012 findings 3.1 The findings of the Parish Plan ( Appendix 4 ) which have informed the Action Plan include the following chapters: The Parish of Lighthorne History of Lighthorne Housing and Development Traffic and Transport Neighbourhood and Environment Community and local facilities Communications Youth and Children’s issues Utilities Redlands Park
4 Lighthorne Parish Plan 4.1 The analysis and responses to the Action Plan are provided in Appendix 2 and the following analysis should be read in conjunction with the Lighthorne Parish Plan Action Plan. 4.2 Lighthorne Parish Plan was submitted as a draft report to the District Council. Following negotiations the Action Plan has been amended so that it is set out in a ‘smart objectives’ format. The actions have been prioritised with timescales and identified partnership working and responsibilities. This is attached as Appendix 5 . 4.3 The policy position of the Local Plan Review and the emerging Core Strategy is supportive of the principles set out in the Lighthorne Parish Plan, together with many of the actions set out in the Action Plan. 4.4 The District Council and County Council may offer advice and support in undertaking some of the actions. For example, certain projects may be eligible for County Council Community Development Funding, which is administered by the Stratford Area Team. Warwickshire Rural Community Council is supportive of the actions. The SDC Consultation Manager considers that there was a good response rate to the questionnaire and it was helpful to see youth and children issues incorporated in the Parish Plan. 4.5 Appendix 3 of this report sets out the criteria used to assess the Lighthorne Parish Plan together with the details of the responses available to the action plan.
5 Options available to The Cabinet 5.1 The following options are available:- • To adopt the Parish Plan fully;
Page 190 • To suggest amendments to the Plan if there is concern about certain aspects of the Parish Plan; or
• To not adopt the Parish Plan.
6 Members’ Comments 6.1 None received.
7 Implications of the proposal 7.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 7.1.1 If adopted, the Parish Plan will become a material consideration to be taken into account by the District Council when determining planning applications. The Parish Plan does not conflict with the District Council’s current Local Plan and consultation is in accordance with the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) (England) Regulations 2004 and the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) (England) (Amendment) Regulations 2008. 7.1.2 When considering adopting the Parish Plan The Cabinet must have regard to the following: 7.1.3 The Human Rights Act 1998 (in particular, Article 6 - Right to a Fair Trial, Article 8 - Right to respect for private and family life and Article 14 - Prohibition of discrimination); and 7.1.4 The Race Relations Act 1996 as amended by the Race Relations Act (Amendments) Act 2000 (‘the Act’), in particular sections 19A (where it is unlawful for a planning authority to discriminate against a person in carrying out their planning functions) and 19B of the Act (where it is unlawful for a public authority in carrying out any functions of the authority to do any act which constitutes discrimination). 7.2 Financial 7.2.1 Projects developed through the Parish Plan may need funding to take them forward. The County Council funds a community development grants scheme aimed at funding these types of projects. It is hoped that the Parish Council and local residents will consider and pursue funding in order to develop their identified actions. There are no financial implications for the District Council. 7.3 Environmental 7.3.1 None identified. 7.4 Corporate Strategy 7.4.1 The production of the Lighthorne Parish Plan supports the four aims of the Corporate Strategy; to address local housing need, to help business and enterprise flourish in the District, to improve access to services and to minimise the impacts of climate change. 7.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 7.5.1 None identified .
Page 191 8 Risk Assessment 8.1 Choosing not to adopt the Parish Plan would risk losing the chance to adopt a valuable source of local information and a useful material consideration to aid planning decision-making.
9 Conclusion 9.1 The Lighthorne Parish Plan is a good example of how a community can prepare a Plan which is both a good source of local information and provides a sound basis through the Action Plan to address the needs and aspirations of the community. It is considered to be consistent with the policy framework established by the current Local Plan Review 1996.
Paul Lankester CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Background papers: Sustainable Community Strategy – Improving the Quality of Life for Everyone- A 2026 Vision for Stratford District. Stratford-on-Avon District Local Plan Review 2006. Stratford-on-Avon District Council Intended Proposed Submission Core Strategy 2013
Page 192 Item 11 Appendix 1
Appendix 1 Further Background Information
1.1 Communities produce Parish Plans for a number of reasons: • To increase the awareness of community issues, foster community spirit and encourage a sense of pride; • To act as a strong basis for local action (the Action Plan); • To collectively represent the views of residents, to positively influence others to the benefit of the community. 1.2 In the 1980s the concept and practice of Village Appraisals first emanated nationally from the Rural Development Commission in conjunction with the Countryside Commission. 1.3 Nationally, Parish Plans have a role to play within the 'modernising Local Government' agenda, for example, shaping local services, public participation, decision-making and greater democratic legitimacy. 1.4 One of the aims within Chapter 12 of the Rural White Paper (Our Countryside: the future – A fair deal for rural England) includes involving people living in rural areas in developing their community, safeguarding its valued features and shaping the decisions that affect them – developing a vision for the future. Parish Plans are a recognised method of achieving this aim. 1.5 In line with guidance from the Countryside Agency issued in August 2000 (‘Planning tomorrow’s countryside’, advice to local planning authorities, government and developers on how the planning system should operate and evolve), Parish Plans are a recognised community planning method to help achieve key objectives. In March 2003 the Countryside Agency produced detailed guidance for Parish and Town Councils on the preparation of Parish and Town Plans. 1.6 Stratford-on-Avon District Council is committed to the encouragement of Parish Plans as a means of identifying local issues and will respond to them positively. Much faith has been placed by the Government, the County Council and the District Council on local appraisals and their role in assisting the formulation of strategic policy. 1.7 Parish Plans can now play a broader role within the production of the statutory Community Plan for Stratford-on-Avon District. 1.8 The recommendations and Action Plans can both inform and help deliver the Rural Strategy for the Stratford-on-Avon District. 1.9 Policy COM.1 of the Stratford-on-Avon District Local Plan 2006 states:- “The views of the local community as expressed preferably in a Parish Plan (or equivalent) or in its absence an alternative source of reliable evidence will be fully taken into account in the planning process. In particular they will be used • To help assess the merits of schemes promoted by communities to meet needs which they have identified; • As a material consideration in the determination of planning applications and to assist in identifying the scope and nature of associated planning obligations which might be sought; and • To identify opportunities for environmental and other forms of enhancement. In the case of Main Rural Centres and Local Centre Villages only, as defined in Policy STR1, small scale schemes which meet housing (particularly affordable housing) and employment needs will be encouraged in this way…”
Page 193
1.10 Nationally, Parish Plans are broad, holistic documents addressing local issues at a local level. Whilst in this District ‘appraisals’ have had a close association with planning, they are no longer 'planning-led'. Parish Plans address both planning and non- planning related matters and this is reflected in their assessment at Committee. 1.11 Parish Plans can and do act as a tool to assist in giving many of the services provided by the District Council greater community focus. In the same way, many of the services provided by the District Council can and do feed into the Parish Plan process creating more informed Action Plans.
Page 194 Item 11 Appendix 2
Appendix 2 Summary of key action points Abbreviations SDC= Stratford District Council WCC= Warwickshire County Council WRCC= Warwickshire Rural Community Council Appendix 1 gives an explanation of what is meant by each suggested response key word.
Lighthorne Parish Plan Recommended Actions SDC Proposed Response
Housing and development Support 1. When considering planning applications, the District Council should be asked to bear in mind: a) the desire to retain the existing character of Lighthorne village as a village nestled in a valley; b) any new development in Lighthorne village should be sympathetic (in terms of design, appearance, scale and distinctiveness) to the existing character of the village; c) any new development in Lighthorne village should have off-road parking as there is a severe shortage of on road parking. Options for providing additional off road parking for existing residents and visitors to Lighthorne should also be investigated; d) the desire to retain Moreton Morrell Lane as a narrow road so as not to encourage more traffic to use this road to access Lighthorne. e) improve drains to reduce the risk of flooding. 2) A sign should be erected at the entrance to Support Moreton Morrell Lane from the Fosse Way to discourage excessive use of this land to access Lighthorne.
Traffic and Transport Support 3) Consider introducing a community lift share scheme.
4) The Parish Council to liaise with the appropriate to Support introduce an effective means of reducing the speed of cars through the village and to liaise with residents of Redlands to consider what can be done to achieve the same in Redlands Park.
5) Discuss with the Redland Park site owner the issues of speeding and whether the entrance/exit could be improved to address the issues raised above. 6) Seek volunteers to prepare a parking code of Support conduct and to consider how best to encourage compliance.
Page 195 Lighthorne Parish Plan Recommended Actions SDC Proposed Response
7) Ask transport partnerships about possibilities to Support improve the frequency of bus services, additional bus stops for Redlands, and routes to Wellesbourne.
8) Ask transport partners about introducing bus stops for Redlands residents on the B4100.
Neighbourhood and Environment Support 9) Continue to Support current methods of communication as well as developing the e- mailing list and a village website.
10) Consider including a guidance note to all Support residents in the conservation area to help them understand their responsibilities.
11) Set up a working party to consider how to make Support it easier for residents to follow the local footpaths (for example, by improving the signposting of paths that are not clearly marked and/or preparing a more detailed map.
Communications Support 12) Parish Council to investigate options for providing safe access to the sports ground as a priority.
13) Investigate the needs of the elderly people in the Support Parish and consider whether changes could be made to improve the facilities and services for elderly residents.
14) Continue to support current methods of Support communication as well as developing the email list and a village website.
Youth and children’s issues Support 15) Prepare a proposal to redevelop the children’s playground with improved equipment, safer surfacing, and to deter vandalism. Investigate how to obtain support and funding to achieve this aim.
16) Investigate ways of maintaining the current Support facilities at the sports-ground and parish council to consider addition of a skate park.
17) Encourage volunteers to organise more youth Support and family friendly events in the Village Hall.
18) Establish improved communication with youth Support and families via website and /or emailing list.
Page 196 Lighthorne Parish Plan Recommended Actions SDC Proposed Response Utilities Support 19) Ask the district council what support they can provide to help parishes like Lighthorne obtain a faster internet service.
20) Find a volunteer to raise the issue with BT.
21) Seek a volunteer to investigate the viability of a Support group fuel purchase scheme and, if appropriate, set up such a scheme.
Page 197 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 11 Appendix 3
Appendix 3 - Guidance for the Assessment of Parish/Town Plans
In assessing Parish Plans, the following considerations should be taken into account:
• Evidence and extent of research work to justify conclusions. • Evidence and extent of analysis related to conclusions. • Public involvement and endorsement at local level. • Level of implementation available to District and County Council services, (e.g. the District Council Planning Authority, Community Services etc.). • Conformity with District and County Council's policies, (e.g. Planning policies etc.)
The above five criteria will enable the production of recommendations regarding the acceptance of each of the Parish Plan’s detailed conclusions and Action Points. A response to each of the detailed conclusions and Action Points will be one of the following: (A) ENDORSE
The specific recommendation will be accepted and taken into account in the decision making of the District Council. (For example, "Small scale development with a 'craft' emphasis should be looked at sympathetically").
(B) ACTION
The specific recommendation will be accepted in principle and, subject to financial, procedural and legal constraints, implemented by or with the support of the District or County Council. (For example, "A social housing scheme of ten units on land next to the Green should be provided").
(C) INVESTIGATE
Further information to be obtained by the Parish/Town Council or other agency may be required in order that the District or County Council may establish if the specific recommendation can be supported. (For example, "An existing Conservation Area should be extended").
(D) SUPPORT
The specific recommendation relates to a matter which is not the responsibility of the District or County Council. However, the proposal is supported and will be forwarded to the appropriate authority, where necessary. (For example, “The Water Authority should be asked to upgrade the drains and reduce the risk of flooding”.)
(E) NOT SUPPORTED
The specific recommendation relates to a matter which is in contrary to the policy of the District or County Council, or is beyond the powers of the authority or that insufficient and/or unsatisfactory information has been submitted to substantiate their recommendation. (For example, "No development of any kind should take place within the settlement").
Page 199 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 11 Appendix 4
LIGHTHORNE Parish Plan 2012
Page 201 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Table of Contents
Introduction...... 3 The Parish of Lighthorne...... 4 History of Lighthorne...... 6 Housing and development...... 8 Traffic and Transport...... 11 Neighbourhood and Environment...... 13 Community and local facilities...... 14 Village Hall...... 14 Post Office...... 14 Sports ground...... 15 St Laurence’s Church...... 15 Other facilities...... 16 Communications...... 17 Youth and children’s issues...... 18 Utilities...... 20 Broadband internet service ...... 20 Energy...... 20 Street lighting...... 20 Redlands Park...... 22 Appendix 1 — History of Lighthorne...... 23
Cover illustration: Church Hill Farm.
December 2013 Page 2 of 23
Page 202 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Introduction
This Parish Plan is part of a nationwide initiative to encourage local people to become more involved in decisions affecting their local community. It reflects the views of those living within the Parish on different aspects of life in Lighthorne and how they would like Lighthorne to develop in the future.
This Plan is also designed to help Stratford-on-Avon District Council (SDC), Warwickshire County Council (WCC) and other local and national bodies to take account of the views of Lighthorne residents when considering: • planning or development proposals affecting our parish, • support and funding for local projects, and • other issues affecting Lighthorne such as the provision of local services.
The Plan includes a number of “actions” where potential improvements have been identified.
At the Annual Parish Meeting in 2010, Lighthorne Parish Council invited residents to volunteer to form a committee to prepare the Parish Plan, taking account of the views of residents. The committee consisted of Tony Cairns, Jess Daniel, Paul Tait and (until Summer 2011) Olivia Broderick. The Committee drew on the expertise of other members of the Parish in preparing the Plan. The Committee started by preparing a questionnaire which included questions on a range of local topics along with space for residents to make their own suggestions and comments. The questionnaires were hand-delivered to all residential properties within Lighthorne Parish in Spring 2011 and the results were presented at a public meeting in the Village Hall in August 2011. The Committee would particularly like to thank Mike Rigby for his help in preparing and analysing the questionnaires.
150 households out of the 230 in the Parish completed the survey, a response rate of 65%. 263 adults and 46 children gave their views as part of the survey. The adult response rate was 68%, based on the number of registered electors in the Parish.
In preparing this Parish Plan we are conscious that the requirements and preferences of residents are likely to vary considerably depending on where people live in the Parish. Where possible we have tried to reflect this in the Plan.
Following a further round of consultation within the Parish and review of the draft Plan by Stratford-on-Avon District Council, the Plan has been approved by the Parish Council.
December 2013 Page 3 of 23
Page 203 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
The Parish of Lighthorne
The Civil Parish of Lighthorne lies in the South Warwickshire countryside, about 8 miles from the towns of Stratford-upon-Avon (to the west) and from Warwick and Royal Leamington Spa (to the north). It includes an area roughly bounded by the Fosse Way, B4100 and C96 (Wellesbourne Road, Bishops Hill, Chesterton Road) with a further area to the east which includes Newbould Barn, Bishops Gorse Farm, Heath Farm, the eastern extent of the village, the sports ground and part of the old quarry land.
Lighthorne itself is a picturesque village, the greater part of which is a Conservation Area (see map). The village of Lighthorne is nestled in a valley with most houses hidden from view as the village is approached from the Wellesbourne and Chesterton Roads.
December 2013 Page 4 of 23
Page 204 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
The Parish includes a range of different properties. The village properties include historic buildings made of local limestone and some more recently built buildings made from a variety of materials. Outside Lighthorne village the main settlement is Redlands Park, a community of mobile homes for older people, but as a rural area there are also established farms and some isolated houses. In total there are some 230 residential properties in the Parish.
As a relatively small rural community, Lighthorne Parish has a number of disadvantages compared to towns and larger villages in the area. There is no shop or health centre, public transport is limited (and effectively non-existent for most residents outside Lighthorne village) and the facilities for young people are poor. The broadband service suffers because of the distance from the Moreton Morrell telephone exchange.
An important issue for Lighthorne, and indeed for the whole country, is addressing the needs of the elderly who are no longer capable of looking after themselves without extra support. Around 180 of the 263 adult respondents to the survey are already over age 50 so these needs are likely to increase in the future. At the other end of the age scale we must also consider the needs of families with children (in total the respondents had 48 children under 17).
On the positive side, Lighthorne has a very strong community spirit with a large number of activities organised throughout the year. These activities are only possible because of the residents who volunteer to organise them. For these (or other) activities to continue in the future we will need new volunteers to get involved.
December 2013 Page 5 of 23
Page 205 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
History of Lighthorne
As a settlement, Lighthorne has existed for more than four thousand years. Successive occupiers have left traces of their time here; burials and other remains from the Neolithic, Iron Age, Roman, Anglian and early Christian periods have been found within the parish. Lighthorne village is located in a steep-sided natural valley, where a stream has eroded its course through the limestone, exposing the clays of the Midland plain. The junction of the two rock types forms a natural spring line and this is the feature which attracted the early settlers to the secluded valley.
Baker's Hill Well. The Broadwell.
The historic heart of Lighthorne is a Conservation Area, broadly defined as the valley extending in a west-to- east direction from Church Hill Farm in the west, through the village green, to Curacy Farm in the east. Included in this are two important areas which characterise the village, namely the area around Church Hill Farm, the Church and the Old Rectory, and the village green area, including Smithy Cottage, the Antelope pub, Bishops Farm House and Smithy Cottage. Dene Hollow.
December 2013 Page 6 of 23
Page 206 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
7th ● Hwicce tribe settle and give Lighthorne its name Century ● Lighthorne area incorporated into Bishopric of Worcester
● Lighthorne passes to 1st Earl of Warwick, Henry de Newburgh. 11th to 16th Changes hands many times over next 6 centuries. Centuries ● Church Hill Farmhouse built (1548)
● Lighthorne becomes the property of Lord Willoughby de Broke 18th ● Lighthorne becomes an estate village. Most old buildings date from this time Century ● 1773 – Church rebuilt; thought to incorporate glass from Compton Verney
● Verney estates broken up and sold by auction in the 1920s. 20th Only one household listed as having electric lighting. Century ● Millennium village sign erected
A more detailed summary of the history of Lighthorne is set out in “Appendix 1 — History of Lighthorne” on page 23.
Millennium Village Sign.
December 2013 Page 7 of 23
Page 207 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Housing and development
A breakdown of property types for those who responded to this question is as follows: Owner occupied 121 Rented – Housing Association 11 Rented – Private 8 Shared ownership 1 Provided by employment 1
Two attractive features of Lighthorne village are that the village houses are mainly built of matching local stone and nestled in the valley, obscured from view until visitors enter the village. First time visitors to Lighthorne are often surprised by the picturesque aspect as they drive into the village. There is a general view that it is important to retain these attractive features.
An example of sympathetic development.
Development in Lighthorne village has been restricted by the topography. The village is quite compact with gaps between houses having been “in-filled” over the years. 125 survey respondents said that Lighthorne could not accommodate further development and a further 58 respondents thought that Lighthorne could only accommodate single or small groups of houses. There were different views on the types of property that could be built:
December 2013 Page 8 of 23
Page 208 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Number of Percentage of Property type Respondents Respondents Affordable homes 37 14% Retirement houses 29 11% Family houses 28 11% Social Housing 15 6% Note: Some respondents ticked more than one property type.
The majority of respondents were concerned that any development should not damage the beauty of the village, as follows: 99% said the design should be sympathetic to nearby properties. 78% said new development should be within the village boundary. This probably reflects a desire to retain a key feature of Lighthorne as a village nestled in a valley. 89% said that some of the development profit should be used to improve the parish. As a fairly compact village any development is likely to impact on other residents.
Lighthorne Parish Council conducted a survey in May 2013 to identify the housing needs of the local community (called a Housing Needs Survey).
Trees contribute significantly to the visual appeal of the village, especially the deciduous native species. The Horse Chestnut opposite the village sign is very large and forms an important part of the view on descending the hill into the village from the B4100, as do the trees on the village green. There are several Wellingtonias near the church which are about 100 years old. In recent years, Yews have been planted in the churchyard very effectively.
The central part of the village is a Conservation Area and most of the villagers are aware of this and welcome the restrictions and responsibilities imposed on them.
The two main access roads into Lighthorne village are the Chesterton Road (from the B4100) and the Wellesbourne Road. Access to Lighthorne via Moreton Morrell Lane is possible only by light vehicles travelling slowly. This lane is narrow, has blind corners, and is used extensively by dog walkers. In order to maintain the “sleepy hollow” nature of the village, it is essential that this lane is not enlarged for use by heavier traffic.
There is a severe shortage of off-road car parking in Lighthorne. The Village Hall car park only has a few spaces which is insufficient for many of the events held at the hall. Similarly, the Antelope pub car park is inadequate on busy nights. We wish to encourage more people to use the Village Hall and pub so the need to improve parking in Lighthorne should be a local development priority.
December 2013 Page 9 of 23
Page 209 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Recommended Actions
1) When considering planning applications, the District Council should be asked to bear in mind: a) the desire to retain the existing character of Lighthorne village as a village nestled in a valley; b) any new development in Lighthorne village should be sympathetic (in terms of design, appearance, scale and distinctiveness) to the existing character of the village; c) any new development in Lighthorne village should have off-road parking as there is a severe shortage of on road parking. Options for providing additional off road parking for existing residents and visitors to Lighthorne should also be investigated; d) the desire to retain Moreton Morrell Lane as a narrow road so as not to encourage more traffic to use this road to access Lighthorne.
2) A sign should be erected at the entrance to Moreton Morrell Lane from the Fosse Way to discourage excessive use of this lane to access Lighthorne.
December 2013 Page 10 of 23
Page 210 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Traffic and Transport
There was a very clear message that something should be done to reduce the speed of traffic through the village which is increasingly being used by through traffic to avoid the traffic jams along the B4100 at peak times. 73% of respondents think speeding is a problem in Lighthorne. Redlands residents also expressed concern over the speed of some cars driving in and out of the Park.
There were different views on the control measures which could be used – the most popular being the use of speed activated signs.
The blind corner near the Antelope pub is potentially dangerous as a number of cars drive too fast round this corner, crossing the centre line as they exit the corner past the pub on the left. This is a particular risk for elderly or young residents crossing the road to the village hall and for cars leaving the Antelope car park. A further consideration is the fact that the road through the village is part of the Feldon Cycle Route, promoted by Warwickshire County Council and Sustrans. Cyclists, including children, are regularly seen using the route.
55% of respondents say that parking is a problem in Lighthorne village, and 86% of those think that we need a code of conduct/guidelines for parking in the village.
The chart shows that the vast majority of residents use their own car for getting out of the parish, Own vehicle (241) but a range of other modes Lift in someone of transport are also used. else’s car (14) An important minority rely Bus (14) on the bus service but their Taxi (2) ability to leave the village is Motorcycle (0) restricted by the frequency Pedal cycle (6) and timing of the bus Walking (8) service. Over 150 respondents mentioned this aspect of the bus service as something they would like to see improved.
Redlands residents and others living outside the village live too far away from the bus stop in Lighthorne for the bus service to be a practical mode of transport. Many of these residents are elderly.
December 2013 Page 11 of 23
Page 211 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Recommended Actions
3) Consider introducing a community lift share scheme.
4) The Parish Council to liaise with the appropriate authorities to introduce an effective means of reducing the speed of cars through the village and to liaise with residents of Redlands to consider what can be done to achieve the same in Redlands Park.
5) Seek volunteers to prepare a parking code of conduct and to consider how best to encourage compliance.
6) Ask transport partners about possibilities to improve the frequency of bus services, additional bus stops for Redlands, and routes to Wellesbourne.
December 2013 Page 12 of 23
Page 212 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Neighbourhood and Environment
The vast majority of respondents were aware of the responsibilities of living in a conservation area, although 33 people were not aware.
There were very mixed views on whether streets should have name signs. This varied from street to street.
There was also a mixed response on the question of street lighting with some people wanting street lighting turned off at night or removed and others wanting more lighting. However, those who were satisfied with the current street lighting outnumbered those who are dissatisfied by a 2:1 ratio.
Almost 200 respondents use the local network of footpaths and bridleways. The majority think they are well maintained but there was a fairly even split on the question of whether they are well signposted.
During periods of very heavy rainfall there is a risk that some properties could suffer flooding as water runs off the surrounding hills into the valley. The drainage system has sometimes proved inadequate for removing the water from the roads.
A “Welcome Pack” is currently distributed to new residents to Lighthorne village by one of our residents who set this up some years ago. This is an excellent initiative which introduces new residents to information about life in Lighthorne.
Recommended Actions
7) Continue supporting the “Welcome Pack” and consider whether any other information should be added to the pack for new residents.
8) Consider including a guidance note to all residents in the conservation area to help them understand their responsibilities.
9) Set up a working party to consider how to make it easier for residents to follow the local footpaths (for example, by improving the signposting of paths that are not clearly marked and/or preparing a more detailed map of local footpaths).
December 2013 Page 13 of 23
Page 213 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Community and local facilities
Lighthorne enjoys a strong sense of community and our survey showed that residents generally feel safe in the village. There are, however, occasional acts of anti-social behaviour.
Respondents were asked about their use of local facilities and community groups. The numbers below refer to the numbers who use them “frequently” or “occasionally”.
Village Hall
A wide range of activities takes place in the village hall. 146 respondents said they use the hall. Since conducting the Parish Plan survey a village parent and toddler group now meets regularly in the hall. Other suggestions for using the hall included: • selling local produce; • a community shop; and • a farmers’ market.
Post Office
141 people use the post office which opens in the village hall on 3 afternoons a week. 85% of all respondents said it is important to retain this service.
December 2013 Page 14 of 23
Page 214 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Sports ground
61 respondents use the sports ground. However, 27 respondents were concerned about the potentially dangerous walk from the village to the sports ground which includes a 200 yard section where the only option is to walk on the road as there is no footpath or grass verge.
St Laurence’s Church
77 respondents use the church.
December 2013 Page 15 of 23
Page 215 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Other facilities
At the time of the survey the Antelope pub had been closed for a few months. 218 respondents said it is important to have a pub in the village so it was pleasing to see the pub re-open under new management. Many comments were made on the subject of the pub. These were passed on to the new pub management.
35 respondents use the mobile library service.
December 2013 Page 16 of 23
Page 216 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Communications
Respondents enjoy the current communication methods of the parish magazine and leaflets. Many residents would like more communication of events by e-mail and use of a village website.
After the Parish Plan residents’ survey we were very pleased when one resident set up a village diary of events which is published monthly and distributed via e-mail to anyone who would like to receive it. This is a very useful way of both publicising events and finding out what’s going on in Lighthorne. To be added to the email distribution list residents should send an e-mail request to [email protected].
Residents who would like to be added to the e-mail distribution list used for copies of Parish Council meeting minutes and agendas should send an e-mail request to the Parish Clerk at [email protected].
Recommended Actions
10) Parish Council to investigate options for providing safe access to the sports ground as a priority.
11) Investigate the needs of the elderly people in the Parish and consider whether changes could be made to improve the facilities or services for elderly residents.
12) Continue to support current methods of communication as well as developing the e-mailing list and a village website.
December 2013 Page 17 of 23
Page 217 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Youth and children’s issues
The questionnaire respondents have 48 children aged 16 and under living in the Parish. Of these, 44 responded to the “Youth” section, split nearly equally between the age groups 0 – 11 and 12 – 16.
The most commonly used village facility was the children’s playground (56% of youth respondents). However, 80% of the households with children felt that the playground was not of an adequate standard. The little equipment which there is is worn and no longer works as intended, and the surrounding walls have been subject to offensive graffiti. Comments included wanting an upgraded playground with better safety matting and deterrence of vandalism to create a much needed communal area.
The sports-ground and tennis court are well used by children from the parish (41% of youth respondents). There were many suggestions for improving facilities at the sports-ground but the overwhelming comments were regarding the lack of a safe walking route to the sports-ground. Regarding the facilities at the sports-ground, there were suggestions for adding facilities such as a skate park.
There was a positive response from both the youth and adult sections for more family- and youth-friendly activities within the parish. This included suggestions of a youth club, toddler/music group, children’s drama group and martial arts. The village hall is the most appropriate location for many of these activities, which could be publicised via the notice board, e-mailing lists and a website.
December 2013 Page 18 of 23
Page 218 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Recommended Actions
13) Prepare a proposal to redevelop the children’s playground with improved equipment, safe surfacing, and to deter vandalism. Investigate how to obtain support and funding to achieve this aim.
14) Investigate ways of maintaining the current facilities at the sports-ground and parish council to consider addition of a skate park.
15) Encourage volunteers to organise more youth- and family-friendly events in the Village Hall.
16) Establish improved communication with youth and families via website and/or e-mailing list.
December 2013 Page 19 of 23
Page 219 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Utilities
Broadband internet service
There was a range of replies to the question about this service, with slightly more dissatisfied households than satisfied ones. However, there was a significant number of very dissatisfied households.
Unless there is an Very satisfied (15) improvement in the service, Satisfied (72) it is likely that the number Dissatisfied (59) of very dissatisfied Very dissatisfied (40) customers will increase as more people become aware of the much faster services available to less rural populations. A faster internet service would help people in rural communities to establish rural businesses.
Energy
Most households heat their houses using oil, although significant numbers use solid fuel, gas (not mains) and electricity. A few also use other energy sources such as solar power. When asked about preferred forms of heating, the most popular responses were gas (probably mains gas) and solar power, with a number mentioning heat pump systems.
127 respondents said they would be interested in a group fuel purchase scheme.
Street lighting
142 respondents were satisfied with the current street lighting in Lighthorne village; 68 were not satisfied. The reasons given by those who are dissatisfied varied from those who feel there is too much lighting to those who feel there is not enough. The “too much” responses tended to come from those living in the centre of the village; the “not enough” responses tended to come from the edge of the village. This suggests that any proposed changes in a particular area of the village should take most account of the views of those most affected by the change.
December 2013 Page 20 of 23
Page 220 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Recommended Actions
17) Ask the district council what support they can provide to help parishes like Lighthorne obtain a faster internet service.
18) Find a volunteer to raise the issue with BT
19) Seek a volunteer to investigate the viability of a group fuel purchase scheme and, if appropriate, set up such a scheme.
December 2013 Page 21 of 23
Page 221 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Redlands Park
There are 59 residential homes designed for the over 55s in Redlands Park. It is a community of mobile home properties two miles (by road) from Lighthorne village. The Park is managed by Avon Estates Limited.
36 Redlands households responded to the parish plan survey. The most frequently raised issues were: • A majority of respondents felt that people drive too fast through the park, particularly bearing in mind that most residents are pensioners; • Requests for bus stops on the B4100 at the entrance to the park; • Some residents would like more street lighting in the park; • The road into Redlands is narrow so it would be useful to have some passing places and mirrors on the bend.
Recommended Actions
20) Discuss with the Redlands Park site owner the issues of speeding and whether the entrance/exit road could be improved to address the issues raised above.
21) Ask transport partners about introducing bus stops for Redlands residents on the B4100.
December 2013 Page 22 of 23
Page 222 Lighthorne Parish Plan 2012
Appendix 1 — History of Lighthorne
Following the collapse of the Roman Empire a Germanic tribe, the Hwicce, lived in the area and gave the settlement its name. A pair of bronze cauldron escutcheons from this period has been found in Lighthorne. It is not known precisely when Christianity was introduced to the area, but the village was incorporated in the Bishopric of Worcester in 688 AD. The remains of a preaching cross, probably dating to the 10th or 11th century, can be seen in the churchyard.
After the Norman invasion Lighthorne passed to Henry de Newburgh, the first Norman Earl of Warwick. The Lordship of the Manor changed hands several times in the following six centuries, the Earls of Warwick often being the owners. King Henry V returned the Manor to them on his accession in 1413. A panel of stained glass in one of the windows in the church and the tenor bell both commemorate the accession. The Pope family held the Manor in 1548 and they constructed Church Hill farmhouse, adjacent to the church. This is the oldest domestic building in Lighthorne.
In 1715 Lighthorne became the property of Lord Willoughby de Broke and it was the first village in Warwickshire to have its common fields enclosed by act of parliament, in 1721. Lighthorne became an estate village and most of Lighthorne’s old buildings date from this period, including the church tower, the old rectory, the pub and the old schoolhouse.
In 1773-4 the church was rebuilt of local limestone. The old chapel at Compton Verney had been demolished in 1772 when Capability Brown was redesigning the parkland and it is thought that some of the stained glass from the chapel was used at Lighthorne. One window in particular, featuring St. Sebastian, from the nationally important early sixteenth century workshop of the King’s glazier, Barnard Flower, is thought to have been brought to Lighthorne from Compton Verney. The nave and chancel of the church were rebuilt in 1875-6 and incorporated the earlier tower. Stained glass from the earlier church was incorporated in contemporary frames by local glaziers.
The Verney estates in Warwickshire were broken up and sold in a series of auctions in the late 1920s, the majority of properties in Lighthorne being acquired by their sitting tenants. Only one house in the village was described as possessing electric lighting.
Residents who are interested in the history of Lighthorne should access the Lighthorne History Society website, lighthornehistory.org.uk.
December 2013 Page 23 of 23
Page 223 This page has been left intentionally blank Recommendation Responsibility/Action Partners Suggested Time Scale Housing and Development Lighthorne Parish Council Warwickshire Ongoing County Council, 1) When considering planning applications, the District Council should be Stratford-on- asked to bear in mind:- Avon District Council a) the desire to retain the existing character of Lighthorne village as a village nestled in a valley;
b) any new development in Lighthorne village should be sympathetic (in terms of design, appearance, scale and distinctiveness) to the existing character of the village;
c) any new development in Lighthorne village should have off-street parking as there is a severe shortage of on-street parking. Options for providing additional off road parking for existing residents and visitors to Lighthorne should also be investigated;
d) the desire to retain Moreton Morrell Lane as a narrow road so as
Page 225 Page not to encourage more traffic to use this road to access Lighthorne;
e) improve drains to reduce the risk of flooding.
2) A sign should be erected at the entrance to Moreton Morrell Lane Lighthorne Parish Council Stratford-on- As soon as possible from the Fosse Way to discourage excessive use of this lane to access will liaise with the Highways Avon District Lighthorne. Agency. Council
Traffic and Transport Need a volunteer from the community. The Parish Six months 3) Consider introducing a community lift share scheme. Council will write a letter to the community to look for a volunteer.
4) The Parish Council to liaise with the appropriate authorities to Josette Tait, along with a Parish Council Ongoing introduce an effective means of reducing the speed of cars through number of other residents, and Highways the village and to liaise with residents of Redlands to consider what will head up a Speed Department can be done to achieve the same in Redlands Park. Control initiative.
5) Discuss with the Redlands Park site owner the issues of speeding and whether the entrance/exit road could be improved to address the Item 11 Appendix 5 issues raised above.
Recommendation Responsibility/Action Partners Suggested Time Scale 6) Seek volunteers to prepare a parking Code of Conduct and to The Parish Council has a Review bi-annually consider how best to encourage compliance. Code of Conduct in place which has been distributed. 7) Ask transport partners about possibilities to improve the frequency Parish Council Bus providers Nine months of bus services, additional bus stops for Redlands, and routes to Wellesbourne.
8) Ask transport partners about introducing bus stops for Redlands residents on the B4100
Neighbourhood and Environment Ongoing
9) Continue supporting the “Welcome Pack” and consider whether any other information should be added to the pack for new residents.
10) Consider including a guidance note to all residents in the Parish Clerk to source Include in an annual conservation area to help them understand their responsibilities. handouts from the District newsletter. Council
Page 226 Page 11) Set up a working party to consider how to make it easier for Paul Tait - Resident Six months residents to follow the local footpaths (for example, by improving the signposting of paths that are not clearly marked and/or preparing a more detailed map of local footpaths.
Communications Parish Council Nine months
12) Parish Council to investigate options for providing safe access to the sports ground as a priority.
13) Investigate the needs of the elderly people in the Parish and Parish Council to include in Letter to go out by consider whether changes could be made to improve the facilities or a newsletter end of 2013. services for elderly residents. Monitoring of needs to be ongoing 14) Continue to support current methods of communication as well as Gordon Wild and Initial investigations developing the e-mailing list and a village website. Lighthorne Parish Council to take place by end of 2013
Youth and Children’s issues Playground Committee Ongoing
15) Prepare a proposal to redevelop the children’s playground with improved equipment, safe surfacing, and to deter vandalism. Investigate how to obtain support and funding to achieve this aim.
Recommendation Responsibility/Action Partners Suggested Time Scale 16) Investigate ways of maintaining the current facilities at the sports- A volunteer would be Newsletter to go out ground and parish council to consider addition of a skate park. required. The Parish Council in next three months will try and seek a volunteer via the Newsletter 17) Encourage volunteers to organise more youth-friendly and family- Toddler Group Ongoing friendly events in the Village Hall.
18) Establish improved communication with youth and families via Will be achieved if section Ongoing website and/or emailing list. 12 is realised.
Utilities Cllr Stephenson Lighthorne Stratford-on- Ongoing Parish Council, Stratford- Avon District 19) Ask the District Council what support it can provide to help on-Avon District Council Council, BT Parishes like Lighthorne obtain a faster internet service.
20) Find a volunteer to raise the issue with BT. Page 227 Page
21) Seek a volunteer to investigate the viability of a group fuel Cllr Steele to explore 6 months purchase scheme and, if appropriate, set up such a scheme. further.
This page has been left intentionally blank Item 12
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Wellesbourne Village Design Statement Lead Officer: Fiona Blundell Contact on 01789 260333
Lead Member: Councillor C Saint
Summary This report summaries the assessment of Wellesbourne Village Design Statement (VDS).
Recommendation
(1) That the Wellesbourne VDS (Appendix 2) be adopted as a local information source to offer advice to the relevant services of Stratford-on-Avon District Council; (2) That the Wellesbourne VDS be adopted as a material consideration in the determination of planning application, in accordance with Policy PR.1 of the Local Plan Review and the draft Core Strategy Policy CS.10 ‘ Design and Distinctiveness’
1 Background/Information 1.1 Village Design Statements (VDS) emerged from work by the Countryside Commission (now Natural England) in 1993. They are intended to provide a context for new development, based on local character and sense of place. Their purpose is to manage change, whether that change is a major new development or cumulative small scale additions and alterations to a village. They provide information about how development should be carried out, so that it is in harmony with its setting and makes a positive contribution to the local environments. A VDS should provide a clear statement of the character of a particular village, against which planning applications may be assessed. It should set out how development should be undertaken to respect the local identify, rather than whether try to prevent it. A VDS should; Be developed, researched, written and edited by local people; Be representative of the views of the village as a whole, and involve a wide section of the village community in its production; Describe the visual character of the village and demonstrate how local character and distinctiveness can be protected and enhanced in new development; Be compatible with statutory planning system and local policies; Be about managing change in the village, not preventing.
Page 229 1.2 Local communities have a unique appreciation and understanding of their own place and a VDS is base on their knowledge. Residents can feel that they have no say over what development takes place in their community; but a VDS offers a constructive solution to this dilemma. By describing the qualities and characteristics that people value in their villages and surroundings, local communities can have an input into the planning process. 1.3 To date, 24 community-led design statements have been adopted as Supplementary Planning Guidance by Stratford-on-Avon District Council. 1.4 The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act (2004) introduced a number of procedural changes to the way supplementary planning documents are produced. Under this Act, Supplementary Planning Documents (SPD) replaces Supplementary Planning Guidance (SPG). In the past it was possible to adopt a wide range of documents as SPG; however, the regulations for producing a SPD are much more onerous. Under the 2004 Act, SPD are required to be:- Subject to a Sustainability Appraisal; Subject to consultation in accordance with the Council’s adopted Statement of Community Involvement; and Directly related to planning policies. 1.5 These requirements mean that, while it is technically possible for VDS to be produced as Supplementary Planning Documents, this puts restrictions on what documents can contain and how they are produced. As a result, Village Design Statements are now proposed for adoption as a material consideration in the determination of planning applications and as an important source of local information. 1.6 Background to Wellesbourne Village Design Statement 1.6.1 The existing Village Design Statement was produced by the residents of Wellesbourne and adopted by the District Council in 1999. The Wellesbourne VDS 2013 updates the information in the existing document. 1.6.2 A Parish Plan was both produced and adopted in 2011. 1.6.3 The consultation for Parish Plan comprised two surveys (605 and 752 respondents respectively and three public consultation days during 2010. Information gained as part of the consultation has been used to inform the production of the updated Wellesbourne VDS. The Council’s Consultation Manager has commented that ‘the parish plan survey has been used as supplementary document to the VDS. It was good to see the survey in 1999 mentioned and compared in places with that done in 2010, as it helps to set the context. The appendices are well laid out with the descriptions of the consultation responses, giving a clear indication of how the VDS was developed. Given that the consultation was carried out mostly on line, the survey response rates were good. 1.7 Findings and recommendations of the Wellesbourne Village Design Statement 1.7.1 The document is intended to update the existing Wellesbourne VDS. It analyses the character of Wellesbourne village and its setting and identifies the special qualities that should be retained.
Page 230 1.7.2 The updated VDS has been prepared by taking account of the special character of the village and the views and values of the local community. The document describes and illustrates the village of Wellesbourne; including building materials and architectural styles, open spaces and approaches to the village that contribute towards its local character. The VDS provides a number of key guidance points to guide and influence future development in the settlement. These are set out in Appendix 1 of the report and are focused on the following issues: KGP1 – Guidance on Waterways, Drainage and related issues; KGP2 – Guidance on Ecological and Environmental Issues; KGP3 – Guidance on Development Design and Landscaping; KGP4 – Guidance on Roads, Traffic and Transport; KGP5 – Guidance on Commercial Buildings.
2 Conformity with the District Council’s policies (planning policies) 2.1 It is considered that the key guidance points would comply with the relevant local plan policies and emerging Core Strategy policies. If adopted by the Council, the VDS would be useful guidance as a material consideration in determining planning applications.
3 Options available to The Cabinet 3.1 The following options are available:- 3.1.1 To adopt the VDS fully; 3.1.2 To suggest amendments to the VDS, if there is concern about certain aspects of the VDS; or 3.1.3 Not adopt the VDS.
4 Members’ Comments 4.1 No comments received.
5 Implications of the proposal 5.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 5.1.1 As a material consideration and local information source, Design Statements are one of a number of design guidance used in decision making. They should be implemented in conjunction with other design guidance and Planning Policy. 5.2 Financial 5.2.1 There are no known financial implications of the proposal. The document will be made available to the District Council and also the Wellesbourne Village website. 5.3 Environmental 5.3.1 The aim of the VDS is to preserve and enhance the local environment of the village and its surroundings.
Page 231 5.4 Corporate Strategy 5.4.1 The Corporate Strategy identifies the Council’s long term priorities serving the residents and communities of the District. It sets out how we will lead the District forward between 2011 and 2015. 5.4.2 The Wellesbourne VDS is a useful source of information about the local community’s perception of their locality. Aim 1 of the Corporate Strategy is ‘Addressing local housing need.’ An Outcome is Residents feel they have more influence over the development that takes place in their area. A priority is ‘We will require a high quality of design for all developments, consistent with our planning policies, the District Design Guide and other more local design statements where they exist. 5.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 5.5.1 No known implications.
6 Risk Assessment 6.1 There are no significant risks associated with the adoption of the Wellesbourne Village Design Statement. 6.2 If the District Council chooses not to adopt the Village Design Statement, it would risk the opportunity to adopt a valuable source of local information and a useful material consideration, which would assist the Council in the determination of planning applications.
7 Conclusion 7.1 The Wellesbourne Village Design Statement is a very useful record on local character and design resource for the local community, District Council and all those involved in the planning process.
Paul Lankester CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Background papers: Sustainable Community Strategy – Improving the Quality of Life for Everyone- A 2026 Vision for Stratford District. Stratford-on-Avon District Local Plan Review 2006.
Page 232 Item 12 Appendix 1 Key Guidance Points from The Village Design Statement
KGP1 - Guidance on Waterways, Drainage and Related Issues
Future developments should include proposals for the suitable management of water run-off, and long term drainage solutions and Page KGP1a include suitable flood defense measures using a “1 in 100 year” event 11 model. Provision must be made for their long term maintenance.
It is imperative that any development should be sited away from the Page KGP1b flood plain of the River Dene. 11
The flood plain of the River Dene should be retained for recreational Page KGP1c purposes, particularly in areas adjacent to the public footpath. 12
Future development design should take into account and preserve Page KGP1d and/or enhance the amenity, ecological and biodiversity of the river. 12
The views upstream from the A429 by-pass towards the village centre Pages KGP1e should be preserved. This is supported through policy EF.3 of the 9, 12 Stratford-on-Avon District Local Plan Review as an Area of Restraint. & 26
KGP2 - Guidance on Ecological & Environmental Issues
Existing open spaces throughout the village and its environs should be Pages retained and preserved. The natural green corridor along the river (as KGP2a 9, 12, identified in page 28 of the 2011 Parish Plan) and Dog Close should be 14 & maintained as is, rather than used for alternative purposes. 26
New development should not block or obstruct views out of the Pages KGP2b village, as seen from highways, footpaths, bridleways, public open 9, 12 spaces or other public areas within the settlement. & 26
Any further roundabouts to be in keeping with those already present; Pages KGP2c grassed and planted with a range of trees, bushes and wild flowers. 9 & 12
Appropriateness of street furniture should be considered. Underground cabling television and internet services must be Page KGP2d considered where new development is planned. Street lighting should be non-intrusive, energy saving by default with light pollution kept to 25 a minimum.
Page 233 Existing trees and hedgerows should be preserved and suitably Pages KGP2e enhanced, where necessary, to retain the village identity, maintain 9, 12 encourage biodiversity and the creation of habitats. & 26
Pages KGP2f Existing footpaths should be preserved. 9, 12 & 26
Grass verges, as a feature of the outskirts of our village, are to be Pages KGP2g encouraged, as a natural feature, rather than as potential areas for 9, 12 car parking. & 25
KGP3 - Guidance on Development Design and Landscaping
From the earliest stages, it is recommended that consultation should KGP3a take place between all those involved in the development process.
New developments should take into consideration the conservation area, land form, visual skylines, and edge characteristics of the Pages settlement and village boundaries, from street patterns through to KGP3b materials. Further detailed information about the area can be found in 9, 13 – the Stratford-on-Avon District Design Guide and the accompanying 21, 26 Character Map of the District.
Pages The historical origins which have shaped the present village should be KGP3c recognised so that any future development will harmonise with what 7, 8, already exists. 12– 13, 26
It is considered important that the village maintains a high quality and mixture of styles and that standardised “volume house designs” are Pages KGP3d not used as a solution to expansion. Any future development should 13 – comprise a variety of complementary styles and be sensitive to the 21, 26 diverse and individual character of the village.
All future developments, both residential and commercial, should be Pages fully integrated into the landscape through suitable landscaping and 19 – the consideration of views. Due consideration should be given to their KGP3e 20, 23, scale and sense of proportion, the appropriate use of detailing and 26 - materials and their colour to ensure they blend seamlessly into the 27 environment.
Whilst some infill and redevelopments may, in principle, be appropriate, they neither reflect nor complement surrounding Page KGP3f architecture. All future developments should take into account and 21 respect the existing context.
Page 234 Landscaping provides visual breaks in both this and other developments and have softened their impact, helping retain the rural Pages character of the village. Landscaping proposals should be employed in KGP3g future developments to achieve and maintain this character. 19 - Adequate provision for ongoing landscaping maintenance should be 20 established within new development
The use of short road lengths and curvatures, walled gardens and planted green areas are considered to have collectively reduced the Pages KGP3h “estate” feel of the Dovehouse. These features contribute to 19 - maintaining the village atmosphere and should be considered for 20 future developments.
The feeling of space has not always been evident in more recent developments in the village, and it is felt that much more Pages consideration should be given to this aspect when looking at future KGP3i proposals. Space between and around houses should be included to 19 – allow for appropriate landscape design and screening and to help 20, 26 soften the impact of new buildings, hard standing and car parking.
Consideration should be given to design solutions that reduce the Page KGP3j impact of noise on residential areas built close to roads. 20
The introduction of both trees and shrubs, and the protection of Pages KGP3k existing trees, hedges and naturalised plants, should be a priority in 9, 12, the design of new development. 19, 26
Whilst the Thorpe Mews three-storey roofline respects the adjacent buildings from Warwick Road, and some old three-storey houses Page KGP3l already exist, there are no other readily identifiable areas where 21 further three-storey buildings would be considered suitable. Such development proposals are unlikely to be supported by the village.
KGP4 - Guidance on Roads, Traffic and Transport
Any new roadways built into the village, particularly within new Page KGP4a developments, should incorporate a layout and detailing that is 25 appropriate to its context in terms of design
Road and footpath signs should be of a suitable pattern and colour, Page KGP4b with advertising signs, street furniture and lighting being sensitive to 25 the character and use of the particular area.
New developments should include footpaths to link with surrounding Pages KGP4c countryside and also with the village, to enable and encourage 12 & residents to walk to local amenities. 21
Page 235 Footpaths should continue to be constructed of materials that are Page KGP4d sympathetic to their context and use. 25
Pages Provision of adequate off street parking spaces should be considered KGP4e as part of any development, together with appropriate spaces around 12 & new buildings. 24 - 25
Any increase of on-street parking should be avoided when converting Pages existing properties. Approval for such planning requests should only KGP4f be given where this does not remove the availability of off-street 24 - parking; this would include the conversion of residential garages. 25
KGP5 - Guidance on Commercial Buildings
The siting of new office spaces should take into account the need to Pages KGP5a reduce the volume of commercial traffic within, and through, the 24 & village. 27
Any purpose-built offices should both fit in visually and be sympathetic to the styles and construction materials used within the Pages KGP5b village. Where cladding is used on industrial buildings, appropriate 23 & selection of colour should be made to visually integrate them into the 27 surroundings.
Sufficient off-road parking should be provided for commercial Pages KGP5c properties. This includes either extensions to current premises, 22 – conversion of pre-existing buildings or new purpose built offices. 25, 27
Page 236 Item 12 Appendix 2
Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Final Version 1.0.5
Date of Publication: 03/12/2013
Page 237 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Table of Contents
DEDICATION 5
INTRODUCTION 6
VILLAGE DESIGN STATEMENT AND ITS OBJECTIVES 6
HISTORY 8
LANDSCAPE AND SETTING 10
WATERCOURSES 11
Amenity Value 11
Problem of Floods 11 River Dene 11 Newbold Brook 12 Flood Risks and Management 12
OPEN SPACES AND VIEWS 13
BUILDING CHARACTER AND DESIGN 14 Figure 1. Character Map of Wellesbourne 15 Figure 2. Conservation area 16
The Historic Centre 17 The Conservation Area 17 Newbold Road Area 18 Elliot Drive (including Granville Road, Loxley Close and Baker Drive) 19 Mountford Close 20 The Willowdene Estate (Incorporating Birch Grove, Linden Avenue, Sycamore Close, Brookside Avenue, and Wellesbourne Farm) 20 Westfield Crescent, Grange Gardens, Ettington Close 21 Constance Harris Close 22 The Dovehouse Estate 22
Recent Expansion 23 Infill Development Sites 24
COMMERCIAL BUILDING DESIGN 26
Shops 26
Page 2 of 56
Page 238 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Offices 26
Storage, Manufacturing & Distribution Units 27
THE IMPACT OF TRAFFIC ON VILLAGE LIFE 28
CONCLUSION 30
General 30
Housing 30
Industrial 31
APPENDIX I 32
Key Guidance Points From The Village Design Statement 32 KGP1 - Guidance on Waterways, Drainage and Related Issues 32 KGP2 - Guidance on Ecological & Environmental Issues 32 KGP3 - Guidance on Development Design and Landscaping 33 KGP4 - Guidance on Roads, Traffic and Transport 34 KGP5 - Guidance on Commercial Buildings 35
APPENDIX II 36
Sources of Evidence for Key Guidance Points 36 Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Waterways, Drainage and Related Issues 36 Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Ecological & Environmental Issues 36 Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Development Design and Landscaping 37 Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Roads, Traffic and Transport 38 Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Commercial Buildings 38
APPENDIX III 40
Sustainability Appraisal 40 Key to Score Values 41 Sustainability Appraisal 41
APPENDIX IV 46
Responses from Public & Other Consultations 46
APPENDIX V 50
Key Meetings, Consultations and Events 50
APPENDIX VI 56
Page 3 of 56
Page 239 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Acknowledgements 56
Page 4 of 56
Page 240 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Dedication
The 2013 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement is dedicated to the memory of our chairman Tony Copeland (1944 – 2011).
Page 5 of 56
Page 241 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Introduction
This Village Design Statement (VDS) is a document produced by residents of Wellesbourne village to reflect their views on the features they consider positively contribute to the distinctive characteristics of their village and its locality. Within this document are facts and local views about what makes Wellesbourne a special place, worth caring about and worth preserving as a village community. When adopted by Stratford-on Avon District Council, it will be used by Planning Officers when they consider new applications, alongside the policies in the Stratford-on-Avon District Local Plan Review and its emerging Core Strategy.
The existing Wellesbourne VDS was adopted by Stratford-on-Avon District Council (SDC) in 1999 and was prepared as a direct result of information, views and opinions of Wellesbourne residents through a questionnaire sent to every household, an Open Day Workshop and on-going consultation.
A Parish Plan was both produced and formally adopted in 2011, and it was decided that information collected during that project would be used as part of the update of the 1999 VDS, most of which was still relevant. Consultations with village residents were performed through 2 surveys (605 and 752 respondents respectively) and 3 public consultation days during 2010.
This updated document is the output of that process.
Village Design Statement and its Objectives The VDS describes and illustrates the village as it is today whilst recording all those details, from building materials and styles of architecture, open spaces and various approaches to the village, which contribute to its local character.
This document also defines how the village residents wish their locality to adapt to proposed development, whether small extensions to existing buildings or sizeable residential and business developments. The design guidance offered here is to guide planners and developers; to ensure any new development in the village fits in with the valued and distinct character and qualities of the place; and how that character might be protected and also enhanced.
The residents should feel that their views are acknowledged, respected and implemented
Page 6 of 56
Page 242 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement whenever possible.
The VDS does not set out to crystallise and preserve the village and its setting so that it remains unchanged. There have been great changes in and around Wellesbourne, and some people express amazement at the present speed of growth and development. Many view the changes with dismay. There are parts of this ancient settlement virtually untouched over the years and they retain their charm; other parts have been extended and developed with sensitivity to blend with existing features. Some developments, however, are considered to have negatively impacted on the village “look and feel”, taken away pleasant rural vistas and hidden tree and skylines from approaches to the village – forever.
Given the diversity of building design, reference should be made to the specific sections within this document in respect to any further planning applications. Wellesbourne includes one conservation area, several areas of restraint and buildings of historic interest, and these should be preserved rather than developed.
When approved and adopted by SDC, the updated Wellesbourne Village Design Statement will be considered and consulted alongside both the National Planning Policy Framework and Local Plan policies.
It will also need to be read in conjunction with other forms of Supplementary Planning Guidance including but not restricted to, the Stratford-on-Avon District Design Guide, the Character Map of the Stratford-on-Avon District, Character and Design in Stratford-on-Avon District, A Countryside Design Summary, the Wellesbourne Conservation Area Review and the Wellesbourne Parish Plan.
Page 7 of 56
Page 243 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
History Wellesbourne has a documented history stretching back to before the Norman Conquest. In 862 and again in 872, the Witan (parliament) of Mercia met at Wellesbourne. In the Domesday Book (1086) Wellesbourne is recorded as being part of the royal manor of Kineton.
Wellesbourne is really two villages: Wellesbourne Hastings and Wellesbourne Mountford 1 separated by the River Dene . The name Mountford comes from the de Montfort family who th owned land here in medieval times. Early in the 14 century, Maud of Walton, Simon de 2 Montfort’s granddaughter, married Thomas Hasting thus introducing the name Hastings .
th The parish church of St Peter has a 15 century tower although much of the church is Victorian. Although situated in Wellesbourne Hastings, it has always been the parish church 3 of both halves of the village. The two separate parts of the village were merged in 1947 .
Dog Close, the field by the river in Wellesbourne Hastings, has apparently been open space for a very long time although the name only dates back to the 1930s. On the corner of School Road opposite Dog Close is Wellesbourne’s oldest domestic building now occupied by an th 4 estate agent. Parts of this building date back to the early 15 century .
The cricket field in Wellesbourne Mountford was mentioned in Thomas Hughes’ “Tom Brown’s School Days”. The most memorable event in Wellesbourne was a meeting at the Stag’s Head in 1872 when Joseph Arch was invited to speak to a gathering of agricultural labourers. So many people turned up that the meeting had to be held outside in Chestnut Square (now in the conservation area); this laid the foundation for the National Agricultural 5 Labourers’ Union .
The village school in School Road was built in 1863 and is now the village hall.
th Wellesbourne had many public houses in the 19 century but now there is only the Stag’s
1 2 Vision 4 Wellesbourne – The Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan (2011), p.30 Peter Bolton, Wellesbourne, The Naples of the Midlands 1800-1939: A Rural
3Society Unravelled , (2007) Peter Bolton, Wellesbourne, The Naples of the Midlands 1800-1939: A Rural
4Society Unravelled , (2007) Peter Bolton, Wellesbourne, The Naples of the Midlands 1800-1939: A Rural
5Society Unravelled , (2007) Vision 4 Wellesbourne – The Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan (2011), p.31 Page 8 of 56
Page 244 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Head (in Wellesbourne Mountford) and the King’s Head, a former coaching Inn on the old Warwick Road (Wellesbourne Hastings). The Peacock Inn in Chapel Street remained open until the 1968 flood; perhaps coincidentally, the Talbot on Kineton Road closed at about the 6 time of the 1998 flood .
There are concerns that the development of shops and services has not kept pace with housing development, with many older shops closing although the village still retains retail outlets. There is a purpose-built medical centre in Hastings House, adjacent to the rebuilt library and Surestart Centre in Kineton Road. A fire station was built on the roundabout of Loxley Road / A429 by-pass; and the Co-op, opened at the time of the 1999 VDS, has since been enlarged.
Chedham’s Yard, a wheelwright business which closed in 1965, won the BBC Restoration Village programme in 2006 and the subsequent development as a tourist and education centre 7 has been carried out sympathetically to the surrounding properties .
Much of the information in this brief history comes from the two Wellesbourne guides written by Rosalind and Peter Bolton.
6 Peter Bolton, Wellesbourne, The Naples of the Midlands 1800-1939: A Rural
7Society Unravelled , (2007) Vision 4 Wellesbourne – The Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan (2011), p.23 Page 9 of 56
Page 245 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Landscape and Setting Wellesbourne village is located in the Upper Avon section of the Avon & Stour Valleys area of Warwickshire, in the south of the county. The village is surrounded by open countryside.
The village lies some 50m above sea level and is situated on Quaternary river terrace deposits (mostly sands and gravels) overlying Triassic Mercia mudstone group rocks. The soils from the deposits are suitable for farming. Land to the north-west (some of which is in Charlecote parish) is part of what used to be known as the National Vegetable Research Station, now the Crop Research Centre of Warwick University. Fields are medium to small, flat and given over to crops of various sorts or grazing.
Some distance away, low gently rolling hills form a horse-shoe around the village with a gap to the west. These hills are predominantly Triassic in age, and some are topped with deposits of glacial till. Hills to the south, cut through by the River Dene, are heavily wooded which makes a pleasing vista from many parts the village.
Built on relatively flat land, Wellesbourne merges into the surrounding countryside rather than imposing itself on it and despite its size, retains its appearance of a rural village. The edges of Wellesbourne provide a gentle transition to the open countryside, in keeping with the rural aspect, planted with trees and high hedges. On some approaches to the village, the landscaped edges both partially or fully obscure the buildings.
The A429 by-passes the village to the West. In some areas, high banks have been constructed between settlement and main road. A series of large roundabouts occur at each intersection of the A429 by-pass with village roads. These roundabouts are planted with trees. The two halves of Wellesbourne face each other across the River Dene, and settlement has expanded along both sides of the river above the flood plain, as well as along main routes through the village.
Walton, a small hamlet and part of the parish of Wellesbourne and Walton, lies about 1.5 miles upstream of Wellesbourne. The countryside between the two settlements is farmland with hedges and clumps of larger trees and views of the low lying, wooded hills.
The relationship between the settlement and landscape character should inform future design proposals for development within the settlement. Further detailed information about the landscape setting of the area can be found in the Stratford-on-Avon District Design Guide
Page 10 of 56
Page 246 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement and the Character Map of the District. Wellesbourne fits within the ‘Upper Avon’ area as defined by the Character Map of the District. Further information on landscape and setting can be found in the Natural England’s West Midlands National Character Areas and the Warwickshire County Council Warwickshire Landscape Guidelines.
Watercourses
Amenity Value Water can be both a blessing and a curse, and this is true for Wellesbourne.
The River Dene flows through the centre of the village, separating Hastings from Mountford, past Dog Close and out underneath the A429 by-pass to Charlecote where it enters the River Avon.
There are two road bridges over the Dene, one in the centre of Wellesbourne, in Bridge Street, and a second which carries the A429 by-pass. There is a footbridge downstream known as the White Bridge.
In the course of its flow through Wellesbourne, the river provides a backdrop to many of the best views in the village. There are fields and walks along much of its length both within and outside the village. The River Dene and its associated floodplains are one of the many ecosites in the parish and are of significant biodiversity value.
The construction of the Wellesbourne A429 by-pass opened up attractive views upstream towards the village centre and these are now a feature of the landscape.
Problem of Floods
River Dene The curse of the water was evident when the River Dene broke its banks at Easter in 1998 causing more havoc than the floods of 1968 and 1977. Flood protection barriers had been erected along the south (Mountford) bank of the River Dene following the earlier floods but water got behind these in 1998 and caused serious floods in Bridge Street, Church Walk, Chapel Street and the small developments off the latter.
Page 11 of 56
Page 247 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
In spite of work carried out to prevent further floods, the River Dene flooded Wellesbourne again in July 2007. Floods caused extensive damage to property; after the 2007 flood some residents had to move out of their homes for over a year.
Newbold Brook This brook, which runs to the north of the village, overflowed in 1998 causing much damage to properties in that part of the village. This happened again in July 2007.
These floods gave rise to concerns in 1998 that too much building had taken place without the problem of drainage being adequately addressed. In the 2010 Parish Plan survey, villagers voiced concerns that any new developments must include provision for managing water run- off.
Flood Risks and Management In the second 2010 survey, 55% of people stated that they deemed flooding to be either a fairly or very big problem in Wellesbourne. Furthermore, during both Parish Plan public meetings and during Stratford-on-Avon District Council planning consultation during the same year, serious concern was expressed regarding tentative proposals for new developments upstream of the River Dene, on the area which acts as a flood plain. Despite river works being completed by the Environment Agency to clear waterways and improve flood protection, it is clear that the population are keen not to exacerbate recent flood episodes by allowing new development on flood plains, or by allowing developments that fail to provide suitable proposals for the sustainable management of water runoff / drainage downstream of the River Dene.
Page 12 of 56
Page 248 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Open Spaces and Views We should continue to recognise the importance of preservation and enhancement of the green and attractive spaces within the village and the very beautiful countryside and landscape surrounding the village.
The residents’ views from the 1998 Village Design Questionnaire were that they wished to preserve the green fields, paths, verges and river walks in good order with the historic parts of the village needing preservation and enhancement for everyone. They were not to be overshadowed by ugly, ill-conceived and poorly designed developments. This view has not changed in over a decade. A key point from the 2010 Parish Plan consultation of what the villagers valued was the natural environment: green spaces, walks by the river and walks through the village, reinforced by the majority of respondents wishing to retain Dog Close as open land. (52% in the original survey and only 33% in the second survey requesting it be converted to car parking).
Views from the village are generally of open countryside and this emphasises the village aspect of Wellesbourne. This could also be emphasised by the provision of shared open spaces within developments for the general use of the community.
Views of the village from Loxley, Kineton, Ettington, Newbold, Walton and Warwick approaches are attractive. Regrettably, the road from Stratford-upon-Avon has been spoilt by the building of a large industrial unit, which dominates the approach to the village from that direction. As with other industrial developments, attempts have been made to shield the units by the planting of trees, making them blend well into the landscape and soften the views, these are not considered to have achieved their objective despite being planted several years ago. Opportunities continue to exist for the further planting of trees to help integrate industrial buildings and should be considered as part of any future development proposals.
Fears remain that future development may continue to have a detrimental effect on the rural character of the village, unless landscape setting and landscape design issues are more fully considered and integrated into new proposals.
Page 13 of 56
Page 249 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Building Character and Design Wellesbourne exhibits a wide diversity of building designs. Over many years, it has grown and evolved into a large working village, and changes in architectural styles of the periods are reflected.
Historically, two centres existed; one being Chestnut Square with adjacent older buildings being linked by a river crossing to a second area leading to the Church. Subsequent developments have left these areas largely untouched but extensive zones of housing development have arisen, particularly to the south west and north east. These comprise both private and social housing, both as estates and in a linear form. In the Village Design Statement of 1999, these developments were considered in seven zones. These zones are re- visited for this report and additional developments since that date are now included.
Page 14 of 56
Page 250 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Figure 1. Character Map of Wellesbourne . This figure is sourced from the 1999 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement and is included pending the receipt of a current 2013 version which will be inserted for the final published version.
Page 15 of 56
Page 251 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Figure 2. Conservation area . This figure highlights the conservation area of the village, indicated by the red border. The area in blue dots indicates the flood-prone areas.
Page 16 of 56
Page 252 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
The Historic Centre
The Conservation Area The central part of Wellesbourne is a conservation area, having St Peter's Church to the north (Wellesbourne Hastings) and Chestnut Square to the south (Wellesbourne Mountford). Some of the finest old houses in the village are in Chestnut Square with warm, orangey-pink Warwickshire brick as the dominant building material. It is an attractive area which has evolved over time and is valued in terms of its character and amenity.
Properties with listed status, which perhaps best exemplify the historic character of Wellesbourne, are centred on Chestnut Square, Church Walk (which leads off to the north) and Chapel Street to the south east. Chapel Street was originally the main shopping area which is reflected in the house names today. The mix of differing styles and variety of construction materials blend to form a harmonious whole. Roofs of tile, slate and thatch, all of differing height, sit harmoniously side by side, and share roof pitch in common. Many include dormer windows of various designs, but all harmonious in scale. Brick built chimneys are of differing dates and styles. Most of the houses facing Chestnut Square, Church Walk and Chapel Street have either short or no front gardens, creating an active frontage and enclosure to the street, and in keeping with the traditional street scene of the period.
This same street pattern is evident in houses around and leading to St Peter’s Church. "Dog Close" is also in this area, bounded by a timber fence to Bridge Street, Church Street and banking down to the River Dene. That Dog Close should be preserved as a green space, a necessary "green lung" for the village, was reinforced by the majority of respondents during the 2010 surveys. Church Street has semi-detached cottages set back from the road on one side, and a modern town house development on the other.
Bricks now form the predominant building material of the village overall, whilst timber frame construction of earlier years remains a feature of several buildings in the historic centre, together with painted stucco work to some facades. Roofs are principally tile or slate, with some thatch. Wellesbourne Hall, a William and Mary house, is brick fronted with stone quoins. St Peter's Church is a mixture of grey limestone, Horton stone and Kenilworth sandstone and its 15th century tower is either Bromsgrove or Arden sandstone. Good examples of timber framing can be seen in the Stag's Head in Chestnut Square and No.2
Page 17 of 56
Page 253 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
School Road. The development of Chedham’s Yard has sought to blend sympathetically whilst being of modern construction.
Newbold Road Area This is an extensive area of development originating as social housing in the early post-war period. Notably, several have large gardens compared with modern houses. Subsequent additions and in-fills have resulted in brick built bungalows, semi-detached and terraced housing with a wide variety of styles and finishing materials. Roofs are tiled and pitches are fairly constant at 45 degrees.
Mature hedges fronting gardens are a prominent feature around the original housing stock in Newbold Place, and low brick walls and timber fencing line the west side of Mordaunt Road where there are some longer front gardens.
There are a considerable number of bungalows in the area situated mainly along the west side of Hastings Road, the east side of St Peter’s Road up to and including the approach to Lawrence Mackie House, and on the north side of Mordaunt Road where it comes down to join the B4087 Newbold Road. Properties are mainly red brick with some rendering and tile hanging features. Some houses have added a front porch.
This area incorporates two purpose built sheltered housing schemes which have proved of great benefit to the village; Willet House, which is a two storey brick and tiled building at the south end of St Peter’s Road, and Lawrence Mackie House, which is to the north. The latter is the larger establishment, a three storey brick building comprising self contained retirement flats and private car park. Some of the brick facades have been painted in a light colour.
The area has an interconnected road system which, to some extent, helps to mitigate the appearance of a large estate. Small green areas and trees also provide some enhancement, a major consideration for future developments. There are several garage courts discretely placed within the housing layout and some off-road parking on St. Peter’s Road, but this is not enough to eliminate much on road parking which seems more in evidence towards Lawrence Mackie House.
Whitehead Drive is a cul-de-sac off the Newbold Road to the north of Mordaunt Road. It is a later development which, apart from some terraced housing, includes several larger brick built detached homes of mixed design, incorporating gables, side entry garages, projecting
Page 18 of 56
Page 254 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement bay windows and half timber details. The road layout has a short spur which gives access to a few further houses set back from the Newbold Road as it leaves the village.
Elliot Drive (including Granville Road, Loxley Close and Baker Drive) The housing around Elliott Drive, off Stratford Road (including Granville Road), was originally built to house RAF personnel in the 1950s. Following the closure of RAF Wellesbourne Mountford in the early 1970s, the houses became the property of the Council, and are now largely owned by social housing associations. The houses in the first grouping, as you leave Stratford Road, are terraced with external walls rendered and painted white or pastel shades. As you progress further into the estate there are fewer rendered facades and houses built of a darker facing brick become the norm. Roofs are generally at 45 degree pitch and are finished with brown concrete tiles. Additional building followed in this area but with different styles, facing brick or cladding being substituted for rendering. Also, a small in-fill of four bungalows has been built on one spur with open lawn and shrubs to the front.
Loxley Close forms part of the additional building, and is accessed either through Elliot Drive or from the Ettington Road where it skirts the Mountford Sports Field. The terrace house concept continues, with short spurs off this through road. Houses here are, in the main, brick built with first floor rendering to some terraces. There is some parallel off-road parking adjacent to high fencing and a mature hedge. Elsewhere there is a mix of open spaces with low walls and timber fences fronting gardens.
Granville Road, (off Stratford Road), is a short cul-de-sac of semi detached properties with a garage court at the end. Houses on one side are of facing brickwork, while those on the other are rendered. Both low fences and hedges front gardens.
Baker Drive is approached through the most northerly entrance to Elliot Drive, where the houses look out on to a large green space screened from the roundabout by the thick tall hedgerow. This same hedgerow extends south the length of the A429 by-pass to the next island, so forming a physical barrier between the road and the houses of Baker Drive. This ribbon development was built in the late 1990’s, between the existing Elliot Drive Estate and the by-pass. The houses are a mix of brick-built short terraces and semi detached dwellings, roofs are of brown concrete plain tiles, pitched at 45 degrees with a clipped verge detail. Distinctive features are the short pitched porches over the front doors and the use of a dark stained finish to all joinery gives the feeling of unity to the whole development. Each
Page 19 of 56
Page 255 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement property has a dedicated off-road parking space either at the side or in front of the property separated with grass and planting.
Mountford Close A square containing the village primary school and its playing field, which is enclosed by a square road with housing on either side. There is one access road and footpath from Newbold Road and the north western boundary provides access to the village junior school. A second access footpath extends from Kineton Road and runs adjacent to the allotments into the top corner of Mountford Close.
The properties are both houses and bungalows, largely individually designed. Nevertheless, the overall blend is good with good use of complementary materials; the brickwork is mainly pale to orange colours, some are rendered and roofs vary between 30 and 45 degrees. A number of the houses were built as officers' quarters for RAF Wellesbourne Mountford; these have some individual characteristics but blend together with the use of a slightly darker brick than those described above. The whole area has a ‘cared for’ look with well tended gardens typically behind low garden walls or hedges, which front most properties. Fully grown trees shade the entrance area to the school.
The north side of the ‘square’ is home to the junior school annex which is set behind the bungalows on the outer rim. The majority of bungalows are sited on the north and eastern side of the square, with more two storey housing to the south west.
The Willowdene Estate (Incorporating Birch Grove, Linden Avenue, Sycamore Close, Brookside Avenue, and Wellesbourne Farm) This, the largest of the developments made in the late 1960s, is in the form of a ’D’ with five cul-de-sac off-shoots. It is principally the work of one national developer reflecting standard designs of the times. House designs are plain, but with relatively large windows. Light coloured bricks dominate, together with frontages of various external claddings. Extensions and modifications are widespread, including uPVC double glazing and latterly solar panels on some roofs. Dark brown concrete tiles cover roofs of differing pitches, some being the traditional 45 degrees and others a lower pitch.
The road curvature, together with a mixture of mainly two and three bedroom detached, semi- detached houses, dormer bungalows and bungalow dwellings, help to reduce the feeling of
Page 20 of 56
Page 256 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement uniformity. Homes of a particular design tend to be grouped together, rather than distributed throughout the Estate. Detached houses are predominantly to the south of the site along Willow Drive and Brookside Avenue with gardens backing onto to the River Dene. Semi- detached houses and dormer bungalows make up the majority of the remaining site, with further detached houses in the west of Sycamore Close and bungalows occupy the east end of the close.
A large grassed open area with mature trees, and wide vision splays at road junctions contribute to a feeling of space within the development. Southern parts back onto the River Dene, and fields open up to the east beyond Brookside Avenue and Wellesbourne Farm.
The northern edge of the development has its own service road running parallel to the B4086 Kineton Road, the roads are separated by a wide grass verge planted with trees.
Westfield Crescent, Grange Gardens, Ettington Close Together with Willowdene, these added considerably to the size of the village in the 1960s, their designs overall being typical of the period.
In general, the properties reflect the designs used by national builders at that time. The layout is "U" shaped, with a mixture of detached and semi-detached houses. Brickwork is pale buff or yellow / orange, fronted with horizontal wooden weatherboard or vertical hung tiles which complement the deep brown concrete roof tiles. Roof pitches are low, either of 30 or 17° degrees. There are grassed areas at the entrance to the crescent on the northern boundary, and the south end of the site is bounded by the cricket pitch on the Mountford Sports field. There are mature trees along this boundary and a footpath linking the top ends of the “U” layout.
Grange Gardens is a small group of predominantly detached houses built on the location of the old Grange Manor House, with a swept entrance from the south east corner of Chestnut Square. It is a cul-de-sac with one short spur. Many of the dwellings exhibit the characteristics of buildings designed in the 1960s, with half-extended frontages comprising the garage and front entrance, and in several properties the garages have been converted into living accommodation. Brickwork colours differ, upper storey timber weather boarding is much in evidence and roofs are of a constant low pitch with dark concrete tiles. Front gardens are short, allowing one car’s length to park clear of the pavement.
Ettington Close is off Walton Road, just before it joins the Ettington Road. The hedges at the
Page 21 of 56
Page 257 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement entrance are neatly trimmed, and have been allowed to grow in height such that they totally screen the two bungalows immediately on the left. The close is a straight road with three lateral offshoots, and has mostly semi-detached properties following the style of the period previously described. Of particular note is the wide colour range of bricks used. The western and southern borders define the limits of the major developments of the 1960s and the adjacent grass areas provide the vital break between the "older" village and the Dovehouse estate.
Constance Harris Close
Constance Harris Close is a small in-fill development resulting from the sale of part of a large garden. It was completed in the late 1990s just south of the historic core of the village. It is a cul-de-sac comprising 12 two-storey detached family homes with small front gardens, private parking and large back gardens. The houses themselves are of red brick with front porch detail. The 45° pitched roofs, some with gables, are finished with brown plain tiles. From an architectural point of view the development does not reflect the distinct local character of the adjacent historic centre.
The Dovehouse Estate The largest project to be completed in the village in the 1980's is the Dovehouse development of nearly 800 homes, to the south of the village and on the opposite side of the A429 by-pass. These range from moderate sized bungalows, semi- and detached 2 to 4 bedroomed houses, and individually designed 5-bedroomed properties. There is also a rectangle of warden controlled bungalows around a lawned area. The complex is unobtrusive, blending in well with the estate. The majority of other bungalows tend to be sited around the south of the development.
The fact that the Dovehouse Estate is concealed, to a certain extent, was important in maintaining the opinion of the populace, that Wellesbourne remains a village and not a spiral of new housing developments.
Designs vary widely, but the roof pitches, with a few exceptions, are generally lower (30°), finished with either concrete plain or pan tiles. External walls are predominantly textured brickwork interspersed with houses having vertical tile hanging, claddings and painted render. The mix of colours and designs blend successfully as a whole.
Page 22 of 56
Page 258 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
There is an extensive variety of doors and windows, the latter including bow, bay and casement windows in both hard and soft woods, painted or stained; uPVC is also very much in evidence.
Of particular note is the overall layout, with a judicious use of road curvatures, walled gardens, small green areas and trees. The roads are kept relatively short, reducing the perception of an estate, and several interesting walkways add to this. Landscaping has now matured and the overall design contributes to a feeling of space, there is a screened children’s play area and a large sports field on the left of the most northerly entrance to Dovehouse Drive off the Loxley Road.
This feeling of space has not always been evident in more recent developments in the village, and it is thought that much more consideration should be given to this aspect when looking at future proposals.
Further housing exists between these larger developments referred to above, but no common design theme is evident. There is a wide variety of frontages and brick colours, with some stucco rendering. Some smaller developments of single and double-bedroomed properties have in-filled the older parts of the village. These are mainly two storey with, exceptionally, some hidden three-storey town houses.
Recent Expansion The principal recent expansive development sites in Wellesbourne are to the north of the village, adjacent to the Old Warwick Road, compromising of Daniell Road and Hammond Green, where substantial numbers of houses have been built, together with Charlecote Fields, a small infill of 7 properties. These are mainly detached properties, with some three-storey townhouses and also some smaller units. This Northwards expansion follows the line of the old Warwick Road and has completely filled the open space across to the new Warwick Road (the A429). This was a big increase over the original limited number of houses along the old Warwick Road. This has resulted in some houses being built very close to the busy A429 itself, albeit being screened by trees and shrubs to dampen the impact of traffic noise.
The other new expansion is a development to the South-east of the village. Here, 7 homes form the first residential site off Walton Lane. These large individual houses share some design elements between both themselves and the locality, but the single thatched property
Page 23 of 56
Page 259 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement has a more “isolated” and unique look. There have been no further developments along Walton Lane as the road is too narrow for regular two-way traffic. The development is most visible from Willow Drive and Kineton Road across some open country but the visual impact is reduced by trees protected by preservation orders. The site is not visible from the A429 or from the sports field.
Infill Development Sites There have been four main infill developments in Wellesbourne over recent years.
Huntington Court (off Lowes Lane) : This substantial site of terraced housing comprises of two and three-storey units, but gives the impression of being both relatively low and unobtrusive. The site style, in particular the use of brick, matches the office units built at the same time on the nearby site of what was an old warehouse. This backs onto Wellesbourne House, which has been converted to offer low rise office accommodation. Access to Lowes Lane is possible from Ettington Road and the A429 without going into the village, also access via Chapel Street.
The Old Orchard (off Lowes Lane): This is a small development of three relatively large houses opposite Huntington Court built in around 2000.
Home Furlong in the Dovehouse Estate: This limited development of small dwellings was originally a site intended for shops within the Dovehouse Estate. The houses are in the similar style to the immediate local design features.
Co-operative supermarket: The opening of the Co-operative supermarket nearby (accessed through an underpass) reduced the need for these shops and instead, houses were built alongside a play area. The site was overgrown waste ground, so the houses, which match the nearby dwellings in style, are a positive addition to the area. They are also of a size to match first-time buyers' needs.
Thorpe Mews: In addition, there have been single houses on, for instance Kineton Road, and a small development of town houses (Thorpe Mews) at the corner of Church Street and Warwick Road. Thorpe Mews comprises 4 town houses in a courtyard arrangement so that the car parking is hidden behind a reduced size ground floor. Attempts have been made to align the roofline to match other buildings alongside, which has been successful from one viewpoint; similarly, the houses are located very close to the front of the site, matching the
Page 24 of 56
Page 260 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement older properties and shops. This is perhaps the most evident adaptation of a development to the surroundings within Wellesbourne.
Page 25 of 56
Page 261 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Commercial Building Design Commercial buildings fall mainly into three categories; shops, offices, storage & manufacturing units.
Shops The main area of small and independent shops is centered north of the river, with the Co- operative supermarket being to the south. In the Parish Plan surveys all the local shops were highly valued together with the medical, veterinary, banking, library and garage services provided.
Some of the shops on the Warwick Road and Bridge Street still have the original shop fronts, and houses in Chapel Street show similar frontage. The Walton Estate built the 1960’s style- shopping precinct; this comprises two rows of brick built shops with large display windows facing each other and adjoining garages.
In earlier appraisals, the precinct was viewed as being in need of modernization. During 2010, when there was a period of debate over its future, there was a strong view that the precinct should be preserved. However, it is important here to distinguish between the support for independent shops and the particular buildings they happen to be sited in. It is clear from the results of the first 2010 survey that the village values independent shops, with facilities such as the Co-operative; the hardware store; Duncan’s pet store; the Post Office; Bruno’s electrical; the One Stops; and the chemist (to name a few) all being used by 70% and above of respondents. If improving the precinct means pricing the shops out of existence, then the community would prefer to keep the shops.
The Co-operative supermarket, built in the 1990’s and since extended, is to the south of the river. It is very popular and both its size and location serves the Wellesbourne and surrounding population very well.
Offices There is a considerable amount of office accommodation in the village, as well as small offices between and above shops and dedicated buildings. The conversion and extension of Wellesbourne House and its outbuildings provides several office suites. Equidebt has its headquarters opposite the Co-operative supermarket. There is also office accommodation on the airfield.
Page 26 of 56
Page 262 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Outside the core of the village, a number of traditional farm buildings have been (or have permission to be) converted to various uses including office spaces and workshops. This preserves attractive rural buildings as well as creating employment. (For future guidance, please refer to ‘Conversion of traditional agricultural buildings’, Stratford-on-Avon District Design Guide - Appendix A).
Storage, Manufacturing & Distribution Units The main area of industrial activity in the village is on the airfield. There are small parcels of land within this area that are available for additional business uses, as designated in the District Local Plan Review (see proposal WELL.C and Inset Map 2.8). As the airfield is still, in part, an operational field under its own Air Traffic Control, any buildings erected on this site cannot be fully shielded from general view.
A belt of trees from the nearby Dovehouse Estate shield a group of older buildings, of hangar like construction, sited on the Loxley Road side of the airfield. The more recent industrial building on Stratford Road approach to the village is considered disproportional in scale, with neither consideration to materials used nor their colour. It is largely perceived to be an inappropriate building for a village. Any further building of large sheds are of significant concern to residents, not only from the visual point of view, but from the additional HGV traffic they generate.
Page 27 of 56
Page 263 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
The Impact of Traffic on Village Life Not only has the growth in domestic and commercial building altered the design and character of Wellesbourne, it has had a major effect on traffic in the village. The growth in housing stock, the increase in young adults having to live with their parents and increased employment at the industrial site, all results in more cars taking to the village roads. The continued growth of the weekend and Bank Holiday markets on the airfield has also had a significant impact on the level of traffic in and around Wellesbourne. Despite visitors being encouraged to use the A429 by-pass through improved signage, there remains considerable build up of traffic, causing delays in and around the village, particularly from the Dovehouse Estate, which routinely restricts the movements of local inhabitants. As traffic builds up on the A429, visitors anxious to reach/depart the market are using the village streets as an alternative route, and this has a deleterious effect on village life.
Furthermore, the increased development of the industrial units has seen a marked increase in HGVs travelling directly through the centre of the village, following SatNav “quickest routes” to/from the lorry depot. This was cited as a problem by 61% respondents, this despite recent traffic calming measures, speed indicator displays and voluntary speed trap activities.
The 2010 Parish Plan public consultation asked about a range of traffic-related issues. The two most traffic impacted roads were identified as the key thoroughfares of Newbold Road and Bridge Street with 50.4% and 56% respondents respectively reporting occasional or regular issues. It should be noted that these two roads also prominently feature with parking issues which are directly linked to the local businesses located there. The other key roads are Kineton Rd, Stratford Rd (main thoroughfares) and Mountford Close (village school) which were all identified by approximately 20% of respondents as having similar problems.
Increasingly, residents are parking more frequently on the streets outside their homes. Frontages are too shallow to allow on-site parking and the density of building leaves no space for this. Concern is routinely raised regarding the access for emergency vehicles due to the severely restricted road widths (e.g. Church Street). Provision of adequate parking spaces would alleviate the problem and also leave more spaces around new properties, giving a more open aspect to the developments. Prospective developers are urged to give these proposals serious consideration in any future planning applications.
Finally, it is also recommended that provision for cycle ways and pedestrian links be
Page 28 of 56
Page 264 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement considered in future developments to reduce the reliance on vehicular transport in the village. Footpaths should continue to be constructed of sympathetic materials and additional roads, which may be needed, should be sympathetic to the context in terms of layout, materials and detailing. National policies and guidance and District Council planning policy and guidance should be strictly complied with. Grass verges, as a feature of the outskirts of our village, are to be encouraged, as a natural feature, rather than as an opportunity for an ad-hoc car parking area.
Page 29 of 56
Page 265 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Conclusion
General Wellesbourne residents value their village. Results from the consultations undertaken in both 1999 and 2010 showed that residents want to preserve their village from inappropriate and poorly designed developments. Residents particularly wanted to ensure the existing 8 conservation area is preserved and/or enhanced . Maintaining open spaces, sports facilities for all ages and general facilities, such as local shops rated equally high in peoples’ estimation.
Views out of and within Wellesbourne, as seen from highways, footpaths, bridleways, public open spaces or other public areas within the settlement, should not be blocked or obstructed by any new development. The traditional diffuse edge of Wellesbourne is a major factor in helping the village blend into its rural surroundings, and significantly contributes to the 9 character of the place . New developments should maintain the most common edge character of the area in which it is sited within the settlement.
Wellesbourne is considered by its community to be a large rural village situated in a rural area. Any development should maintain this rural village character and feel which is as 10 valued by Wellesbourne’s residents in 2011 as it was in 1999 .
Housing Wellesbourne residents feel certain that standardised building designs where there is little or no consideration of local distinctiveness or character do not positively contribute to the village. These do not fit well in a village setting and can negatively impact on the overall local character. We would recommend that more variety be introduced in new developments using well-designed properties, which respect existing buildings.
In the 1999 VDS Consultation Questionnaire, 96% of the respondents felt that properties should be sympathetically sited and built with close observation of the rural overtones of the 11 community, such as choice of materials, colour, size and height . Even more respondents were concerned about the density of housing within new developments and wanted sufficient
8 9 Vision 4 Wellesbourne – The Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan (2011), p.15 10 Vision 4 Wellesbourne – The Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan (2011), p.28 11 Vision 4 Wellesbourne – The Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan (2011), p.3 Wellesbourne Housing Needs Survey, (August 2011), Appendix B. Page 30 of 56
Page 266 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement landscaping within new development. This was reinforced by comments in the 2010 12 consultations . Finally, more consideration should be given to housing site layout and 13 pedestrian and vehicular access, which is felt to be as important as location .
The above factors were considered critical: they determine whether homes overall will be pleasant places in which to live and be sensitively integrated into the local architectural 14 vernacular . Collectively, they will help maintain and improve upon the successful community.
Industrial Great concern was expressed during consultations about the height of new buildings. The vast majority of residents felt that height should be restricted to an appropriate height for its context and that new industrial buildings should be sympathetic to their surroundings. Buildings with substantial mass should be avoided.
Increased industrial building will bring with it increased traffic, not only to transport the raw materials to produce goods and to carry finished products for delivery, but also to cope with workers commuting to and from their place of work. Consideration of such traffic issues must be factored in during the planning and development of future industrial and commercial 15 builds .
At the earliest stages, better consultation should take place between all those involved in the development process. All should be aware of the need to preserve the rural approaches and gateways to the village.
12 13 Vision 4 Wellesbourne – The Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan (2011), 14 Wellesbourne Housing Needs Survey , (August 2011), Appendix B. 15 Wellesbourne Housing Needs Survey , (August 2011), Appendix B. Vision 4 Wellesbourne – The Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan (2011), p.16 Page 31 of 56
Page 267 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Appendix I
Key Guidance Points From The Village Design Statement
KGP1 - Guidance on Waterways, Drainage and Related Issues
Future developments should include proposals for the suitable management of water run-off, and long term drainage solutions and include suitable flood KGP1a defense measures using a “1 in 100 year” event model. Provision must be Page 11 made for their long term maintenance.
It is imperative that any development should be sited away from the flood plain KGP1b of the River Dene. Page 11
The flood plain of the River Dene should be retained for recreational purposes, KGP1c particularly in areas adjacent to the public footpath. Page 12
Future development design should take into account and preserve and/or KGP1d enhance the amenity, ecological and biodiversity of the river. Page 12
The views upstream from the A429 by-pass towards the village centre should KGP1e be preserved. This is supported through policy EF.3 of the Stratford-on-Avon Pages 9, 12 & District Local Plan Review as an Area of Restraint. 26
KGP2 - Guidance on Ecological & Environmental Issues
Existing open spaces throughout the village and its environs should be retained and preserved. The natural green corridor along the river (as identified Pages KGP2a in page 28 of the 2011 Parish Plan) and Dog Close should be maintained as is, 9, 12, 14 rather than used for alternative purposes. & 26
New development should not block or obstruct views out of the village, as seen Pages KGP2b from highways, footpaths, bridleways, public open spaces or other public areas 9, 12 & within the settlement. 26
Any further roundabouts to be in keeping with those already present; grassed KGP2c Pages and planted with a range of trees, bushes and wild flowers. 9 & 12
Appropriateness of street furniture should be considered. Underground cabling television and internet services must be considered where new development is KGP2d Page planned. Street lighting should be non-intrusive, energy saving by default with 25 light pollution kept to a minimum.
Page 32 of 56
Page 268 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Existing trees and hedgerows should be preserved and suitably enhanced, Pages KGP2e where necessary, to retain the village identity, maintain encourage biodiversity 9, 12 & and the creation of habitats. 26
Pages KGP2f Existing footpaths should be preserved. 9, 12 & 26
Grass verges, as a feature of the outskirts of our village, are to be encouraged, Pages KGP2g as a natural feature, rather than as potential areas for car parking. 9, 12 & 25
KGP3 - Guidance on Development Design and Landscaping
From the earliest stages, it is recommended that consultation should take KGP3a place between all those involved in the development process.
New developments should take into consideration the conservation area, land form, visual skylines, and edge characteristics of the settlement and village Pages KGP3b boundaries, from street patterns through to materials. Further detailed 9, 13 – information about the area can be found in the Stratford-on-Avon District 21, 26 Design Guide and the accompanying Character Map of the District.
The historical origins which have shaped the present village should be Pages KGP3c recognised so that any future development will harmonise with what already 7, 8, exists. 12 – 13, 26
It is considered important that the village maintains a high quality and mixture of styles and that standardised “volume house designs” are not used as a Pages KGP3d solution to expansion. Any future development should comprise a variety of 13 – 21, complementary styles and be sensitive to the diverse and individual character 26 of the village.
All future developments, both residential and commercial, should be fully integrated into the landscape through suitable landscaping and the Pages KGP3e consideration of views. Due consideration should be given to their scale and 19 – 20, sense of proportion, the appropriate use of detailing and materials and their 23, 26 - colour to ensure they blend seamlessly into the environment. 27
Whilst some infill and redevelopments may, in principle, be appropriate, they KGP3f neither reflect nor complement surrounding architecture. All future Page 21 developments should take into account and respect the existing context.
Landscaping provides visual breaks in both this and other developments and KGP3g have softened their impact, helping retain the rural character of the village. Pages Landscaping proposals should be employed in future developments to achieve 19 - 20 and maintain this character. Adequate provision for ongoing landscaping
Page 33 of 56
Page 269 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
maintenance should be established within new development
The use of short road lengths and curvatures, walled gardens and planted green areas are considered to have collectively reduced the “estate” feel of the KGP3h Pages Dovehouse. These features contribute to maintaining the village atmosphere 19 - 20 and should be considered for future developments.
The feeling of space has not always been evident in more recent developments in the village, and it is felt that much more consideration should be given to this aspect when looking at future proposals. Space between and Pages KGP3i around houses should be included to allow for appropriate landscape design 19 – 20, and screening and to help soften the impact of new buildings, hard standing 26 and car parking.
Consideration should be given to design solutions that reduce the impact of KGP3j noise on residential areas built close to roads. Page 20
The introduction of both trees and shrubs, and the protection of existing trees, Pages KGP3k hedges and naturalised plants, should be a priority in the design of new 9, 12, 19, development. 26
Whilst the Thorpe Mews three-storey roofline respects the adjacent buildings from Warwick Road, and some old three-storey houses already exist, there are KGP3l no other readily identifiable areas where further three-storey buildings would be Page 21 considered suitable. Such development proposals are unlikely to be supported by the village.
KGP4 - Guidance on Roads, Traffic and Transport
Any new roadways built into the village, particularly within new developments, KGP4a should incorporate a layout and detailing that is appropriate to its context in Page 25 terms of design
Road and footpath signs should be of a suitable pattern and colour, with KGP4b advertising signs, street furniture and lighting being sensitive to the character Page 25 and use of the particular area.
New developments should include footpaths to link with surrounding KGP4c countryside and also with the village, to enable and encourage residents to Pages walk to local amenities. 12 & 21
Footpaths should continue to be constructed of materials that are sympathetic KGP4d to their context and use. Page 25
Page 34 of 56
Page 270 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Provision of adequate off street parking spaces should be considered as part Pages KGP4e of any development, together with appropriate spaces around new buildings. 12 & 24 - 25
Any increase of on-street parking should be avoided when converting existing properties. Approval for such planning requests should only be given where KGP4f Pages this does not remove the availability of off-street parking; this would include the 24 - 25 conversion of residential garages.
KGP5 - Guidance on Commercial Buildings
The siting of new office spaces should take into account the need to reduce the KGP5a Pages volume of commercial traffic within, and through, the village. 24 & 27
Any purpose-built offices should both fit in visually and be sympathetic to the styles and construction materials used within the village. Where cladding is KGP5b Pages used on industrial buildings, appropriate selection of colour should be made to 23 & 27 visually integrate them into the surroundings.
Sufficient off-road parking should be provided for commercial properties. This Pages KGP5c includes either extensions to current premises, conversion of pre-existing 22 – 25, buildings or new purpose built offices. 27
Page 35 of 56
Page 271 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Appendix II
Sources of Evidence for Key Guidance Points
Multiple sources of evidence have been used in the compilation of this document and this appendix section describes, wherever possible, the basis for each KPG statement. Briefly, the main data collections have been achieved using: the previous 1999 VDS plus the 2004 update; both paper and online village surveys; several public consultations; face-to-face meetings with special interest groups; online village forum website; SDC/WCC data such as housing and environmental data; and regional & national online databases.
Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Waterways, Drainage and Related Issues
Evidence gathered from village survey (55% respondents stated it was either a fairly or very big problem), public meetings (e.g. the SDC planning meeting KGP1a regards the Redhill site), public consultations and statements made in the Page 11 earlier VDS documents. Strength of public opinion is reflected in the KGP.
Stated in the 1999 VDS, and reiterated to the authors during village survey, KGP1b public meetings and pubic consultations. Page 11
Stated in the 1999 VDS, and reiterated to the authors during village survey, KGP1c public meetings and pubic consultations. Page 12
Stated in the 1999 VDS, and reiterated to the authors during village survey, KGP1d public meetings and pubic consultations. Page 12
Views and perspectives were reflected in the 1999 VDS and in the village KGP1e surveys. Furthermore, this is supported through policy EF.3 of the Stratford- Pages 9, 12 & on-Avon District Local Plan Review as an Area of Restraint. 26
Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Ecological & Environmental Issues
Stated in the 1999 VDS, and reiterated to the authors during village survey, public meetings and pubic consultations. In the first village survey, over 50% Pages KGP2a wanted Dog Close kept as a green space. 33% of respondents in the second 9, 12, 14 survey wished for Dog Close to be converted for parking with 66% either & 26 objecting or offering no opinion.
Pages KGP2b Concern expressed in village surveys and public consultations. 9, 12 & 26
Page 36 of 56
Page 272 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
KGP2c Concern expressed in village surveys and public consultations. Pages 9 & 12
KGP2d Stated in previous VDS. Page 25
Pages KGP2e Stated in previous VDS. 9, 12 & 26
Stated in previous VDS and supported by statements made in public consultations. 74% responses in the second survey wanted to maintain the “naturalness” of the rural footpaths and 48% expressing concern footpaths Pages KGP2f were already in poor condition. 71% wanted footpaths and walks to be close 9, 12 & and not in driving distance. Collectively these make a strong statement for 26 footpath preservation & improvement.
Stated in previous VDS. 56% people in the second survey felt the parking Pages KGP2g problem had deteriorated, and as an issue was identified in the “hate” and 9, 12 & “ashamed” criteria during public consultations. 25
Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Development Design and Landscaping
Stated in previous VDS. Continued support for this stance expressed during KGP3a public consultations.
Pages KGP3b Stated in previous VDS. 9, 13 – 21, 26
Pages KGP3c Stated in previous VDS. 7, 8, 12 – 13, 26
Stated in previous VDS. In the second survey in a subsection orientated around the Redhill development, 65% respondents expressed a wish for future developments to be of a mixed nature. Conversely, 88% declared objections to Pages KGP3d it being mainly “executive” style builds, 78% against it being mainly high 13 – 21, density affordable homes, 75% against mainly sheltered housing and 60% 26 against it being mainly ECO housing. As such, there is strong support for a mixed style sympathetic to the existing environs.
Pages KGP3e Stated in previous VDS. 19 – 20, 23, 26 - 27
Page 37 of 56
Page 273 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Stated in previous VDS. Concern was expressed in consultations and surveys KGP3f on infill – 39% survey respondents wanted the now expired moratorium to Page 21 continue, and 51% to either limit or consider on individual merits.
KGP3g Stated in previous VDS. Pages 19 - 20
KGP3h Stated in previous VDS. Pages 19 - 20
Pages KGP3i Stated in previous VDS. 19 – 20, 26
KGP3j Stated in previous VDS. Page 20
Pages KGP3k Stated in previous VDS. 9, 12, 19, 26
KGP3l Concerns expressed during public consultations. Page 21
Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Roads, Traffic and Transport
KGP4a Stated in previous VDS. Page 25
KGP4b Stated in previous VDS. Page 25
KGP4c Stated in previous VDS. Pages 12 & 21
KGP4d Stated in previous VDS. Page 25
Stated in previous VDS. Increased parking concerns expressed in both public Pages KGP4e consultations and surveys. 12 & 24 - 25
Stated in previous VDS. Increased parking concerns expressed in both public KGP4f Pages consultations and surveys. 24 - 25
Sources of Evidence for KGPs related to Commercial Buildings
Stated in previous VDS. KGP5a Pages 24 & 27
Page 38 of 56
Page 274 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Stated in previous VDS. Concern expressed in public consultations following KGP5b the “unsympathetic” development of the commercial buildings on the airfield Pages land adjacent to the A429 carriageway. 23 & 27
Stated in previous VDS. Pages KGP5c 22 – 25, 27
Page 39 of 56
Page 275 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Appendix III
Sustainability Appraisal It is important that all new developments are built with sustainability in mind. The UK Sustainable Development Strategy document “Securing The Future” sets out five guiding principles to achieve this goal: living within environmental limits; promoting a strong and vibrant society; sustainable economies; ensuring robust governance; and using evidential science responsibly in decision making.
To assess the objectives of this Village Design Statement within the context of sustainability, the authors have undertaken a sustainability appraisal covering the three key facets laid out in the National Planning Policy Framework:
Social Role – developments should fulfil the local social requirements for present and future generations. They should be of high standards and reflect the community’s needs for health, social and cultural well being. They should support and create strong, vibrant and healthy communities.
Economic Role – developments should build a strong, responsive and competitive economy by ensuring appropriate land use and type is made available at the correct time for the community’s benefit. It is important that well coordinated and managed long term objectives are produced to interlock future economic, infrastructure and community benefits.
Environmental Role – developments should positively contribute towards protecting and improving natural, built and historic environments. By achieving this, biodiversity should improve, natural resources should be preserved, pollution and waste can be minimised and low carbon builds will become standard.
The following appraisal matrix is designed to ensure that the Key Guidance Points defined in this VDS are assessed, justified and thus acted upon to ensure that future developments positively impact the region. By looking at the individual components and assessing each against the social, economic and environmental roles defined above, a five-point score has been derived identifying high, medium or neutral impacts, both positive and negative.
As will be seen from Appendix IV, this VDS has been subject to substantial analysis and consultation, including a public consultation, Wellesbourne Parish Council, SDC and other agencies. Hence this sustainability appraisal is considered robust.
Page 40 of 56
Page 276 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Key to Score Values Score Description
+2 This indicates that the Key Guidance Point will have a high positive impact to the community
+1 This indicates that the Key Guidance Point will have a medium positive impact to the community
0 This indicates that the Key Guidance Point will have a neutral impact to the community
-1 This indicates that the Key Guidance Point will have a medium negative impact to the community
-2 This indicates that the Key Guidance Point will have a high negative impact to the community
Sustainability Appraisal
Key Guidance Point Social Economic Environmental Impact Impact Impact
KGP1a - Future developments should include proposals for the suitable management of water run-off, and long term drainage solutions and include suitable flood +2 +2 +2 defense measures using a “1 in 100 year” event model. Provision must be made for their long term maintenance.
KGP1b - It is imperative that any development should be sited away from the flood plain of the River Dene. +1 +1 +2
KGP1c -The flood plain of the River Dene should be retained for recreational purposes, particularly in areas +1 0 +2 adjacent to the public footpath.
KGP1d -Future development design should take into account and preserve and/or enhance the amenity, +1 -1 +2 ecological and biodiversity of the river.
KGP1e -The views upstream from the A429 by-pass towards the village centre should be preserved. This is supported through policy EF.3 of the Stratford-on-Avon +1 0 +2 District Local Plan Review as an Area of Restraint.
Page 41 of 56
Page 277 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Key Guidance Point Social Economic Environmental Impact Impact Impact
KGP2a -Existing open spaces throughout the village and its environs should be retained and preserved. The natural green corridor along the river (as identified in page 28 of the 2011 Parish Plan) and Dog Close should +1 0 +2 be maintained as is, rather than used for alternative purposes.
KGP2b -New development should not block or obstruct views out of the village, as seen from highways, footpaths, bridleways, public open spaces or other public +1 0 +2 areas within the settlement.
KGP2c - Any further roundabouts to be in keeping with those already present; grassed and planted with a range +1 0 +1 of trees, bushes and wild flowers.
KGP2d - Appropriateness of street furniture should be considered. Underground cabling television and internet services must be considered where new development is +1 +1 +2 planned. Street lighting should be non-intrusive, energy saving by default with light pollution kept to a minimum.
KGP2e - Existing trees and hedgerows should be preserved and suitably enhanced, where necessary, to retain the village identity, maintain encourage +1 0 +2 biodiversity and the creation of habitats.
KGP2f - Existing footpaths should be preserved. +2 -1 +2
KGP2g - Grass verges, as a feature of the outskirts of our village, are to be encouraged, as a natural feature, +2 -1 +2 rather than as potential areas for car parking.
KGP3a - From the earliest stages, it is recommended +2 +2 +1 that consultation should take place between all those involved in the development process.
Key Guidance Point Social Economic Environmental Impact Impact Impact
Page 42 of 56
Page 278 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
KGP3b - New developments should take into consideration the conservation area, land form, visual skylines, and edge characteristics of the settlement and village boundaries, from street patterns through to materials. Further detailed information about the area +2 +2 +2 can be found in the Stratford-on-Avon District Design Guide and the accompanying Character Map of the District.
KGP3c - The historical origins which have shaped the present village should be recognised so that any future +2 0 +2 development will harmonise with what already exists.
KGP3d - It is considered important that the village maintains a high quality and mixture of styles and that standardised “volume house designs” are not used as a solution to expansion. Any future development should +2 +1 +1 comprise a variety of complementary styles and be sensitive to the diverse and individual character of the village.
KGP3e - All future developments, both residential and commercial, should be fully integrated into the landscape through suitable landscaping and the consideration of views. Due consideration should be given to their scale +1 +1 +2 and sense of proportion, the appropriate use of detailing and materials and their colour to ensure they blend seamlessly into the environment.
KGP3f - Whilst some infill and redevelopments may, in +2 +1 +2 principle, be appropriate, they neither reflect nor complement surrounding architecture. All future developments should take into account and respect the existing context.
KGP3g - Landscaping provides visual breaks in both this +2 -1 +2 and other developments and have softened their impact, helping retain the rural character of the village. Landscaping proposals should be employed in future developments to achieve and maintain this character. Adequate provision for ongoing landscaping maintenance should be established within new development
Key Guidance Point Social Economic Environmental Impact Impact Impact
Page 43 of 56
Page 279 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
KGP3h - The use of short road lengths and curvatures, walled gardens and planted green areas are considered to have collectively reduced the “estate” feel of the Dovehouse. These features contribute to maintaining +2 -1 +2 the village atmosphere and should be considered for future developments.
KGP3i - The feeling of space has not always been evident in more recent developments in the village, and it is felt that much more consideration should be given to this aspect when looking at future proposals. Space between and around houses should be included to allow +2 -1 +2 for appropriate landscape design and screening and to help soften the impact of new buildings, hardstanding and car parking.
KGP3j - Consideration should be given to design solutions that reduce the impact of noise on residential +2 -1 +2 areas built close to roads.
KGP3k - The introduction of both trees and shrubs, and the protection of existing trees, hedges and naturalised plants, should be a priority in the design of new +2 -1 +2 development.
KGP3l - Whilst the Thorpe Mews three-storey roofline respects the adjacent buildings from Warwick Road, and some old three-storey houses already exist, there are no other readily identifiable areas where further three-storey 0 -1 +1 buildings would be considered suitable. Such development proposals are unlikely to be supported by the village.
KGP4a - Any new roadways built into the village, particularly within new developments, should incorporate a layout and detailing that is appropriate to its context in +2 +2 +2 terms of design
KGP4b - Road and footpath signs should be of a suitable pattern and colour, with advertising signs, street furniture and lighting being sensitive to the character and use of +2 +1 +2 the particular area.
KGP4c - New developments should include footpaths to +2 +1 +2 link with surrounding countryside and also with the village, to enable and encourage residents to walk to local amenities.
Page 44 of 56
Page 280 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Key Guidance Point Social Economic Environmental Impact Impact Impact KGP4d - Footpaths should continue to be constructed of materials that are sympathetic to their context and use. +1 0 +2
KGP4e - Provision of adequate off street parking spaces should be considered as part of any development, +2 +2 +1 together with appropriate spaces around new buildings.
KGP4f - Any increase of on-street parking should be avoided when converting existing properties. Approval for such planning requests should only be given where +2 0 0 this does not remove the availability of off-street parking; this would include the conversion of residential garages.
KGP5a - The siting of new office spaces should take into account the need to reduce the volume of commercial +2 +2 +2 traffic within, and through, the village.
KGP5b - Any purpose-built offices should both fit in visually and be sympathetic to the styles and construction materials used within the village. Where cladding is used on industrial buildings, appropriate +1 +1 +2 selection of colour should be made to visually integrate them into the surroundings.
KGP5c - Sufficient off-road parking should be provided for commercial properties. This includes either extensions to current premises, conversion of pre- +2 +2 +1 existing buildings or new purpose built offices.
Page 45 of 56
Page 281 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Appendix IV
Responses from Public & Other Consultations
Details below specify the feedback and input receive during the six week consultation period. They specify from whom and when the input was received by the steering committee, and also indicate the formal response to each key point raised.
Date Received Submitter Input and Respective Response from the Steering Committee
Councillor Lawley provided image of conversation area. Cllr Eric Lawley (WPC) 05.07.13
Steering Group Incorporated map detail as Figure 2 Reply
Mr Hargis requested the definition of the conservation area on the Mr John Hargis 05.07.13 map in Figure 1
Steering Group Incorporated in map provided by Cllr Lawley (Figure 2) Reply
Mr Hanley submitted the following partial email (abridged here for space purposes) indicating the historical value of Wellesbourne House: “ Sir/Madam, I wish to make the team members who are working on this statement aware of the historic significance of the original Wellesbourne House on Walton Road.In reading through the Wellesbourne Village Design Statement I see little reference to Wellesbourne House other than comments that it provides small office units so I feel I must make you aware of what is truly one of the best kept secrets regarding Wellesbourne.The 05.07.13 Mr Clive Hanley Wellesbourne House Estate used to cover a much greater area of land to the south of the village than it does now. The original house was built sometime in the early 19thCentury as a hunting lodge. Following his marriage to Juliette Magill Kinzie Gordon in 1886 the estate was purchased by William McKay Low – a wealthy entrepreneur. Wellesbourne House became their family home for 19 years until the early death of William. During their ownership William created stables for his many racehorses on land that is now “Walton Way ”.
Page 46 of 56
Page 282 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Reference has been made on page 16 and in Key Guidance Steering Group Points 3b and 3c regarding the importance of retaining areas of Reply historic interest. The committee feels that these fulfil the relevance of Wellesbourne House specific to the remit of the VDS.
Date Received Submitter Input and Respective Response from the Steering Committee
Councillor Close submitted five typographical and naming Cllr David Close corrections 16.07.13 Steering Group All corrections were pertinent and applied to the document Reply
Mr Hargis submitted the following partial email (abridged here for space purposes). “…there is no reference to the Area of Restraint which covers Dog Close and fields further north. This area is specifically referred to in the SDC draft Core Strategy report (item Mr John Hargis CS.14). Furthermore, I'm not sure if it is within the scope of the VDS to propose an additional Area of Restraint which covers the areas designated as being of high and medium/high sensitivity in the land sensitivity survey report (areas referred to as W04, W05 33.07.13 and W06) which lie to the south of the village .”
Whilst the phrase “Area of Restraint” has not been used, the significance of Dog Close and the surrounding locale has already been specifically emphasised on pages 12, 16, 28 and 30 (where Steering Group it is Key Guidance Point 2a). Reply It is not within the remit of the steering committee to propose new areas of restraint.
Page 47 of 56
Page 283 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Mr Careford submitted several comments (abridged below):
i. Inclusion of images and/or annotated photographs to enhance and illustrate the narrative and identify potential design opportunities
ii. That the VDS could highlight areas of particular sensitivity in design terms Mr John Careford 28.07.13 iii. Include a section on the landscape, setting, context, (SDC Planning topography, views and vistas etc. Department) iv. Include a map showing the evolution of Wellesbourne
v. Highlight the key design features of each character area which any new development would have to accord with
vi. Include some generic design advice from new developments, whilst avoiding duplication of the District Design Guide.
Date Received Submitter Input and Respective Response from the Steering Committee
Page 48 of 56
Page 284 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
i. This work was already underway and will be included in the final print version – it’s been actively omitted from the consultation versions for purposes of time
ii. Extensive detail in the character area, commercial and traffic sections of the VDS, alongside items highlighted in the Key Guidance Points, are believed to fulfil this requirement
iii. The sections entitled “Landscape and Setting” (page 8) and “Open Spaces and Views” (page 12) are believed to Steering Group fulfil this requirement
Reply iv. Maps will be included in the final print version
v. Extensive detail in both the character area and commercial sections of the VDS, alongside multiple items highlighted in the Key Guidance Points, are believed to fulfil this requirement
vi. Whilst deliberately avoiding subjective statements, examples of generic design advice are provided in pages 25, 28, 29 and throughout Key Guidance Point section 3. Environmental impacts are also assessed in the Sustainability Review.
Page 49 of 56
Page 285 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Appendix V
Key Meetings, Consultations and Events
Data gathered from the below key meetings and events have contributed to the evidence used in writing this Village Design Statement. Its inclusion is to both describe and provide the time line of key events undertaken and experienced by the current production team, and to ensure full transparency. This section does not include details of events and meetings of the teams who wrote and produced previous VDS documents, but whose data and input has been retained in large parts in this version. Furthermore, it does not detail every conversation, email or query between the authors and SDC/WWC/other regional specialist agencies or staff.
Date Time Event, Meeting or Activity
Inaugural Meeting of the Parish Plan Task Force in the Village Hall, 16 15.04.10 7.30pm attendees.
Meeting at Pitt House with Broadway Malyan & CEG to discuss the 29.04.10 4.00pm proposals for the Redhill Nursery Development. (Steering Group).
29.04.10 7.30pm Parish Plan Meeting in the Village Hall, 14 attendees, 3 apologies.
06.05.10 8.30pm Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House.
10.05.10 7.00pm Meeting of Transport / Planning Group at 12 Redhill Close.
20.05.10 7.30pm Parish Plan Meeting in the Village Hall, 17 attendees, 4 apologies.
Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House. Name changed from ‘Parish Plan’ 03.06.10 7.30pm to ‘Vision 4 Wellesbourne’, so removing any thought that this document was allied to the Parish Council.
17.06.10 7.30pm Meeting of Transport / Planning Group at 12 Redhill Close.
Parish Plan / Task Force Meeting in the Village Hall, 11 attendees, 5 24.06.10 7.30pm apologies.
01.07.10 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House.
03.07.10 n/a Web site and message board ‘Vision 4 Wellesbourne’ set up.
Page 50 of 56
Page 286 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Banners, and posters etc. advertising the Vision 4 Wellesbourne being followed up at the School Fayre on the 18.07.10 and ‘Drop-in’ Day in the 09.07.10 n/a Village Hall on 31.07.10, were put up around the village. Letters to Businesses, Clubs and Societies were also delivered.
School Fayre - Stand/ Display boards etc. The start of our consultation 18.07.10 n/a with the public, very successful, nearly 100 post-it note ideas were collected.
21.07.10 n/a Judging of Wellesbourne in Bloom, we had one table at this event.
‘Drop-in’ Day in the Village Hall. An all-day event to gain comments and 31.07.10 n/a views from the local population, over 200 visitors attended. Much data received and collated.
Steering Group Meeting in the Village Hall - Update on the Redhill Nursery 05.08.10 n/a Proposals given by Broadway Malyan and CEG.
Danny Kendall produced an ‘Initial Findings and Recommendation Report’ 18.08.10 n/a to assist the Parish Council in relation to the old Sports & Social Club building.
Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House. Outline and time scale of Survey 02.09.10 n/a Questionnaire agreed.
Tony Copeland produced and circulated the outline questionnaire ahead of 06.09.10 n/a the next Task Force Meeting scheduled for 23.09.10.
Community Forum at Wellesbourne Primary School. 09.09.10 n/a
Task Force meeting in the Village Hall. Questionnaire discussed and final 23.09.10 7.30pm inputs made.
01.10.10 n/a Final Draft of Questionnaire produced by Tony Copeland.
06.10.10 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House. Survey logistics.
09 to n/a Distribution of the Questionnaire over the weekend. 10.10.10
04.11.10 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting in the Village Hall. Broadway Malyan and CEG presented their updated document - technical evidence now complete.
Page 51 of 56
Page 287 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
This was followed by an initial look at the Survey results. Response Rate 15% (exceptional), usually 10% is thought to be satisfactory.
Steering Group / Task Force meeting in the Bennet Room at the Church 18.11.10 7.30pm Centre. Number of respondents to the Survey confirmed at 752.
Steering Group Meeting in the Village Hall. 7.00pm Broadway Malyan, CEG & Malcolm Payne Group presentation showing survey and possible 02.12.10 7.00pm space usage of the Sports Club Building, followed at 8.30pm by McCarthy and Stone presenting their proposals for their Retirement Apartments on the Salmons Garage Site.
Parish Council Meeting in the Methodist Hall. Our Parish Plan is on the 07.12.10 7.30pm agenda.
Steering Group meeting at the Village Hall. Broadway Malyan, CEG and Malcolm Payne Group briefed us on their progress, costings now done and 06.01.11 7.00pm Malcolm Payne presented his ideas for the reconfiguration of the Sports Hall.
Meeting with Fiona Blundell at SDC Offices. Tony Copeland and Jill Haran 17.01.11 11.30am attended to discuss and agree timetable for the Parish Plan submission.
19.01.11 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House.
03.02.11 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House.
Parish Council Meeting in the Council Offices. Presentation of our Parish 15.02.11 7.30pm Plan.
Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House. First thoughts on Village Design 21.02.11 7.30pm Statement.
03.03.11 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting in the Village Hall.
Vision 4 Wellesbourne. The final draft of The Wellesbourne and Walton 07.03.11 n/a Parish Plan emailed to Fiona Blundell at STC.
Annual Parish Meeting held in St. Peter’s Church. Presentation of Vision 4 15.03.11 7.30pm Wellesbourne, also the Future of the Sports Club Building discussed.
31.03.11 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House.
Page 52 of 56
Page 288 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Draft of Village Design Statement sent to Charlotte Gallagher, copied to 12.04.11 n/a Fiona Blundell.
Formal planning Application by McCarthy & Stone for the Retirement 15.04.11 n/a Apartments on the Salmons Garage Site.
Broadway Malyan & CEG held a public consultation in the Methodist Hall 15/16.04.11 n/a including an exhibition to illustrate their proposals for the Redhill Nursery Site.
Constructive comments and feed-back received from Fiona Blundell on the 21.04.11 n/a Parish Plan.
Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House. Amended Final draft of Parish Plan 28.04.11 7.30pm prior to emailing to Fiona Blundell.
16.05.11 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting at Pitt House.
Comments back from SDC saying that the Parish Plan is fine except for 21.05.11 n/a one minor point, but the VDS is problematical in some areas.
03.06.11 n/a Tony Copeland resigned due to ill health.
09.06.11 n/a 7.30pm Steering Group at 4 Peacock Court.
7.00pm Steering Group Meeting in the Village Hall. Progress Meeting for Broadway Malyan and CEG to present the draft concept boards they had 29.06.11 n/a prepared prior to their next public consultation in the Methodist Hall on 12.07.11.
12.07.11 n/a Broadway Malyan and CEG public consultation in the Methodist Hall.
14.07.11 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting with Stephanie Chettle (SDC) at 4 Peacock Court.
04.08.11 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting at 4 Peacock Court.
Steering Group Meeting at 4 Peacock Court. Review of final printable draft 08.09.11 7. 30pm of the Parish Plan and the first new draft of the VDS considered, time table for this agreed.
4.00pm – CEG public consultation in the Methodist Hall, showing their master plan 19.09.11 8.00pm for the Redhill Nursery Site, Ettington Road.
Page 53 of 56
Page 289 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Steering Group Meeting at 4 Peacock Court. VDS - some sections to be 06.10.11 7.30pm re-written by the team. All collated and edited by AP for review at the next meeting.
Steering Group Meeting at 4 Peacock court. VDS document worked through, contentious issues discussed and cross checked to match with 03.11.11 7.30pm the guidance notes from Stephanie Chettle. Formatting to be finalised ready for the December meeting, which will be the final ‘check point’ before we submit the VDS to SDC.
Steering Group Meeting at 4 Peacock Court. Final review of VDS Draft 01.12.11 7.30pm Version 6 before submission.
15.12.11 n/a VDS Draft Version 9b submitted to SDC.
06.02.12 n/a Response received from Charlotte Gallagher.
Steering Group Meeting at 4 Peacock Court. Further edits to the VDS 19.04.12 7.30pm carried out, prior to submitting it again to SDC.
23.04.12 n/a VDS Draft Version 10 submitted to Charlotte Gallagher.
Response received from Charlotte Gallagher. SDC have “moved the goal 30.04.12 n/a posts” and now expect V4W team to deliver beyond original agreed scope.
Steering Group Meeting at 4 Peacock Court. CG’s Report discussed at 31.05.12 7.30pm length and a way forward planned. AP has arranged to speak with Fiona Blundell tomorrow following this meeting.
AP reported back (by email) on his phone call with Fiona Blundell. Some 01.06.12 n/a good, some bad. A Sustainability Assessment is required for the VDS. FB is prepared to meet us to discuss.
Steering Group Meeting at 4 Peacock Court. Above phone call discussed 07.06.12 7.30pm at length, and it was agreed to arrange a meeting with Fiona Blundell.
Meeting at Elizabeth House with Fiona Blundell. FB to forward framework 19.07.12 n/a and other documents to assist us.
AP finally received documents (via email) from Fiona Blundell. These 27.09.12 n/a forwarded to the team for consideration.
01.11.12 n/a Steering Group Meeting at 6 Mountford Close. Way forward mapped out.
Page 54 of 56
Page 290 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
06.12.12 7.30pm Steering Group Meeting at 6 Mountford Close. Sustainability appraisal.
Various consultations by email and telephone between members of the January to n/a Steering Committee in relation to the wording of the sustainability June 2013 appraisal.
25.06.13 8.00pm Steering Group Meeting at 6 Mountford Close. Document review.
Opening of 6 week consultation period announced at Wellesbourne Parish Council Meeting. 2 copies of draft final document left with Parish Clerk for 02.07.13 n/a use by any residents who wish to view hard copy at Council offices and also for copy to be lodged at library with normal planning application files.
Electronic copy of Draft Final VDS sent to Wellesbourne Parish Council to 03.07.13 n/a load on their website for public to view. Notice sent to Wellesbourne & Walton News to include in next edition.
Notices re public consultation placed on all of Wellesbourne Parish Council 04.07.13 n/a notice boards including notice board in Walton.
Consultation statement published on the Wellesbourne Parish Council was 06.07.13 n/a replicated on the http://mywellesbourne.co.uk/category/community/parish- council/ website.
Steering Group Meeting at 6 Mountford Close. Review and assessment of 28.08.13 07:30pm public consultation feedback. Responses compiled and incorporated into final document submitted to Stratford District Council for approval.
VDS to Stratford District Council planning officers to be taken to Cabinet 03.09.13 n/a for formal approval. Work commenced in parallel for final publication layout and document design.
Page 55 of 56
Page 291 Wellesbourne Village Design Statement
Appendix VI
Acknowledgements The 2013 Village Design Statement has been produced by the Wellesbourne & Walton Parish Plan Steering Committee. This document is an update of the 1999 VDS and, as such, we wish to thank the following:
The previous committee for their work in creating the original framework
The villagers of Wellesbourne and Walton for their contribution through survey responses and at the public consultations
Stratford on Avon District Council, notably Mr Andrew Wharton (1999 VDS Project Officer); Miss Stephanie Chettle (2011 Stratford-on-Avon District Council Planning Policy Manager); Miss Charlotte Gallagher (2011 Stratford-on-Avon District Council Urban Design Officer); and Miss Fiona Blundell (2012 Stratford-on-Avon District Council Planning Policy Planner).
Wellesbourne Parish Council
The Council for the Protection of Rural England
Mr and Mrs Peter Bolton for information on the history of Wellesbourne
The 1999 Village Design Statement Committee:
Audrey Rose, Bev Comley, Cyril Loman, Dennis Heath, Geoff Freeman, George Shiers, Joan Lambton, Sue Wadeson, Ted Poole (Chairman), Tom Shaw.
The 2013 Village Design Statement Committee:
Adrian Wickens, Andrew Palin, Anne Morton, Alan Shepherd, Danny Kendall, Jill Haran, Tony Copeland (Chairman).
Adopted by Stratford-on-Avon District Council as a Supplementary Planning Document.
-END OF DOCUMENT -
Page 56 of 56
Page 292 Item 13
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Stratford District Community Transport Scheme – Call Centre Contract Lead Officer: Dave Webb Contact on 01789 260900 Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor M Howse
Summary This report sets out proposed tender evaluation criteria for a Call Centre to manage the booking and journey scheduling for Stratford District Community Transport Scheme. The Cabinet is asked to consider the tender evaluation criteria appended to the report to enable the tendering of the contract to take place.
Recommendations:
1) That the tender evaluation criteria set out in Appendix 1 to this report be agreed;
2) That the Head of Enterprise, Housing and Revenues be authorised to accept the most economically advantageous tender determined in accordance with the tender evaluation criteria.
1 Background 1.1 On the 17 April 2013 the District Council’s Overview and Scrutiny Committee received the final report from the Community Transport Task and Finish Group. The Committee considered the proposals for the implementation of a Community Transport Scheme from the 1 April 2014. 1.2 The proposed Scheme was supported by the Overview and Scrutiny Committee and subsequently endorsed by The Cabinet on the 17 June 2013. The Council’s financial contribution to the Scheme had previously been confirmed through the service and financial planning process and equated to £70,000 per annum for three years commencing 1 April 2014. The new contract will therefore be for a term of three years, on the expiry of which procurement would have to be considered again in relation to any subsequent service. 1.3 The proposed Scheme will provide the flexibility to enable it to be tailored to meet the needs of the specific operating areas or individuals. These services will be a combination of a demand responsive door-to- door service, a semi-scheduled bus route that can deviate to collect from
Page 293 homes when necessary or signposting to a more appropriate service for example a volunteer car scheme. 1.4 A marketing and promotion campaign will be developed as part of the implementation process. A detailed programme of activity is being developed and will include direct communication with existing customers, information and advice to District Councillors and Parish Councils. 2. Tendering arrangements 2.1 Much preparatory work has already been undertaken. It is intended the Scheme will commence from the 1 June 2014 to give sufficient time for the new contractor to get all the relevant component parts in place. 2.2 This means that from the 1 April 2014 to the 30 May 2014 the current Community Transport Scheme ‘Community Links’ will continue to operate so as not to disadvantage the many elderly and vulnerable residents who currently benefit from that Scheme. 2.3 Selection of the Scheme operator will be subject to a tender process in order to achieve best value. The aim is for the contract to be awarded by the end of February 2014 at the latest so that the new Scheme is in place by 1 June 2014. 2.4 There will be one contract for the transport element of the Scheme and a separate contract for the Call Centre element. Warwickshire County Council will lead on the contract for the transport element and Stratford- on-Avon District will lead on the Call Centre contract. 3. Tender evaluation criteria 3.1 All tenders will be evaluated on a cost and quality basis. The proposed evaluation criteria are attached as Appendix 1 to this report. 3.2 The tender criteria incorporate equality expectations in line with the Council’s procurement procedures. 4. Tender process 4.1 The formal tender process is intended to commence before the end of January 2014. The award of contract is intended to take place towards the end of February 2014 and the new contract intended to start from the 1 June 2014. 4.2 Contract monitoring arrangements will be in place to evaluate the success of the call centre arrangements. Performance will be monitored by the relevant stakeholders (Stratford-on-Avon District Council, Warwickshire County Council and Stratford-upon-Avon Town Trust). 5. Options available to The Cabinet 5.1 To agree the tender evaluation criteria as set out in Appendix 1. 5.2 To reject or amend tender evaluation criteria as set out in Appendix 1. 5.3 To authorise the Head of Enterprise, Housing and Revenues to accept the most economically advantageous tender determined in accordance with the tender evaluation criteria. This is so that the contract can be let without delay and the need for further interim arrangements.
Page 294 6. Evidence Base 6.1 None. 7. Members’ Comments 7.1 Comments received from Councillor Maurice Howse, Portfolio Holder for Enterprise, Housing and Revenues have been incorporated into the report. 8. Implications of the Proposal 8.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 8.1.1 Legal implications are addressed where appropriate in the body of the report and Legal Services are advising on the procurement. 8.2 Financial 8.2.1 The District Council has confirmed funding for three years (commencing 1 April 2014/15) at £70,000 per annum, fare income has been estimated at around £15,000 per annum and Warwickshire County Council has confirmed its contribution. A grant application will be made to Stratford- upon-Avon Town Trust and discussions are due to take place with regards to this. 8.2.2 In addition to the above, discussions are taking place with Orbit Heart of England Housing Association and two Parish Councils have expressed an interest in contributing towards the Scheme although specific amounts have not yet been discussed. 8.3 Environmental 8.3.1 The proposals contained in this report do not have a direct impact on the environment but the design of the Community Transport Scheme is sympathetic to the environmental impact in the zoned approach and use of vehicles. 8.4 Corporate Strategy 8.4.1 The proposals contained within this report supports aim 3 of the Corporate Strategy, Improving access to services in particular, “we will work with public and voluntary sector partners to provide accessible and affordable community transport to improve access to services and help maintain independent living.” 8.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 8.5.1 Equality will be considered and taken into account where appropriate in the pre-qualification stage. 9 Risk Assessment 9.1 The call centre element of the Community Transport Scheme is essential in running an efficient Scheme. It is important that prospective contractors have the ability to provide an efficient system for undertaking bookings and vehicle scheduling in particular. The pre- qualification stage will enable the Council to invite only those organisations who have the capability to perform the contract and application of the tender evaluation criteria will determine which tender is the most economically advantageous.
Page 295 10 Conclusion 10.1 The proposed Scheme provides a realistic opportunity for a sustainable Community Transport Scheme which is essential for residents across the District. The new Scheme will appeal to a wider range of residents and make a more efficient use of vehicles through the zoned area approach. 10.2 In addition although the Scheme is predominantly ‘demand responsive’ it will provide the flexibility to cater for the more vulnerable and elderly resident who currently use Community Links and for whom the ‘door to door’ service is essential. 10.3 The call booking and scheduling aspect of the Scheme is essential if it is to work effectively. Therefore the call centre element is vital in ensuring the Scheme is as effective as it should be. 10.4 To that end, approval of the tender evaluation criteria will enable the Council to establish the most economically advantageous tender (balance of price and quality).
Dave Webb HEAD OF ENTERPRISE, HOUSING AND REVENUES
Background papers: None
Page 296 Item 13 Appendix 1
Evaluation of Tenders Submitted
Any contract awarded as a result of this procurement will be awarded on the basis of the offer that is the most economically advantageous to Stratford-on- Avon District Council (“ Authority ”). The award criteria are:
Criteria Description Weighting Price 60% Quality (for sub-criteria see below) 40%
Quality Sub-Criteria Weighting Method of Operation:– • Method Statement detailing how the [20%] tenderer would deliver the services detailed in the specification Equipment:- • Office accommodation [20%] • Telephony • Computerised scheduling software Resourcing – Staff:– • Provision of operational management to oversee the day to day activities and manage the relationship with the Authority • Detailed breakdown of staff numbers, structure, skills and duties • Arrangements for liaison with vehicle operators • Key skills or other dependencies and [40%] the availability of replacement of those key skills or those other dependencies (including arising from a TUPE transfer from the Authority's incumbent supplier. • Staff Transfer (TUPE) – how the tenderer will effect the transfer of the relevant employee(s) and plans for the employee(s) after the transfer Reporting and monitoring:– • Provision of monthly journey [20%] statistics and monitoring information
Page 297 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 14
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Capital Budget Monitoring 2013/14 Lead Officer: Sarah Pittaway Contact on 01789 260416
Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor J Ellard
Summary This report provides The Cabinet with details of the Capital Budget Monitoring for the Period 1 – 8 (April 2013 – 30 November 2013).
Recommendation (1) That the position on capital expenditure and income for Period 1- 8 of 2013/14 is received, and any issues identified for further consideration: • by a further report to The Cabinet; • by the Portfolio Holder.
(2) The amendments detailed in paragraph 2 be approved.
1 Background/Information
1.1 Table 1 Capital Budget Summary Position 1.2 The following table summarises the Council’s estimated position with regard to Accumulated Capital Receipts:-
Accumulated Capital Receipt of 1 April 2013 – now £12,568,760 updated for 2012/13 actual outturn position
Estimated income from Capital Receipts for 2013/14 £1,710,975
Estimated Capital Expenditure for 2013/14 £3,808,794
Estimated accumulated capital receipts at 31 March £10,470,941 2014
Page 299 1.3 In February 2013 the Council agreed the Capital Expenditure Budget for 2013/14 budget, totalling £2,044,647. With the amendments agreed by The Cabinet to date, the total Capital Expenditure Budget for the current year now totals £3,808,794. This is derived from the addition/removal of budget changes summarised in the following table: 1.4 Table 2 – Capital Expenditure - Summary of changes in 2013/14
2013/14 Gross Expenditure Project/Scheme Budget £ Expenditure Budget agreed as per The Cabinet February 2013 2,044,647
The Cabinet 17 June 2013 – Slippage 923,727
The Cabinet 20 May 2013 – Open Space and CCTV s.106 349,079
The Cabinet 15 July 2013 – Traveller Site Budget Proposed 179,000
The Cabinet 9 September – Stratford Leisure Centre 100,000
The Cabinet 13 January 2014 – Disabled Facilities Grants - use of earmarked reserve 100,000
The Cabinet 13 January 2014 – Empty Homes – use of earmarked reserve 90,000
The Cabinet 13 January 2014 – S.106 Public Art 22,341
Amended 2013/14 Expenditure Budget 3,808,794
1.5 Committed and actual expenditure for the period to 30 November 2013 totals £1,388,255 as detailed in Appendix 1. 1.6 A summary of S.106 money currently being held by the Council is shown at Appendix 2 . Total funds held amount to £2.5m although £1.1m of this is already included in the Capital Programme to be spent in 2013/14.
1.7 In February 2013 the Council agreed the Capital Income Budget for 2013/14 budget, totalling £1,106,299. With the amendments agreed by The Cabinet to date, the total Capital Income Budget for the current year now totals £1,710,975. This is derived from the addition/removal of budget changes summarised in the following table:
Page 300
1.8 Table 3 – Capital Income - Summary of changes 2013/14
2013/14 Gross Project/Scheme Income Budget £ Income Budget agreed as per The Cabinet February 2013 1,106,299
The Cabinet 17 June 2013 – slippage to 2013/14 52,071 The Cabinet 20 May 2013 – Open Space and CCTV S.106 349,079
The Cabinet 15 July 2013 – Traveller Site Budget Proposed 179,000
The Cabinet 15 July 2013 – Skaters’ contribution towards skate park 2,185
The Cabinet 13 January 2014 – S.106 Public Art 22,341
Amended 2013/14 Income Budget 1,710,975
2. Options available to The Cabinet 2.1 Disabled Facilities Grants (DFG) and Empty Homes Budgets – Members are asked to note the inclusion of the previously agreed earmarked reserve for the DFG (£100,000) and Empty Homes (£90,000) Budgets. 2.2 Pubic Art S.106 – Bird Storage – Members are also asked to note the inclusion of the S.106 contribution of £22,000, as agreed at 18 June 2012 Cabinet, towards public art. This sum has now been paid over to Stratford Town Council for it to spend in line with the S.106 Agreement. 3 Members’ Comments 3.1 Comments from the Portfolio Holder have been incorporated into this report.
4 Implications of the Proposal 4.1 Legal 4.1.1 There are no direct legal implications arising from this report. 4.2 Financial 4.2.1 This is a financial report.
Page 301
4.3 Environmental 4.3.1 Not applicable. 4.4 Corporate Strategy 4.4.1 The Capital Programme supports various aims within the Corporate Strategy; however this report is restricted to the financial implications of the Council’s Capital Budget. 4.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 4.5.1 None directly.
5 Conclusion 5.5 Work continues in the current financial year to ensure that all the projects are delivered.
David Buckland ASSISTANT CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Page 302 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14 Appendix 1
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££
GROSS EXPENDITURE
Head of Enterprise, Housing & Revenues 1,027,156 247,090 410,922 369,143
Head of Corporate Support 676,500 0 0 676,500 Page 303 Page Head of Customer Access 80,000 42,788 14,008 23,204
Head of Environment & Planning 204,000 6,705 5,315 191,980
Head of Technical Services 711,348 157,372 157,652 396,324
S.106 Projects 1,109,790 59,694 286,708 763,388
TOTAL 3,808,794 513,650 874,605 2,420,539 Item 14 Appendix 1
1 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££ FINANCED FROM:- Section 106 Contributions 1,084,790 0 0 1,084,790 To fund S.106 schemes inlcuded below in the capital programme. Scout Hut contributions 25,000 25,000 0 grant received 31/5/13
Right to Buy Receipts : Clawback 0 589,689 -589,689 Income expected from the sale of houses transferred as part of the LSVT to Orbit/HoE.
Page 304 Page Disabled facilities Grants 278,000 282,717 -4,717 Disabled Facility Grant from government - relates to the DFG budget in Enterprise, Housing & Revs.below.
Traveller Site Grant 179,000 179,000 Income already received in 12/13.
Skater Contribution for s.106 project 2,185 2,185 0 Contribution from skater kids towards s.106 project. Received April 2013. Virtual District Grant 50,000 50,000
Regional Housing Pot - empty homes 92,000 92,000
Total/Estimated Receipts 1,710,975 0 899,591 811,384
Use of SDC Receipts 2,097,819 513,650 -24,986 Total Finance Required 3,808,794 513,650 874,605
Use of Capital Receipts: Acc. Capital Receipts b/fwd 12,568,760 12,568,760 (Surplus) / Deficit on Year 2,097,819 -24,986 Accumulated Capital Receipts c/fwd 10,470,941 12,593,746
2 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££ Head of Enterprise, Housing & Revenues Disabled Facilities Grants - Mandatory 550,000 162,657 277,867 109,476 The earmarked reserve of £100k approved at Cabinet Rolling Programme 17/6/13 is now required and has been included in the 2013/14 Budget.
Minor Works Assistance & Home Repair 187,378 32,454 101,606 53,318 To date there are potential further commitments of £17k
Page 305 Page Grants (Discretionary) Rolling which are yet to be approved. If all of these cases are Programme approved there will be an underspend of £66k for the year.
Choice Based Lettings 0 0 873 -873
Empty Homes 242,000 0 36,403 205,597 The earmarked reserve of £90k approved at Cabinet 17/6/13 is now required and has been inlcuded in the 2013/14 Budget. Market Towns - Shipston 2,778 0 2,778 0
Landlords Accreditation Scheme 0 0 375 -375 Earmarked reserve of £24k was also approved at Cabinet 17/6/13. This reserve will be used to fund the expenditure so far of £375. Temporary Accommodation Unit - 0 0 -2,000 2,000 This money has been set aside for costs due in from furnishings Orbit/Heart of England.
3 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££
Market Town Regeneration 45,000 51,979 -6,979 0 Budget is required for final outstanding sums and shop front grants in the town of Stratford. (Hobsons Patisseries - £12,000.00, 5, 5a, 5b Chapel Street -£25,000.00 Robert Dyas -£8,000.00). Grant payments will be paid by the end of this financial year.
Total Business, Housing & 1,027,156 247,090 410,922 369,143 Revenues Page 306 Page
Head of Corporate Support
Affordable Housing Investment 358,750 0 0 358,750 £359k is committed via an agreement for Long Itchington Programme (£74k), Stockton (£280k) and Bishops Itchington (£5k). Long Itchington is complete and a grant claim is expected shortly. The Bishops Itchington scheme will not proceed due to lack of local support as discussed at EPHPAP on 3/12/13.
A report detailing other rural schemes that could benefit from this funding, s106 monies and LPSA2 funding (see below) will be presented to EPHPAP / Cabinet once we know more about what Government grant funding is or is not available.
4 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££
Local Public Service Agreement Round 317,750 0 0 317,750 "Funded via a WCC grant so no impact on the Council's 2 (LPSA2) grant for affordable housing capital funds. The budget of £464,000 is for housing schemes at Snitterfield (49k), Ilmington (£155k), Salford Priors (110k) and £4K is uncommitted. Snitterfield is complete and a grant claim is expected shortly. Ilmington will be completed before March 2015.
The scheme at Salford Priors will not go ahead for the reasons outlined at EPHPAP on 3/12/13. Any outstanding Page 307 Page grant needs to be spent on rural schemes (see above) or returned to WCC. "
Total Corporate Support 676,500 0 0 676,500
Head of Customer Access
Total Customer Access 80,000 42,788 14,008 23,204
5 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££ Head of Environment & Planning
Traveller Site 179,000 0 0 179,000 Funded by government grant. An agreement has been signed for works to be done at the site, and it is anticipated that the majority of the work should be completed by year end. However, it may be necessary to carry over any unspent funds into next year. Page 308 Page Land Drainage 25,000 6,705 5,315 12,980 All of this budget has now been allocated. This capital budget funds the completion of small scale land drainage improvement works such as the installation of culverts and associated ditch clearance. Increasingly, the schemes are linked to improvements being completed by Warwickshire County Council, Environment Agency and Severn Trent so that a greater level of protection is created than would otherwise be possible.
Total Environment & Planning 204,000 6,705 5,315 191,980
6 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££ Head of Technical Services
CCTV Equipment - General/Henley/CP 0 19,995 -19,995 0 fibres Planned Maintenance Programme
Public Offices 0 22,482 29,364 -51,846 Elizabeth House - Significant savings accrued from not re-
Page 309 Page decorating or re-carpeting the large open-plan areas this year. Further savings from no wholesale repalcement of luminaires. Savings at the Grange due to replacing boiler and doing high pressure cleaning of distribution pipework last year.
Leisure Centres 0 87,550 42,486 -130,037 SLVC some M&E works omitted this year in view of impending major refurbishment. Calorifiers replaced last year, some roofwork still to be done and replacement of MUGA carpets.
Public Conveniences 0 0 1,846 -1,846
Vehicle Parking 0 22,624 16,134 -38,758 Car park repairs at Swans Nest Lane CP and tramway to be done. Some lighting, redecoration and lift works to be done at Bridgefoot. Recreational Facilities 0 2,500 1,337 -3,837
Infrastructure General 363,485 0 0 363,485
Total Planned Maintenance 363,485 135,157 91,167 137,161 Planned Maintenance Budget covers buidlings works Programme required for Council properties.
7 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££
Bridgetown Land Development, 160,863 0 11,003 149,860 This budget is required for unknown obligations under the Stratford upon Avon Collaboration Agreement with regard to the Bridgetown Development, circa 10.7% of the whole cost. This obligation remains until all of the roads on the site have been adopted. To date there are 2/3rds of the roads still to be adopted. SDC are also responsible for paying approx £50k for half of the road costs fronting Plot DD. It is possible though that the capital receipt from the sale of plot DD may cover this but it might not be in the same Page 310 Page financial year. Orbit/HoE Infrastructure 87,000 0 0 87,000 An ongoing legal obligation (Schedule E of clause 6 of the LSVT Agreement) exists for the £87k due to Orbit/HoE annually. The Water Act, introduced 1/10/11, has resulted in annual savings of £23k now reflected in the annual budget of £87k. Stratford Leisure Centre 100,000 2,220 75,477 22,303 9/9/13 Cabinet agreed for £100k to be brought forward from 14/15 Budget to cover costs in 13/14.
Total Technical Services 711,348 157,372 157,652 396,324
8 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££ S.106 Projects
Open Space (Avenue Farm play 168,139 0 0 168,139 Funds to be spent purchasing new play equipment in equipment) - S.106 2014/15 following consultation with local residents and school pupils. Community Facilities(Stratford 11,749 0 13,850 -2,101 Funded by skater contribution. Skatepark) - S.106 Page 311 Page
Open Space (Avenue Farm grounds 81,819 13,131 70,975 -2,287 Funds have been spent on a measured mile loop, outdoor work ) - S.106 gym equipment and street scene furniture.
Open Space (Cottage Lane) - S.106 8,900 23,657 0 -14,757 The works at both Cottage Lane and Trevelyan Crescent (below) are being carried out by one contractor and costs are showing against Cottage Lane as a commitment. Once the works are complete a charge will go against each project in line with the S.106 Agreement.
Open Space (Trevelyan Crescent) - 14,887 -1 0 14,888 The works at both Cottage Lane (above)and Trevelyan S.106 Crescent are being carried out by one contractor and costs are showing against Cottage Lane as a commitment. Once the works are complete a charge will go against each project in line with the S.106 Agreement.
Public Art - S.106 41,320 0 41,320 0 Agreed by Cabinet 18/6/12.
9 STRATFORD-ON-AVON DISTRICT COUNCIL CAPITAL BUDGET MONITORING PERIOD 1-8 2013/14
Committed Amended April- Actual April - Estimate November November Budget 2013/14 13/14 2013/14 Remaining Narrative ££££
Public Art - Bird Storage S.106 22,341 0 22,341 0 Agreed by Cabinet 18/6/12. Funds now paid over to Stratford Town Council for them to spend in line with the S.106 agreement.
CCTV Shipston Road (Waitrose)- S.106 22,265 22,907 0 -642
Scout Hut - S.106 99,137 0 94,835 4,302 Shipston Scout Hut - funded by £175k s.106 plus £25k from scouts grant and contribution. The balance Page 312 Page outstanding relates to retention on the contract not due for payment until approximately December 2014.
Southam Re-development - s.106 631,733 0 38,387 593,346 Of the remaining budget of £600K, around £200K is committed to the library and community space. Of the remaining £400K, around £300K is earmarked for highways re-development leaving about £100K. These figures are indicative at this moment in time but give a broad picture. Canal Quarter Master Plan - S.106 7,500 0 5,000 2,500 The Canal quarter master plan has been received and a portion of the monies released. The plan is with the Planning Policy Team for consideration along side all the other Core Strategy documents. As soon as confirmation is received from Planning Policy Team that the Master Plan is acceptable for plan making purposes the remaining amount will be released. Total s.106 projects 1,109,790 59,694 286,708 763,388
10 Item 14 Appendix 2
! ! "" " #
! # # #
# ' ( ' &&) ** +" , $ % %& # "" $%& *& +"#+- ++.-/ 0)+" # * 23(% '% ! ) 0, % & # "" &&) ** + + *& ' ,' * ) ,* && ! 1( ' , -+" +"
# ' ++ %) ( ' &&) ** +" , $ % %& # "" *& +"#+- / & +4
' +/ & ! & ) ( ' &&) ** +" , $ % %& 5) 2& # "" *& +"#+- -. '+4
0 6% (' %* ) ' & 7& &7 , &87 ) && ! %* ,7 , ! ,!! * %* ' , * 7 +-#+& 2 ) 2'%%&5% .#4#+" 4-. + ' ' ( ' &&) * * +" , $ % %& # "" *& % +"#+- ++/ 0)+" %"($ ! 7 %& # "" 4"+/./ + # 3 &&) ** + + *& ' $ * , & +"#+- 4. +
! 5' 7 ! $ * +. # * +" , $ % %& # "" *& 9* : +"#+- +- +/
Page 313
' * :''6%( ' &&) ** +" , $ % %& # "" $%& *& +"#+- +-.44- 97 +. # ( '(;% &&) ** + + * & ' !"-+& ! , 7 *& , ) '% & +
& ) * # ( ' (;% %& ) # "" /"4+ #
9* % ' !! 2 1 #
( 6 6%: ' + +/ % & 5 ': #2 ! %& # "" .-/4 6*+.
& , . 1 , 6% !% ,% 7 +"+ !! % &&(+ & ! , $ %& # "" 44 +/
$ # & ! #
&&(+ * 23(% '% 1( ' ! ) +++ 0)+"
' 7) +" * ! &) 7% != && 1 73% 7 ;& &7 .
' ! '1& ' ! & ) >"+//+?+4 $%& '% 7++ 4
@ &- 7%% % /" @
@ ' % 7 %> ) ? "4/"4 #
./0/12
Page 314 Item 15
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Revenue Budget Monitoring – Period 8 Budget Variance & Estimated Outturn Position for 2013/14 Lead Officer: Richard Burrell Contact on 01789 260416 Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor J Ellard
Summary To update The Cabinet on the overall financial position of the Authority in relation to the revenue account. This report provides Members with an analysis of net expenditure against the Period 8 budget for 2013/14 and presents an estimated revenue outturn position for each service.
Recommendation That the variance as at Period 8 and the estimated revenue outturn for 2013/14 is received and any issues identified for further consideration: • by a further report to The Cabinet; • by the Portfolio Holder.
1 Background/Information 1.1 This report provides an analysis of service expenditure against the profiled budget as at Period 8 and reports an estimated outturn position. 1.2 The report is a high level summary which identifies variances at budget officer level. The Period 1-8 variance has been used as the base to which further known and estimated income and expenditure items have been applied to arrive at an estimated outturn position. 1.3 Items specifically mentioned within the body of this report are the services that currently show, or are anticipated to have, the greatest variances. A full breakdown of the Council’s services is included within Appendix 1 with a further breakdown by category of expenditure included within Appendix 2. Appendix 3 shows the agreed amendments to the original budget to arrive at the current budget.
2 Budget Monitoring - Estimated Outturn 2.1 The Period 8 variance is a favourable £460,479 whilst the estimated global outturn position for the Council at the end of the year is expected to be an unfavourable variance of £571,571 . This underspend will be kept under review during the year and considered alongside the on-going contract dispute previously reported to The Cabinet. 2.2 Following the implementation of the Business Rate Retention Scheme from 1 April 2013 and the Council’s decision to participate in the Coventry and Warwickshire Business Rate Pool, it is expected that the Council will significantly benefit from these arrangements. Current expectations forecast a benefit of at least £200,000 during the coming year. It should be noted
Page 315 however, that the value of any benefit cannot be confirmed until the final accounts are prepared in April. Under the new arrangements this benefit could be reduced from successful rating appeals which are on-going and collection rates into the future. 2.3 Budget Monitoring Statement ( Appendix 1 ) Period 8 Variance 2.3.1 The main service variances are detailed below: Chief Executive • CDC Chief Executive shows a favourable variance of £23,184 which relates to lower than anticipated expenditure on subscriptions and Civic expenses. Head of Enterprise, Housing and Revenues • Council Tax shows an unfavourable variance of £47,963 which mainly relates to legal costs incurred with the recovery of debts that are expected to be reclaimed before the year end. Head of Customer Access • Front Office & Transaction Team shows an unfavourable variance of £39,494 which is mainly due to increased cost of postage and Warwickshire Direct Partnership contract. Head of Environment and Planning • Regulatory Service shows a favourable variance of £426,932 as a result of higher planning income receipts during the period. This is expected to reduce during the year and will be offset by appeal and temporary staffing costs. Assistant Chief Executive • Corporate Budget shows a favourable variance of £33,200 which relates to staff savings identified within the year. • Investment Interest shows an unfavourable variance of £79,619 which relates to lower returns on investments in the first six months of the year. Head of Technical Services • Off Street Parking shows a favourable variance of £43,404 which relates to increased pay and display income. • Public Conveniences show an unfavourable variance of £76,122 which relates to the income receipts from the Stratford toilets being lower than budgeted.
2.4 Budget Monitoring Statement ( Appendix 1 ) Estimated Outturn Variance 2.4.1 The main service variances are detailed below: Chief Executive • CDC Chief Executive shows a favourable outturn variance of £15,500 which relates to an unspent subscription budget.
Page 316
Head of Customer Access • Front Office & Transaction Team shows an unfavourable outturn variance of £30,000 which relates to Warwickshire Direct Partnership contract. Head of Environment & Planning • Regulatory Services shows a favourable variance of £250,000 which relates to increased income receipts from applications. It is anticipated that a sum equivalent to this will be needed to fund temporary staff into 2014/15 to meet the increasing demand on the service. • Regulatory Services - The appeals budget within this service is currently within budget as reported to Council on 16 December 2013. However, there are expected to be further appeal costs arising from planning appeals. This report forecasts an underspend of £571,571 for the current year, the Period 10 budget monitoring report will identify the estimated total cost of appeals and identify the necessary sources of financing. Assistant Chief Executive • Appropriations shows a favourable variance of £295,211 which relates to the revenue contribution to capital maintenance for the year. This is underspent as much of the budget had been allocated to meet the maintenance costs of the Stratford Leisure Centre which is now being refurbished. • CDC Resources shows a favourable variance of £36,360 which mainly relates to the reduced external audit fees. • Corporate Budget shows a favourable variance of £33,200 which is in respect of a salary saving following a retirement. • Investment Interest shows an unfavourable outturn variance of £50,510 which relates to lower returns on investments in the year, although still in excess of benchmarked returns. • Residual Costs shows a favourable variance of £100,000 which relates to the recovery of costs associated with a licensing court case, residual pay inflation, and corporate superannuation savings. Head of Technical Services • Building Services shows an unfavourable outturn variance of £28,000 which is the result of lower than budgeted rental and service charge recovery. • Off Street Parking shows a favourable variance of £46,000 which relates to increased pay and display income. • Public Conveniences shows an unfavourable outturn variance of £120,000 which is the result of income being lower than the anticipated budget. This issue will be addressed within the budget for 2014/15.
Page 317
3 Estimated Outturn Revenue Reserve Position
£ Opening Balance 1 April 2013 3,376,514 Contribution to reserves for 2013/14 as per 950,242 Council Feb. 2013 Slippage from 2012/13 -379,000 Stratford Refuge Funding -25,000 Estimated Outturn Position (above) -571,571 Estimated Revenue Reserve 31 March 4,494,327 2014
Total in earmarked reserves (as at Period 8) 665,668
4 Options available to The Cabinet 4.1 That the position of the expected revenue outturn is received and any issues identified for further consideration: • By a further report to The Cabinet; • By the Portfolio Holder.
5 Evidence Base 5.1 The revenue budget monitoring position has been prepared by comparing the actual and accrued revenue income and expenditure against the current budget for 2013/14.
6 Implications of the Proposal 6.1 Legal 6.1.1 There are no legal implications to this report. 6.2 Financial 6.2.1 This is a finance report. 6.3 Environmental 6.3.1 There are no environmental implications arising from this report. 6.4 Corporate Strategy 6.4.1 This report contributes to the overall Corporate Strategy. 6.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 6.5.1 Not applicable.
7 Conclusion 7.1 For the various reasons explained within the report the revenue budget estimated outturn position is a favourable variance of £571,571. This, together with the approved slippage of £379,000, use of reserves £25,000 and a contribution to reserves of £950,242, leaves revenue reserves with an estimated balance of £4,494,327. David Buckland ASSISTANT CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Page 318 Budget Monitoring Statement by Service 2013/14 Item 15 Appendix 1
Expenditure - Estimated Estimated J Profiled 2013/14 Current Actual & Outturn - 2013/14 Favourable Service Budget to Period 8 Budget Commitments Net Outturn Period 8 Variance L to Period 8 Expenditure Variance Unfavourable
Chief Executive CDC Chief Executive 469,180 314,536 291,352 -23,184 453,680 -15,500 J Corporate Communications 22,860 11,181 6,482 -4,699 22,860 0 Policy 518,080 283,609 275,022 -8,587 518,080 0 sub-total 1,010,120 609,326 572,856 -36,470 994,620 -15,500 J
Head of Enterprise, Housing and Revenues Community Leadership 320,580 150,223 163,087 12,864 324,080 3,500 L Council Tax 243,784 90,106 138,069 47,963 260,284 16,500 L Council Tax Benefits 272,700 257,000 250,730 -6,270 272,700 0 Council Tax Reduction - Admin. -58,502 153,639 148,689 -4,950 -58,502 0 Environmental Initiatives 33,480 26,432 12,554 -13,878 23,480 -10,000 J Grants 29,660 16,483 2,909 -13,574 19,660 -10,000 J Housing 653,380 270,876 289,107 18,231 658,380 5,000 L Housing Ben. Admin 13,418 193,395 182,053 -11,342 13,418 0 Housing Benefits -110,000 -145,404 -185,995 -40,591 -110,000 0 Local Economy/Tourism 167,000 94,286 91,722 -2,564 167,000 0 National Non-Domestic Rate -163,860 -126,874 -119,623 7,251 -143,860 20,000 L NNDR Discretionary Relief 50,000 35,000 14,827 -20,173 25,000 -25,000 J Social Inclusion 130,760 134,361 135,436 1,075 130,760 0 sub-total 1,582,400 1,149,523 1,123,565 -25,958 1,582,400 0
Head of Legal & Dem.Services Corp. And Democratic Core 450,450 289,572 282,600 -6,972 445,450 -5,000 J Elections 99,410 48,358 33,705 -14,653 104,410 5,000 L Local Land Charges -124,700 -89,250 -108,104 -18,854 -134,700 -10,000 J Members Services 458,737 315,384 294,430 -20,954 448,737 -10,000 J Monitoring Officer 67,020 44,970 69,993 25,023 67,020 0 sub-total 950,917 609,034 572,624 -36,410 930,917 -20,000 J
Head of Customer Access CDC Resources 30,000 19,980 13,830 -6,150 30,000 0 Performance Management 139,660 90,462 89,083 -1,379 139,660 0 Crime Reduction 45,040 26,021 25,871 -150 45,040 0 Front Office & Trans Team 1,445,580 958,056 997,550 39,494 1,475,580 30,000 L Information Technology 1,038,690 738,312 771,536 33,224 1,053,690 15,000 L sub-total 2,698,970 1,832,831 1,897,869 65,038 2,743,970 45,000 L
Head of Environment & Planning
Civil Contingencies Funding 5,750 480 445 -35 5,750 0 Environmental Health 455,165 288,240 286,735 -1,505 455,165 0 Licensing -178,620 -172,103 -157,902 14,201 -163,620 15,000 L Regulatory Services 707,262 232,804 -194,128 -426,932 457,262 -250,000 J sub-total 989,557 349,421 -64,851 -414,272 754,557 -235,000 J
Page 319 Budget Monitoring Statement by Service 2013/14
Expenditure - Estimated Estimated J Profiled 2013/14 Current Actual & Outturn - 2013/14 Favourable Service Budget to Period 8 Budget Commitments Net Outturn Period 8 Variance L to Period 8 Expenditure Variance Unfavourable
Assistant Chief Executive Appropriations 308,096 0 0 0 12,885 -295,211 J CDC Resources 166,660 36,912 33,154 -3,758 130,300 -36,360 J Corporate Budget 287,271 33,200 0 -33,200 254,071 -33,200 J HR and Training 196,975 140,573 141,319 746 196,975 0 Investment Interest -302,750 -196,415 -116,796 79,619 -252,240 50,510 L Internal Audit 125,000 109,925 109,925 0 125,000 0 Mortgages -150 50 49 -1 -150 0 Non Distributed Costs 173,060 0 0 0 158,000 -15,060 J Residual Costs 99,050 0 -12,258 -12,258 -950 -100,000 J Resources 548,500 349,191 343,809 -5,382 533,250 -15,250 J sub-total 1,601,712 473,436 499,201 25,765 1,157,141 -444,571 J
Head of Technical Services
Avenue Farm Depot -52,600 -38,875 -40,309 -1,434 -52,600 0 Building Control -46,230 -52,472 -39,133 13,339 -46,230 0 Building Services 386,000 410,683 393,513 -17,170 414,000 28,000 L C.C.T.V. 180,580 133,435 132,031 -1,404 180,580 0 Investment Properties -608,500 -436,589 -450,656 -14,067 -608,500 0 Leisure Centres 126,438 83,970 73,046 -10,924 126,438 0 Miscellaneous Properties 68,625 46,903 42,248 -4,655 68,625 0 Off-Street Parking -1,105,650 -752,653 -796,057 -43,404 -1,151,650 -46,000 J On Street Parking -136,800 -109,575 -126,185 -16,610 -136,800 0 Parks Playfields & Open Spaces 483,670 370,057 368,228 -1,829 483,670 0 Public Conveniences 78,500 32,862 108,984 76,122 198,500 120,000 L Recreational Amenities -143,420 -126,768 -139,276 -12,508 -143,420 0 Refuse Collection 2,549,700 1,909,995 1,927,339 17,344 2,549,700 0 SDC Infrastructure 103,570 70,344 56,806 -13,538 103,570 0 Sports Development 100,480 74,909 77,536 2,627 100,480 0 Street Cleansing & Furniture 1,420,470 926,478 916,416 -10,062 1,416,970 -3,500 J sub-total 3,404,833 2,542,704 2,504,531 -38,173 3,503,333 98,500 L
TOTAL 12,238,509 7,566,275 7,105,796 -460,479 11,666,938
Total favourable variance -571,571 J
JL Indication of favourable or unfavourable variance
Page 320 Breakdown of expenditure by category
Expenditure - 2013/14 Profiled 2013/14 Actual & Current Budget to Period 8 Commitments Budget Period 8 Variance to Period 8 £ £ £ £ Employees Expenses 9,871,472 6,382,317 6,145,943 -236,374 Premises Related Expenses 1,277,810 1,043,895 1,023,158 -20,737 Transport Related Expenses 354,400 240,597 199,805 -40,792 Supplies And Services Expenses 2,665,571 1,700,071 1,670,160 -29,911 Third Party Payments 8,393,113 4,827,953 5,024,391 196,438 Transfer Payments 26,644,560 17,713,319 17,822,073 108,754 Capital Charges 298,596 634 22 -612 Expenditure 49,505,522 31,908,786 31,885,552 -23,234 Government Grant Income -27,414,541 -17,939,745 -18,105,222 -165,477
Page 321 Page Other Grants & Contributions -1,846,800 -743,827 -753,086 -9,259 Sales Income -34,200 -19,706 -22,522 -2,816 Fees & Charges Income -6,379,572 -4,583,148 -4,902,100 -318,952 Rent Income -1,227,550 -800,727 -813,737 -13,010 Interest Income -304,150 -197,049 -116,833 80,216 Recharges To Other Accounts -60,200 -58,309 -66,256 -7,947 Income -37,267,013 -24,342,511 -24,779,756 -437,245 Net cost of service 12,238,509 7,566,275 7,105,796 -460,479
Funding Sources Government Grants 6,670,798 Council Tax 6,124,149 Collection Fund Adjustment -10,196 Cont. to General Reserves -546,242 Total Funding 12,238,509 Item 15 Appendix 2 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 15 Appendix 3
Explanation of Current Budget Position
Net Budget for 2013/14 as at 1st April 2013 £11,834,509
Approved revenue slippage from 2012/13 - June Cabinet £379,000
Minute 941 Stratford Refuge Funding £25,000
Net Budget for 2013/14 as at Period 8 £12,238,509
Agreed future budget amendments - Period 9 onward
None identified
Net Budget for 2013/14 £12,238,509
Page 323 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 16
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2013
Subject: People Strategy Lead Officer: Laila Doman Contact on 01789 260709 Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor J Ellard
Summary The purpose of this report is to propose a revised People Strategy.
Recommendation
That the revised People Strategy be adopted.
1 Background/Information 1.1 The Council’s People Strategy was finalised in 2010 following an amalgamation of three strategy documents – the HR Strategy, Training Strategy and the Workforce Development Plan. 1.1.1 At the time of writing the People Strategy there were many changes facing Local Government, and it reflected the drivers for change at that time. Since 2010, the national economy and public services have been under increased financial pressures, which have driven the Council to consider different approaches to delivering services to the residents and visitors to our District. 1.1.2 Given the level of changes since 2010 in reviewing the People Strategy it has been necessary to re-write the Strategy, rather than just review it. 1.2 The People Strategy 2013 -2015 (Appendix 1) 1.2.1 The People Strategy has been written to ensure that, whilst providing a framework for decision making, it is also flexible enough to cope with the pace of change which may be required in the coming years. The Strategy does not detail out the actions which the Council will take under these headings, but provides strategic direction which will be taken into account when taking decisions. 1.2.2 The People Strategy is still organised under five main headings which reflect the workforce issues: • Developing the Organisation • Developing Leadership Capacity • Sourcing, Resourcing, Recruitment and Retention
Page 325 • Pay and Rewards • Developing Workforce Skills and Capacity. 1.2.3 The People Strategy reflects the changes to the national picture which have meant that the Council has needed to consider significant changes in the way in which it manages its workforce. The staffing establishment has reduced by approximately 50 full time equivalent staff since 2010, and the expectations of the remaining staff are higher than ever before. 1.2.4 The Council has a high expectation that staff will be flexible to manage peaks of work across different teams, that all tiers of supervisors and managers now have an increased level of decision making, and that all staff are encouraged to think innovatively to create workable and cost effective processes and solutions of problems. 1.3 Consultation 1.3.1 The draft revised People Strategy has been out to consultation with the Leader Councillor Saint and Portfolio Holder Councillor Ellard. Their comments have been incorporated into the revised Strategy document. 1.3.2 The staff have been consulted through the Joint Consultation and Negotiating Group (JCNG). At JCNG it was proposed that the title of the Strategy be changed to the ‘Staff Strategy’. The Cabinet is asked to consider this change. 1.3.3 In addition the Chief Executive and Head of Transformation at South Northamptonshire Council and Cherwell Council have been consulted.
2 Options available to the Committee 2.1 To consider whether to change the title of the Strategy to the ‘Staff Strategy’ as per the recommendation from JCNG. 2.2 To adopt the revised People Strategy as presented. 2.3 To adopt the revised People Strategy, including any additions agreed at The Cabinet. 2.4 To retain the existing People Strategy
3 Evidence Base 3.1 The new People Strategy is based on the changing environment and drivers for local government which influence the workforce matters.
4 Members’ Comments 4.1 Comments from the Leader and Portfolio holder have been incorporated into the report. 4.2 JCNG asked that consideration be given to whether ‘People’ should be replaced with ‘Staff’.
5 Implications of the Proposal 5.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 5.1.1 There are no legal implications of the People Strategy.
Page 326 5.2 Financial 5.2.1 There are no specific financial implications of the People Strategy at this time. Any future workforce proposals and actions which require additional budget approval will be put forward through the appropriate channels. 5.3 Environmental 5.3.1 There are no environmental implications of the People Strategy. 5.4 Corporate Strategy 5.4.1 The People Strategy aims to provide a framework for dealing with workforce matters which directly impact on the ability of the Council to deliver its Corporate Strategy. 5.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 5.5.1 An Equality Impact Assessment has been undertaken and it is not considered that there are any equality implications at this time.
6 Risk Assessment 6.1 The risk of not adopting the revised People Strategy is that the Council will not have an appropriate Strategy document to guide decision making in respect of its workforce.
7 Conclusion 7.1 This paper summarises the revised People Strategy and asks for comments as part of the formal consultation process.
David Buckland ASSISTANT CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Background papers: People Strategy 2010 – 2015 People Strategy 2012 - 2015
Page 327 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 16 Appendix 1
People Strategy 2013 – 2015
Introduction The People Strategy sets out the guiding principles within which the Council will make decisions that affect its employees; both those that already work for the Council and those that may join the Council in the future. The principles will act as a framework which will not only guide the decision-making in relation to staffing matters but will also impact on the culture of the organisation moving forward.
Background Stratford-on-Avon District Council seeks to provide high quality, value for money services to its residents, businesses and visitors. In order to ensure the Council can continue to deliver such public services in difficult financial times, there is a reliance on maintaining a motivated workforce that is willing and able to add value and provide excellent customer services in all they do. To achieve this, the Council must have staff who are adaptable, have broad ranges of skills and who are willing to learn and develop further and who have the flexibility of attitude to use their skills to work not only within the Council but also with partner organisations. People working for and with the Council will need to have problem solving skills and an ability to focus on innovative solutions to challenging issues. This Strategy document outlines a framework to provide direction to future staff decision-making, and allows for flexibility to make the right decisions in a time of fast-paced in the public sector.
Council Values The Council has an established set of values staff are asked to work within and these are: • Fairness • Honesty • Quality • Working Together The values sum up the Council’s ethos and strengthen and reinforce the culture of the organisation.
Consultation Consultation has always underpinned the Council’s decisions relating to staffing matters; it is intended for this to continue as it is recognised that it is important in building trust and understanding between management and staff. In most circumstances decisions which relate to matters affecting staff will be made after consultation with the recognised trade union, Unison, and where appropriate directly with the staff themselves.
Page 1 of 3 Page 329 Our People Strategy Principles
The People Strategy Principles are outlined in five key areas relating to the Council’s workforce and provide a sense of the direction in which the workforce will move and develop over the coming years.
1. Developing the Organisation – Key Principles The Council will: • Ensure that reviewing staff development requirements is carried out at least annually as part of the service planning process. • Ensure that staff behave according to the Council’s values, and understand why equality in their delivery of services and within the workforce is important and how they can make a difference. • Be innovative with service delivery and explore creative ways to deliver services, which are both financially and operationally effective. • Ensure that where change is planned that staff are communicated and consulted with at the earliest opportunity. • Operate a culture where staff are empowered to make decisions within their field of expertise; reflect on work experience; and where learning is shared whether things go right or wrong.
2. Developing Leadership Capacity – Key Principles The Council will: • Encourage a good working relationship between elected members and officers, based on trust and respect. • Support current and aspiring managers to ensure that they have the opportunity to continue developing their leadership and managerial skills. • Provide, either directly or through partners, management and leadership development programmes. • Place value on alternative leadership and management development methods such as mentoring, coaching, shadowing and volunteering. • Ensure that our managers use performance management appropriately to ensure that good performance is the norm, excellent performance is recognised and average performance is tackled.
3. Sourcing, Resourcing, Recruitment and Retention – Key Principles The Council will: • Regularly review service sourcing arrangements, including the workforce, in accordance with the Sourcing Strategy. • Review each new vacancy and ensure that alternative options such as apprenticeships, shared services and partnership working have been considered and progressed where appropriate. • Ensure recruitment continues from a variety of sectors, making sure that people are selected with the right transferable skills for the job, and not just because they have local government experience. • To actively ensure succession planning is undertaken; and to encourage apprenticeships and trainee posts to contribute to the new generation of people moving through the organisation. • Continue to ensure that a diverse workforce, representative of the local community, is achieved. Page 2 of 3 Page 330
4. Pay and Rewards – Key Principles The Council will: • Continue to participate in the national pay bargaining for local government. • Ensure that all staff pay and rewards remain consistent with the principles of Equal Pay. • Extend opportunities for staff benefits where there is no cost to the Council, such as salary sacrifice schemes. • Review regularly its remuneration package for posts to ensure that packages are fair, competitive and represent good value for money. • Seek to provide benefits that represent good value for money.
5. Developing Workforce Skills and Capacity – Key Principles The Council will: • Continue to be guided by best practice principles, e.g. Investors in People. • Ensure that staff have access to the training and development which they need to do their job, using relationships with partners to extend the available opportunities. • Expect staff to work across the Council in a more flexible way to broaden their skills and encourage more efficient working practices. • Ensure that learning is shared across the Council in an open and transparent way. • Introduce measures to assess staff potential through the appraisal scheme and identify opportunities for career progression, and encourage training, where appropriate.
Monitoring and Review of the People Strategy The People Strategy will be monitored regularly to ensure that it meets the needs of the Council. A formal review will be scheduled for Autumn 2015/16.
Page 3 of 3 Page 331 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 17
THE CABINET
13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Enforcement of Off-Street Parking - Residents’ Parking in Telegraph Street Car Park
Lead Officer: Tony Perks Contact on 01789 260620
Lead Member: Councillor L Organ
Summary The Cabinet agreed in October that a consultation exercise should be carried out relating to the use of the Telegraph Street car park in Shipston-on-Stour for residents’ parking. The consultation exercise has now been completed and this report updates The Cabinet on the findings.
Recommendation
That up to two annual season tickets are made available to residents of Telegraph Street who do not have their own off-street parking. The first season ticket to be priced at £40 per year and the second season ticket to be priced at £175 per year; both charges to be subject to annual review.
1 Background/Information 1.1 Telegraph Street car park in Shipston-on-Stour contains 70 spaces. Parking charges were introduced in 2002 to try and ensure that space within the car park is available for shoppers and people wishing to visit the businesses within the town centre. Two free car parks are available within Shipston-on-Stour although these are some distance from Telegraph Street. 1.2 In 2002 a decision was made by the Stour Area Community Committee to allow temporary residents’ parking for the even-numbered properties between 2 and 48 Telegraph Street, where there was no alternative t parking. Residents were allowed to apply for a single parking permit for use within the adjacent car park for an annual cost of £25.00. This situation was to continue until a review of on-street residents’ parking was conducted by Warwickshire County Council. 1.3 The review of on-street residents’ parking carried out by Warwickshire County Council did not resolve the issue with Telegraph Street and the temporary arrangements have been allowed to continue.
Page 333
1.4 Some residents of Telegraph Street have been issued with more than one parking permit for the use of Telegraph Street car park. This situation has continued for a number of years, however, there does not appear to be any authority to issue these permits. Currently a total of 18 permits have been issued. 1.5 This issue was highlighted when The Cabinet and subsequently The Overview and Scrutiny Committee considered a proposal to allow the occupiers of a development at the former bakery site to apply for Season Tickets for use in Telegraph Street car park. For an informed decision on how this issue should be resolved, a consultation exercise has been carried out to gauge public opinion on this matter. An exercise to determine the occupancy levels of the car park has also been conducted. 1.6 The consultation exercise has now been completed and the results are attached as Appendix A. 1.7 The consultation requested feedback on five options and gave the opportunity for other options to be suggested. The results of the consultation are not conclusive. Most support was offered for three of the five options:- • Option 2: to allow nos. 2-48 Telegraph Street to apply for up to 2 x residents’ permits and 1 x visitor’s parking permit. Maximum number of permits that could be issued under this option would be 75. 23% of respondents supported this option. • Option 3: to allow nos. 2-48 Telegraph Street to apply for up to 2 x residents’ permits and remove the visitor’s parking permit. Maximum number of permits that could be issued under this option would be 53. 31% of respondents supported this option . • Option 5: to revert to the approved level of permits. Maximum number of permits that could be issued under this option would be 31. 26% of respondents supported this option. 1.8 There is no consistent theme emerging from the 5% of respondents who offered alternative suggestions. The suggestions can be viewed as Appendix A. 1.9 The Pay and Display equipment installed in the Telegraph Street car park allows us to monitor ticket sales throughout the day. The table below shows the occupancy levels for the car park based on ticket sales throughout the summer of 2013. Not everyone will stay for the full time allowed by their ticket so these figures are likely to be slightly higher than actual occupancy. Charges apply in this car park between the hours of 9:00am and 6:00pm. Outside these hours and whilst there is no specific data, it is generally accepted that there is spare capacity within the car park. Occupancy Percentage Summer 2013
Time April May June July August 9:00:00 67% 67% 70% 72% 66% 10:00:00 87% 90% 87% 92% 91% 11:00:00 97% 91% 88% 95% 97% 12:00:00 82% 77% 80% 80% 78%
Page 334
13:00:00 70% 68% 68% 65% 65% 14:00:00 74% 74% 70% 69% 66% 15:00:00 74% 69% 70% 66% 71% 16:00:00 48% 46% 53% 52% 51% 17:00:00 21% 22% 27% 23% 19% 18:00:00 1% 1% 2% 2% 1% 1.10 Some of the properties that are eligible for permits within Telegraph Street car park have their own off-street parking provision and it is not proposed to offer permits to these properties. 1.11 The current £25 fee for the residents’ permit is similar to the price charged for an on-street permit; it is, however, significantly less than the cost of maintaining a car parking space. This could be considered a subsidy to certain residents and The Cabinet may wish to be mindful of this when considering the appropriate cost of the tickets. 1.12 When authority was given in 2002 to grant up to one permit for each eligible property, the annual cost of permits was set at £25. Since this time, the price has remained at this level and has not been subject to any inflationary review. It may be appropriate to increase the cost of the permits to reflect the inflation that has occurred since 2002 and to include this in the charge in the Council’s schedule of fees and charges that are reviewed annually. Based on RPI since 2002, the current charge could be updated to £35 a year. 1.13 If The Cabinet is minded to make additional season tickets available for purchase by the residents of eligible properties, then the cost of these will need to be agreed. The season tickets offered to the occupiers of the Old Bakery were priced at £175 and were subject to an annual renewal requirement so that the situation could be kept under review. Similar parameters could be applied to season tickets offered to residents of Telegraph Street if The Cabinet feels this is more appropriate.
2 Options available to The Cabinet 2.1 To endorse one of the options set out in the consultation and to authorise the Head of Technical Services, in consultation with Portfolio Holder for Technical Services, to implement the preferred option. 2.2 To suggest alternative options. 2.3 To request further research.
3 Evidence Base 3.1 Evidence used in the compilation of this report has been obtained from the following sources:- • reports to and Minutes of meetings of Shipston Town Council and Stour Area Community Committee; • the Residents’ Parking Consultation; • statistics obtained from Pay and Display machines.
4 Members’ Comments 4.1 Councillor Jeff Kenner
Page 335
4.1.1 I strongly support the retention of 2 x resident’s permits and 1 x visitor’s permit. I see no evidence that this would cause any problems for users of the car park and it will bring in some additional income. This would regularise the existing arrangements which would be the sensible response to the consultation.
4.1.2 The removal of the visitor’s permit would create an unfair anomaly. Residents with on-street parking in Shipston town centre receive two residents’ permits and a visitor’s permit. Therefore, if the visitor’s permit is removed this would put the residents of 2-48 Telegraph Street at a disadvantage simply because they have double yellow lines outside their house and have to rely on the Council car park which, exceptionally, is a paying car park.
4.1.3 It is the view of the residents most immediately affected that they should have a permit for their visitors.
4.2 Councillor Richard Cheney
4.2.1 Option 2, that is two passes plus a visitor pass per household, is still my preferred option. This allows flexibility, in that I am aware that some of these houses are occupied by elderly residents who don't themselves have cars but their visitors may well have and may need to visit without having concern about their parking time running out.
4.2.2 Although the potential number of passes that could be issued under Option 2 appears to be high, due to the type of houses in this length of Telegraph Street, I doubt that many more than the current 18 passes would be issued. 5 Implications of the proposal 5.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 5.1.1 The Off-Street Parking Places order covers exemptions which will allow any of these options to be implemented. 5.2 Financial 5.2.1 The 70 spaces within Telegraph Street car park generate an income of approximately £23,360 per year. The gross costs of operating this car park, including NNDR payable for the car park, is £17,670 in total which equates to £252.43 per space. 5.3 Environmental 5.3.1 The amount of public car parking available affects the levels of circulating and standing traffic within Shipston-in-Stour which may affect air quality. 5.4 Corporate Strategy 5.4.1 The decision affects Aim 3 – Improving access to Services.
5.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 5.5.1 The current levels of parking for the disabled will be maintained. An Equality Impact Assessment screening opinion has been undertaken and no other issues were identified.
Page 336
6 Risk Assessment 6.1 Charging was introduced to Telegraph Street car park to try and ensure it was available for shoppers and people looking to use the businesses within Shipston-on-Stour. If spaces are regularly occupied by permit holders, public parking will be reduced and this could affect the economic viability of businesses within the town. This needs of businesses must, however, be balanced against allowing a reasonable parking provision of the residents of Telegraph Street.
7 Conclusion 7.1 The evidence provided by the consultation suggests that there is some support (69%) for continuing to allow at least two residents’ permits for the identified properties. There is less support for the retention of the visitors’ permits and a significant minority (26%) feels that the one permit per household should be enforced.
Tony Perks HEAD OF TECHNICAL SERVICES
Page 337
Appendix A
Residents’ Parking Consultation for Telegraph Street, Shipston-on-Stour
Results
Between 11 October 2013 to the end of the month, 61 responses were received for the above consultation. 48 were received online and 13 were received by post using a FREEPOST address. The online survey was available on the Stratford-on-Avon District Council website. Those persons affected, together with other interested parties were mailed a questionnaire: the residents of 2-48 Telegraph Street; relevant Ward Members; business organisations and Shipston Town Council. Other local persons who belonged to the Citizens’ Panel and whose email addresses were already on file, were sent a questionnaire to complete on-line.
The information given as background is shown below.
Stratford-on-Avon District Council is undertaking a review of the use of the Telegraph Street car park in Shipston-on-Stour. Within Shipston-on-Stour there are four car parks; West Street, Bridge Street, Mill Street and Telegraph Street. West Street, Bridge Street and Mill Street are all free car parks with no restrictions, meanwhile, Telegraph Street is a ‘pay and display’ short-stay car park.
Telegraph Street Car Park has 70 spaces.
The tariff operating within this car park is set to encourage short stays so that spaces are available for people using shops and businesses in the town. Alongside this use, the car park provides residents’ parking for 22 properties located on Telegraph Street and nine properties known as the Old Bakery.
Residents’ parking has been available within the Telegraph Street car park since 2002. The original joint decision made by Stratford-on-Avon District Council and Shipston-on-Stour Town Council allowed one resident’s permit per property for the 22 identified properties on Telegraph Street.
It has come to our attention that currently some residents of Telegraph Street have been issued with more than the one parking permit for the use of Telegraph Street car park and that this situation has continued for a number of years. There does not appear to be any authority to issue these permits. This matter needs resolving quickly and the purpose of this consultation is to seek views on possible solutions.
To date five possible solutions to this issue have been identified. To allow The Cabinet of Stratford-on-Avon District Council to make an informed decision on how to take this matter forward, it would be useful if you could provide your opinion on each of the following options and suggest any alternatives you
Page 338
consider should be taken into account in the comments section of the consultation response form.
Page 339
OPTIONS AND RESULT
Option 1: to allow nos. 2-48 Telegraph Street to apply for up to 3 x residents’ permits and 1 x visitor’s permit on a similar basis to the ‘on- street’ scheme. This would effectively allow the current situation to continue, however, if all properties were to take up their full allocation of permits, there would be 97 permits issued for a car park of 70 spaces. This may limit the ability of the car park to fulfill its primary function as a shopper’s car park. In practice, it is unlikely that all properties would take up their full allocation, although this could not be prevented. Currently 18 permits have been issued. 2 responses received (3.3%)
Option 2: to allow nos. 2-48 Telegraph Street to apply for up to 2 x residents’ permits and 1 x visitor’s parking permit. This would provide a compromise solution, allowing residents to park up to 2 cars and 1 visitor. If all properties took up their full allocation of permits under this option, 75 permits could be issued. 14 responses received (23.0%)
Option 3: to allow nos. 2-48 Telegraph Street to apply for up to 2 x residents’ permits and remove the visitor’s parking permit. This would again provide a compromise solution, allowing residents to park up to 2 x cars with visitors paying ‘pay and display’. If all properties took up their full allocation of permits under this option, 53 permits could be issued. 19 responses received (31.1%)
Option 4: to allow those properties that currently have more than one permit to continue with their current allocation but to restrict new applicants to one permit per property. This would limit the number of permits that could be issued to 40 but could be considered inequitable. 7 responses received (11.5%)
Option 5: to revert to the approved level of permits. The permits could be reduced back to one per property, as originally agreed. The maximum number of permits that could then be issued would be 31. This option would inconvenience those properties that have held more than one permit for a number of years. A transition period could, however, be offered to current permit holders to allow them to make alternative arrangements. 16 responses received (26.2%)
Page 340
OTHER OPTIONS
3 responses received (4.9%)
If another option, please give details in the box below or provide any comments you may wish to make in general.
‘The car park is never at capacity, most people park along my street as it is free. What is the issue if it has carried on and gone in noticed for years? Will you be reducing my allocation then as time goes on and more developments take place as the Old Bakery should not have any allocations as it was not in their planning permission? This is the real reason their allocation is being reduced because they have been given passes and you need to get some back. Anyway, I heard the Old Bakery pay more to have them than we do so I expect an increase in my costs next renewal.’
‘My only question here would be regarding whether the visitors' permits were being abused. I do use Telegraph Street Car Park as a shopper and can usually get parked, although it does always seem busy. There do need to be some spaces available to shoppers!!’
‘(Apologies for the lack of any extra advice as I am unfamiliar with present parking problems and other associated issues in Shipston.) B.E.’
‘Residents need to be able to park their cars without risk of getting a parking fine. Giving residents parking fines is scandalous and totally unnecessary.’
‘I opt for Option 5 to allow an extra permit, with car registration, allowed to park overnight for people returning home from work before the free parking starts, e.g. 4.30pm, when most of the shoppers have finished using the car park.’
‘I am currently interested in purchasing a property on Telegraph Street but this issue has delayed any progress for three months currently. As someone who wants to stay in Shipston and purchase their first property, parking is essential due to a lack of local jobs. I work in Coventry and my partner in Solihull, so public transport isn't really feasible. The issue of parking provision isn't purely a numbers game but links to the viability of the town in terms of its housing market (you'd be devaluing homes by reducing or removing current arrangements), the viability of the community (we are a young couple who wish to stay and purchase our own home in Shipston and begin our own family) and thus the local economy by risking us needing to move elsewhere. It seems a small concession for SDC to make, given the benefits that it would bring.’
‘Most people who live on Telegraph Street work during the day. As such, the car park is free for shoppers at this time. The fact that residents
Page 341
have been provided with more permits than current policy suggests they should have, and that this has worked well, removes any concern that the car park will be over filled. Furthermore, Shipston has plenty of parking for shoppers on Mill Street and High Street.’
‘This should be the same as everywhere and it won't make a difference to the shoppers parking as some come on the bus or park on Sheep Street. The car park is never full.’
‘I think that one permit per household is a fair solution, given that alternative free parking is available. I hold one permit and a visitor's permit, which I will not seek to renew as paying for my visitor’s pass is cheaper for me. From what I can see, there are a maximum of ten cars parked in the car park with permits displayed.’
‘99% of the time there are many spaces available in the car park at all times. Only on SATURDAY mornings between 10.30am-12.00pm are spaces at a premium, with only two or three vacant at one time. I have conducted the survey over the past month. Therefore I'm prepared to move both our cars, if you think necessary, at 10.15am each Saturday morning to allow two extra spaces for visitors during this one-off busy period. (Name and address withheld).’
‘1). One resident and one visitor. Or 2). One resident and one visitor with the permission for non-driver household to ‘sell’ the permits to multi-driver household.’
‘Option 3 - up to 2 x residents’ and 1 visitor pass for visiting family such as children returning from university. In the two years that I lived opposite the Telegraph Car Park there are NEVER more than 8/10 cars parked belonging to residents.’
‘I do not have a car.’
‘I think it would be wiser for someone to go door-to-door and get proof of cars at these houses as most only have one car and are probably getting passes for people who do not live in Telegraph Street. I would like one permit for visitors if it was possible but I have not applied as I know that because of the amount of permits in use it reduces the daily revenue on this car park. You would need people to have proof of car being registered at the address/or company car but you will find some get passes for people in other streets."
‘I think to be fair there should be permits as parking near your house is essential these days to keep an eye on your car. However, perhaps one resident’s parking permit - plus one visitor’s permit per household for when friends or family would like to come."
Page 342
‘Make the car park a free one, problem solved, also let STC make the rules for our town.’
‘I see no reason why the current situation of two residents’ permits and one visitor permit should alter for the 9 (nine - that's correct) properties (and not as your statement of numbers 2-48 Telegraph Street references as it does not apply to all of these and thus factually incorrect). During the recent MOP fair which closes the High Street (Square) to free public parking there was still ample parking - indeed on the various occasions when I visited the car parks there was at least a spare capacity of one third. I also feel that the residents of Telegraph Street are being vindicated and discriminated against in compared to other permit allocations in other streets within the town. Also, it is clear that many of the residents have lived in the street for many years and have had this ‘rationing’ imposed upon them unfairly over the in recent years when the car park was a free parking facility again without consultation. I do hope that the council sees sense and appreciates that there is currently sufficient and ample parking throughout the town with the current levels of permit allocation, two residents’ and one visitor pass, (compared to 3 + 1 for Sheep Street, etc.) without further sanctions and regulation being imposed unfairly on the people of Telegraph Street."
‘Due to the properties not being able to even park outside the houses - vehicles need to be near at hand. However, one residents' permit plus one visitors’ should be sufficient per household visitors, mainly because of family, etc.’
‘I would like to bring to your notice that nos. 2, 6, 28, 34, 36, have off- road parking; having double yellow lines the entire length of Telegraph Street. I attended many meetings relating to the new build at the rear of the Bakery. One of my main concerns was the amount of new properties that would require parking. I was told this was not an issue as this was not a requirement when building new housing and they would not need off-road parking. Provision should have been made within the redevelopment. Once again long-term residents of Telegraph Street are victimised.’
"Comments. Whilst it is tenable for permits to be held during the week at higher levels on the presumption that people will not use the spaces during the working weekday-come-Saturday when people/residents are off work, they would be taking far too many spaces at the cost of provision for genuine customers bringing income to the town.’
"If the ticket to park for visitors or shoppers is kept at the very reasonable price at the machines, nobody can complain. Also, should permission be given for the supermarket? There will be many parking spaces as shoppers will be going up Campden Road to shop and park. The Old Bakery Flats should be addressed as Sheep Street, as is the Bakery Shop! Far too many dwellings in one small space - very overcrowded.’
Page 343
Postcodes (where given) CV35 0QR CV36 4DA CV36 4EG CV36 5DR CV35 0SP CV36 4DA CV36 4EU CV36 5HG CV35 9JW CV36 4DA CV36 4FB CV36 5LH CV36 CV36 4DA CV36 4GF CV37 8NY CV36 5R CV36 4DA CV36 4HB CV37 8TF CV36 4AF CV36 4DA CV36 4HD CV37 8TT CV36 4AS CV36 4DA CV36 4HH CV37 8TX CV36 4AS CV36 4DA CV36 4HQ CV46 4DA CV36 4BN CV36 4DA CV36 4HW GL56 9SQ CV36 4BP CV36 4DA CV36 4NB OX15 5AU CV36 4BY CV36 4DA CV36 4NB OX15 5HW CV36 4DA CV36 4DP CV36 4NP OX15 5JA CV36 4DA CV36 4DT CV36 4QE CV36 4DA CV36 4DT CV36 4RG CV36 4DA CV36 4DT CV36 4RJ CV36 4DA CV36 4EG CV36 5AR
Page 344 Item 18
THE CABINET 13 JANUARY 2014
Subject: Enforcement of On-Street Parking - Provision of Parking Services Lead Officer: Tony Perks Contact on 01789 260620 Lead Member/ Portfolio Holder: Councillor L Organ
Summary Warwickshire County Council (WCC) is inviting tenders for the provision of on- street parking enforcement throughout Warwickshire. The Cabinet is asked to decide whether it wishes to bid for this contract and whether it wishes to include off-street parking enforcement within the WCC invitations to tender.
Recommendation
(1) That Stratford-on-Avon District Council does not bid for the on- street parking enforcement contract. (2) That Stratford-on-Avon District Council supports WCC in establishing a framework agreement for off-street parking enforcement but that Stratford-on-Avon District Council does not commit to procuring services from this framework.
1 Background/Information 1.1 Decriminalised parking was introduced in Stratford-on-Avon District in 2004. Since this time, Stratford-on-Avon District Council (SDC) has provided an on-street parking enforcement service to WCC on an agency basis. 1.2 Warwickshire County Council (WCC) has decided that it wishes to invite tenders for the parking enforcement service from the open market and in October 2012 gave the two-years notice required to terminate its agency agreement with SDC. 1.3 The decision to cancel the agency agreement has been reviewed by the Scrutiny Committee at WCC and the decision has been confirmed by WCC Cabinet. 1.4 Early in 2014, WCC plans to invite tenders for the provision of an on- street parking enforcement service throughout Warwickshire and SDC has the option to bid for this contract. 1.5 It is anticipated that bids will be invited for two lots:-
Page 345 • The provision of parking enforcement patrols and a full back office service covering administration and appeals. • The provision of parking enforcement patrols only. In this instance back office functions would be provided by WCC. 1.6 Bids will be invited from public and private sector providers and a single provider must cover the whole of Warwickshire. 1.7 The current agency agreement is limited to the boundaries of SDC and the services that SDC provides are charged back to WCC at cost. Under this arrangement there is no financial risk to SDC. 1.8 The proposed contract will require the successful bidder to provide services throughout Warwickshire at a fixed rate established by competitive tender. If SDC was to bid for the contract, we would be required to operate outside of the SDC boundaries at commercial risk. 1.9 SDC has an interest in ensuring that a reasonable on-street parking service is operated within the District. To achieve this there would be advantages in working with WCC to develop a specification that ensured that our interests, our residents’ and our businesses interests in on- street parking were properly represented. 1.10 WCC has indicated that it would be amenable to this principle, however, if SDC decides to bid for the contract there could be potential conflicts of interest that may make this difficult to achieve. 1.2 Off-Street Parking 1.2.1 The responsibility for parking enforcement within SDC car parks would remain with SDC. Currently this service is combined with the on-street enforcement service, so when the on-street situation changes, new arrangements will need to be put in place. 1.2.2 There are a number of ways this service could be provided in the future and it is suggested that an appraisal of a range of options is carried out and presented to The Cabinet for discussion in due course. 1.2.3 WCC proposes to invite bidders to provide a schedule of rates for off- street parking enforcement that could be set up as a framework from which District Councils could call off work, if they wished to, at a later stage. 1.2.4 In order to be included in this arrangement, SDC would be required to provide basic information about SDC car parks for inclusion within the tender pack so that bidders can prepare informed bids. There would be no commitment to call off work from this framework if SDC chooses to provide off-street enforcement in a different way.
2 Options available to The Cabinet 2.1 The Cabinet is asked to make decisions on two matters. 2.2 Issue 1: Whether to enter a bid for the on-street enforcement contract. 2.3 Options:- • To decide to bid for the on-street enforcement contract; • To decide not to bid for the on-street enforcement contract and work with WCC to develop the tender specification;
Page 346 • To decide not to bid for the on-street enforcement contract and allow WCC to develop the tender specification without input from SDC. 2.4 Issue 2: Whether to support the establishment of a WCC framework for off-street parking enforcement. 2.5 Options:- • To provide basic information and support the establishment of the framework without committing to procuring any services through any framework that may be established; • To chose not to support the establishment of the framework.
3 Evidence Base 3.1 Evidence to support this report has been gathered from the Scrutiny and Cabinet meetings at WCC, from meetings with other District Council parking providers and from meetings with WCC officers.
4 Members’ Comments 4.1 These have been incorporated within the report.
5 Implications of the proposal 5.1 Legal/Human Rights Implications 5.1.1 If The Cabinet is minded to enter a bid for the contract, as it involves operating at commercial risk outside of the District boundaries, further investigation work would be required to establish the legal mechanism through which this could be delivered. 5.2 Financial 5.2.1 The costs of the parking service are currently divided between SDC and WCC, to reflect the work that is carried out on-street and off-street. If the on-street service transfers to another provider, an element of fixed costs is likely to remain with SDC and an alternative provision of off- street enforcement will need to be provided. 5.3 Environmental 5.3.1 Parking enforcement reduces congestion which has environmental benefits. 5.4 Corporate Strategy 5.4.1 Influences Aim 2 – a District where Business and Enterprise can flourish and Aim 3 – Access to Services. 5.5 Analysis of the effects on Equality 5.5.1 The parking service employs a significant number of staff. TUPE transfer arrangements will be put in place to ensure their employment rights are upheld.
6 Risk Assessment 6.1 The current on-street parking enforcement arrangements present low financial risk to SDC. Providing a County-wide service at a fixed price significantly increases this financial risk. SDC is not experienced in
Page 347 operating commercially in this area and although a potential financial return could be generated, there is also the risk of financial and reputational losses to SDC, many of which would come from outside the SDC boundary.
7 Conclusion 7.1 On-street parking enforcement is an important issue for SDC; it maintains traffic flow which in turn improves road safety and supports residents and businesses. The current on-street parking enforcement arrangements have been effective and the experience gained from providing this service could prove useful to both parties in developing a specification for the future of this service.
7.2 SDC will need to continue to provide off-street parking enforcement and the value of the framework should be appraised alongside other options.
Tony Perks HEAD OF TECHNICAL SERVICES
Background papers:
WCC Cabinet and Scrutiny Papers
Page 348 Item 20
Leader’s Advisory Group
Note of meeting held on 7 October 2013
Present: Councillors Saint, Beamer, Kerridge & Roache Dave Nash & Paul Harris
Apologies: Councillor Thirlwell
1. Notes of previous meeting
Agreed.
2. Planning Inspectorate Advisory Visit
The meeting considered key issues raised by the Inspector: Gypsies & Travellers – agreed that progress needed to be made to identify sites as a matter of priority and that the preparation of a Development Plan Document should be accelerated. DN to advise on what additional resources will be needed to do this work. Duty to Co-operate – accepted that a Statement needs to be produced before the Core Strategy goes through its formal consultation. Memoranda of Understanding or other forms of written confirmation should be sought from neighbouring authorities and key infrastructure providers to confirm that any strategic matters have been resolved satisfactorily. Housing requirement – agreed that our local Plan needs to reflect a 15 year horizon and further work needs to be carried out with neighbouring authorities to make sure that Stratford District’s natural housing market area has been assessed. The latest situation for the sub-region based on 2011 Census and other data is anticipated shortly. Any request from the GBSLEP authorities that the Council should consider accommodating additional housing demand based on the Birmingham situation would be dealt with in a subsequent review of the Core Strategy. Sustainability Appraisal – accepted that all the SA work should be amalgamated into a single report. Further work is also needed to ensure that the assessment of the large-scale development options has been carried out in a robust and consistent manner. Green Belt – agreed that a clear statement is needed about the intention not to modify the extent of the Green Belt to facilitate large-scale development. It is also necessary to assess the basis for removing specific sites from the Green Belt against its purposes as set out in the NPPF. 3. Progressing the Core Strategy In light of the need to undertake further work on a range of fundamental matters, LAG agreed that Council should not be recommended to approve the Proposed Submission Core Strategy for formal consultation at its meeting on 21 October. Provisionally, it was proposed that the Core Strategy should be considered by The Cabinet in January, followed by a special meeting of Council, and formal consultation commencing as soon as possible after that. DN to advise on what additional resources are needed to ensure this timetable is achieved.
Page 349 This page has been left intentionally blank Item 20 Appendix 1
Leader’s Advisory Group
Note of meeting held on 2 December 2013
Present: Councillors Saint, Thirlwell, Beamer, Kerridge & Roache Dave Nash, John Careford, Ian Motuel
1. Notes of previous meeting
Revised notes agreed.
The following was clarified: Greater Birmingham & Solihull LEP have commissioned further work to assess housing capacity within their area. Birmingham is unlikely to be able to meet identified housing need within the city area. If additional capacity to accommodate this need cannot be found within the area covered by the other 9 GBSLEP authorities, they will then collectively approach adjacent districts such as Stratford-on-Avon to seek their co-operation in meeting the need. If SDC were to accept that it is appropriate in the circumstances that some need should be met within Stratford-on-Avon District then it would work to identify appropriate sites through a review of its Core Strategy.
2. Local Service Village (LSV) Methodology
Further refinements to the methodology for identifying LSVs were discussed, including in particular a more specific approach to assessing public transport provision. It was accepted that where a village has a less than 2hr frequency bus service a single point under the transport criterion should be awarded only when this includes a service that runs at both morning and evening peak. Officers were asked to consider whether Bearley and Claverdon should score more highly on the transport criterion in view of the local accessibility to rail services. The results of the refined methodology will be reflected in the revised Submission Core Strategy. Members requested that the results be circulated as an Information Sheet and considered by EPHPAP in the New Year.
3. Revision of the Plan Period NPPF is explicit that Core Strategies need to run a minimum of 15 years post adoption and this was re-emphasised via the PINS advisory visit. Given the anticipated timetable to adoption it is evident that the plan period needs to be rolled forward and officers recommend the plan period should cover 2011 to 2031. This was generally endorsed. It was noted that one of the effects would be to require a re-assessment of the ‘under supply’ of new housing in the plan period to date. It would also be necessary to review the housing requirement figure. Such matters are being incorporated into the additional and updated technical work being commissioned.
4. Affordable Housing Viability Members noted that the most recent study dates from 2009 and as such there are likely to be challenges at the examination stage in 2014 that the evidence to support a 35% affordable housing requirement, the reduced site size thresholds and the tenure split in Policy CS.18 is out of date. Viability evidence is required by the NPPF. The failure to specify this work in the originally published EPHPAP report
Page 351 was queried. Officers acknowledged the original oversight – hence the addendum – and advised that the need for such work has been made more evident by the apparent difference between the findings of the District SHMA (published in Jan 13) and more recent Coventry and Warwickshire SHMA. In respect of any affordable housing percentage, the group was reminded that it is relative to the number of eligible sites and the site size thresholds. The key issue is to ensure the delivery of the overall quantum of affordable housing each year. Concern was raised about the potential that the further evidence work being commissioned would delay the submission of the Core Strategy. Officers advised that it is imperative to ensure that the evidence base is fully up to date if the plan is to be found sound. The transport assessment is one key study which is already being progressed, but this itself will not be complete until March 2014. Other studies will run in parallel with this.
5. Strategic Housing Options Peter Brett Associates are to be retained to undertake additional work on the viability and deliverability of strategic sites at Southam Cement Works, Long Marston Airfield, SE Stratford, Stoneythorpe and Gaydon/Lighthorne Heath. A separate piece of work will be commissioned regarding the viability and deliverability of the Canal Quarter development. Work on both reports is expected to start before Christmas with final reports due by 28 February (PBA) and 14 March (Canal Quarter). The group was updated on the latest information available from the developer/landowner regarding the promotion of these sites.
6. Further Consultation The group was advised that since the last ‘open’ consultation in 2012 there have been significant changes to the Core Strategy (for example, increase in housing number from 8,000 and more development in Stratford-upon-Avon town than originally envisaged). It is considered important to consult on the latest position regarding the quantum and distribution of the housing requirement prior to formal consultation on the proposed submission document. The consultation would need to run in Jan/Feb and would seek opinions on a range of potential options. Concern was again raised about further potential delay to the Core Strategy process. Officers advised that there would be no additional delay since any consultation would be run in parallel with the preparation of further technical work (see above). The proposed consultation would reduce the risk of challenges to the soundness and legality of the Core Strategy.
Page 352 Item 21
ENTERPRISE, PLANNING AND HOUSING POLICY ADVISORY PANEL
3 December 2013
Held at Room 002, Elizabeth House, Stratford-upon-Avon Meeting commenced: 1.00 p.m. Meeting ended: 2.24 p.m.
MINUTES
Present: Councillor Maurice Howse (Chairman); Councillors Beamer, Ellard, Johnston, Moorse and Roache.
Apologies: Councillor R Hamburger
23. Disclosure of Interest
No disclosures of interest were made at this point of the meeting.
24. Minutes
The Minutes of the meeting of the Panel held on 20 August 2013 were confirmed and signed.
25. Core Strategy Evidence Base - Update
The Panel was presented with a report that provided an assessment of the evidence base already produced to support the Core Strategy and outlined what further work should be commissioned to review and update the evidence in the light of current circumstances.
The Panel was informed that to comply with the National Planning Policy Framework the Leader of the Council intended to recommend to Council that the plan period for the Core Strategy should be revised to 2011 – 2031 to give at least 15 years post adoption. Accordingly, the Panel was informed that the rolling forwards would lead to a change in the overall quantum of development and, as a result, the evidence base would need to be reviewed to have regard to the new plan period.
In view of the above, all the existing evidence base studies had been assessed to determine whether they were sufficiently up-to-date to support the Intended Proposed Submission Core Strategy, together with subsequent changes considered by The Cabinet and any other significant changes of circumstance since each study was produced.
Arising from this assessment, further work should be commissioned on the following aspects of the evidence base:
• Housing Requirement (to reflect new plan period);
• Sustainability Appraisal and possibly the Habitat Regulations Assessment;
• District Water Cycle Study;
• Transport Assessment;
• Comparison and Convenience Retail Studies;
Page 353
• Deliverability and viability of the Canal Quarter Regeneration Zone and Gaydon/Lighthorne Heath development proposals and possibly at other sites;
• CIL – particularly in relation to retail development;
• Sub-regional Employment Land Study (this is covered in a separate report to the Panel); and
• Renewable Energy Sensitivity Study (this is covered in a separate report to the Panel).
The report presented to the Panel summarised, in broad terms, the scope of the additional work required.
In considering the report, the Panel:
1. noted that the total cost of the additional work was estimated to be between £120,000 and £150,000 and all reports should be received by mid-March 2014; and
2. agreed that any delay in receiving the reports would be regrettable.
Having regard to the above, it was
RESOLVED:
That the scope of additional studies to review and update the evidence base, as outlined in the report presented to the Panel be endorsed.
26. Coventry and Warwickshire Sub-Regional Employment Land Study
The Panel was presented with a report outlining the intention of the Coventry and Warwickshire local authorities to commission an employment land study to assess the need for an employment site(s) of sub-regional significance to be provided over the next 15 years. The Panel was informed that the study was also intended to assess the employment site requirements for each local authority area, taking into account existing employment land studies that had been produced.
The report indicated that it was expected that the study should in particular draw from the significant evidence base which existed in relation to proposals for major employment sites within and adjacent to the sub-region, including the Coventry and Warwickshire Gateway, DIRFT (near Rugby), MIRA (near Nuneaton), and Ansty (near Coventry). It was proposed that the study would include the following contents:
• a gap analysis and quality check of existing Employment Land Studies undertaken by each local authority to identify any cross- boundary issues building on initial work already undertaken by Warwickshire County Council;
• an assessment of the need within each local authority area for employment site requirements over the next 15 years by land use type and size;
Page 354
• an assessment of the need within the Coventry & Warwickshire Local Enterprise Partnership (CWLEP) area for an employment site(s) of sub- regional significance over the next 15 years by land type and size of site;
• an assessment of the future growth aspirations of the CWLEP and the type and nature of land necessary to facilitate this;
• based on the existing local studies and a call for sites, undertake a desk-top exercise to identify and assess potential employment sites and options to meet the identified need within the sub-region;
• if a sub-regional site was required, produce a detailed assessment of the site options to identify the most appropriate strategy and sites to deliver the land to meet sub-regional employment need. In particular, to define the size and type of site(s) needed to meet any need and to assess potential site options to accommodate this; and
• to recommend a preferred site or sites.
The Panel was informed that WS Atkins had been appointed to undertake the Study.
The Panel considered that it was important that up-to-date evidence was available to underpin the Council’s Core Strategy and in preparing the study, it was important that the consultants had a thorough understanding of the Council’s position and the material already available. In addition, the Panel noted that it was not anticipated that the outcome of the study would undermine the situation regarding the amount and location of proposed employment land as set out in the Intended Proposed Submission Core Strategy endorsed by the Council at its meeting on 22 July.
Following discussion, it was
RESOLVED:
That the scope of the proposed Coventry and Warwickshire Sub-Regional Employment Land Study be endorsed.
27. Renewable Energy Sensitivity Study
The Panel was presented with a paper that provided an overview of a renewable energy sensitivity study and considered why it would be appropriate to commission a study to assist in the preparation of the Council’s Core Strategy and the determination of future proposals for large scale wind and solar PV energy developments.
The Panel was informed that the CAMCO study entitled ‘ Renewable and Low Carbon Resource Assessment and Feasibility Study’ (April 2010), which formed part of the Council’s evidence base, had assessed the potential viability and deliverability of low carbon and renewable technologies in the District, including wind and solar energy resources. The study’s findings had been based on a number of assumptions and gad concluded that the District had significant potential capacity for wind and solar PV energy technologies.
The Panel acknowledged that although the CAMCO report recommended a landscape impact for wind energy, it would be beneficial to also consider the impact of large/field scale solar PV proposals on the landscape within the study
Page 355
as the Council had received a number of applications for large scale renewable energy proposals.
Arising from the above, it was considered that a renewable energy sensitivity study should be commissioned to assist the Council by providing further robust evidence to inform its spatial approach to renewable energy technologies and the determination of future renewable energy proposals in the District. It was proposed that the scope of the proposed study would require consultants to carry out the work in three stages, as follows:
1. Stage One to include a desk-based review of the planning policy and guidance, a definition of the landscape types and a sensitivity refinement;
2. Stage Two to involve undertaking site visits to assess the landscape character types and their sensitivity to their identified renewable energy technologies and carrying out GIS mapping of the landscape’s sensitivity; and
3. Stage Three to comprise the preparation for the report and a presentation.
The options open to the Panel were to:
a) recommend that a renewable energy sensitivity study be commissioned to supplement the policy approach set out in the emerging Core Strategy and to form a material consideration in the determination of planning applications for commercial wind energy and field scale solar PV energy proposals within the District; or
b) discount the need for a renewable energy sensitivity study.
The Panel accepted that a study would provide a robust methodology for assessing the sensitivity of the landscape to large scale renewable wind and solar PV energy technologies.
Having regard to the above, it was
RESOLVED:
That the brief for the proposed Renewable Energy Sensitivity Study be endorsed.
During the discussion on this subject, concerns were expressed over proposals for fracking in Warwickshire and the prospect of sites being identified within the District. The Policy Manager noted the Panel’s concerns and agreed to raise the subject at the next available Warwickshire Planning Officers meeting and to report back to the Panel in due course.
28. Monitoring of Housing Strategy
The Panel received an update on the progress made by the Council and its partners in delivering the Housing Strategy 2009-2014: Review 2012 Action Plan. The report sought support from the Panel on any necessary changes to the action plan.
The Panel noted that from the 59 milestones contained in the Action Plan:
• 25 had been achieved;
Page 356
• 28 were on target (green); • 4 had not been achieved; • 1 will not be achieved (red); and • 1 had failed in the first instance (amber) with no change required to the target date.
The Panel was informed that Action 26.4 of the action plan was to agree when next to review the existing Housing Strategy (2009-2014), incorporating the Council’s Private Sector Housing Strategy and Homelessness Strategy. The Leader of the Council and the Enterprise, Planning and Housing Portfolio Holder had agreed that the Strategy be reviewed in 2014 to commence in 2015.
Following discussion, it was
RESOLVED:
That the delivery of the Housing Strategy 2009-2014: Review 2012 Action Plan be noted and the corrective actions identified in the report be endorsed.
29. Affordable Housing Enabling Programme
The Panel received an update on the Council’s affordable housing development programme based on information provided by the Council’s partner housing associations and through other intelligence.
The report indicated that the total number of affordable homes expected to be provided during 2013-14 was 150, of which 34 actual completions had been confirmed to date. A high proportion of supply was expected to result from completions close to the year end with some of the completions being slipped into the next financial year.
The Panel noted that whilst overall progress on delivery of the Programme had been good, there were specific problems with the following three schemes:
• progress on the Stockton site had stalled although negotiations were ongoing with completion expected in March 2015;
• the proposed ‘Local Choice’ scheme at Bishops Itchington would not now proceed;
• the proposed ‘Local Choice’ scheme at Salford Priors would not now proceed as it failed to get support from the local community. It would now be necessary to switch the £110,000 LPSA2 funding from Warwickshire County Council (WCC) for this scheme to another scheme or return the funding to WCC for use elsewhere in the County.
In noting the report, the Panel acknowledged that the provision of homes to meet the needs of local people had been and remained a key objective for the Council who continues to operate an ongoing affordable housing development programme in conjunction with its partners.
30. Housing Service Performance - Dashboard (Quarter 2)
The Panel was presented with key performance information for the Housing Advice and Private Sector Housing Teams for Quarter 2 of 2013/14 which was duly noted.
Page 357
31. Housing and Communities Customer Satisfaction Summary 2012/13 - Stratford-on-Avon District Council and Orbit Heart of England
The Panel was presented with feedback from customers using the Council’s Housing Advice and Private Sector Housing Teams during 2013/13.
The report included performance details in respect of Orbit Heart of England for the years 2010/11 and 2012/13. In respect of concerns raised by the Panel on these performance figures, the Head of Enterprise, Housing & Revenues agreed to raise the issues at the Tri-partite Scrutiny Arrangements with Orbit.
32. Urgent Business
Under this heading, reference was made to the possible need for an additional meeting of the Panel to be held in early January 2014 to agree the scope for the Gypsy and Traveller sustainability appraisal.
CHAIRMAN
Page 358